Book_TE^3_j 
 I 84<S 
 
 
Cj 3 
 
 H H 
 
 O d 
 
 N W 
 
 s2 
 
 5 
 
 V K 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO to 
 
 
 « 
 
 ^ «o 
 
 ^ Sj* 
 
 13 
 
 ^ to 
 
 § • 
 
 S3 
 
 
 '3 
 
 ca 
 
 
 <5 
 
 
 1 
 
 is 
 
 & 
 
 *0 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
FISK'S GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 I XT EE NTH STEREOTYPE EDITION. 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES; 
 
 6 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 THE SUBSTANCE OF THE GREEK SYNTAX, 
 
 ILLUSTRATED BY 
 
 PASSAGES FROM THE BEST GREEK AUTHORS.. TO BE WRITTEN 
 OUT FROM THE WORDS GIVEN IN THEIR SIMPLEST FORM. 
 
 BY 
 
 BENJAMIN FRANKLIN FISK. 
 
 Consuetudo et exercitatio facilitatem maximo parit. 
 
 Quintjl. 
 
 ADAPTED TO THE AUTHOR'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 PUBLISHED BY ROBERT S. DAVIS. 
 
 NEW YORK: Robinson, Pkatt, Sc Co., and Colmns, Brother, be Co. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA. Thomas. Cowpertiiwait, & Co. 
 
 BALTIMORE: CusmNa .t Broth**, 
 
 And sold by the trad.- generally 
 
 1846. 
 
^ 
 
 
 DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : 
 
 District Clerk's Office. 
 
 BE it remembered, that on the thirty-first day of March, A. D. 18S1, 
 in the fifty- fifth year of the Independence of the United States of Amer- 
 ica, Benjamin Franklin Fisk, of the said district, has deposited in this office 
 the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as author, in the words 
 following, to wit : — 
 
 " Greek Exercises ; containing the Substance of the Greek Syntax, 
 illustrated by Passages from the best Greek Authors, to be written out from 
 the Words given in their simplest Form. By Benjamin Franklin Fisk. 
 ' Consuetudo et exercitatio facilitatem maxime parit.' — Quintil. Adapted 
 to the Author's Greek Grammar." 
 
 In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled 
 " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of 
 maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies 
 during the times therein mentioned"; and also to an act, entitled "An 
 act supplementary to an act, entitled, ' An act for the encouragement of 
 learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors 
 'and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned ' ; 
 and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, 
 and etching historical and other prints " 
 
 JNO. W. DAVIS, 
 Clerk of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
 CAMBRIDGE : 
 
 POLSOM, WELLS, AND THIJRSTON, 
 PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Of all the methods proposed for facilitating the acquisition of a language, 
 the writing of exercises is probably attended with greater success than 
 any other By this the learner gains a knowledge of the signification 
 of words, a readiness in varying such as are declinable, and a familiarity 
 with their different constructions in sentences, which could hardly be so 
 thoroughly attained in any other way, even with far more labor. 
 
 With works designed to assist the learner in the performance of this 
 important task, the languages of the more polished nations are furnished, 
 and their utility is tested by the extensive use that is made of them. 
 The Greek language, however, in this respect, has been less fortunate than 
 others ; the books intended to provide for this mode of learning it, which 
 is strongly recommended by many eminent scholars of the present day, 
 being little used from the unskilfulness of their execution. 
 
 But if composition in the Latin and other languages is found so condu- 
 cive to a speedy and thorough acquaintance with them, it must be equally 
 useful in a tongue so copious, so varied by inflection, and so diversified in 
 construction, as the Greek ; and the little attention that has been paid to 
 preparing the aids requisite for this end, is probably owing to the appre- 
 hended difficulty of writing the Greek character. But this obstacle is by 
 no means so formidable as it may at first seem ; and the labor of surmount- 
 ing it will, it is believed, be far more amply recompensed, than any other 
 performed by the Greek student. 
 
 To furnish the learner with the means of practising this method with 
 the greatest ease and profit, is the design of the following pages, which 
 consist of examples carefully chosen from a large number, collected at a 
 great expense of time and labor from the best Greek writers. In making 
 the selection, whenever the scheme of the work allowed sufficient latitude 
 of choice, those examples were always taken, in which some useful informa- 
 tion is given, some beautiful sentiment conveyed, or some salutary maxim 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 inculcated. The engraved page at the beginning exhibits the Greek letters 
 in a fashion so convenient for writing, that very little practice will render 
 the chirography of this language nearly as easy as that of the Latin. Of 
 the two alphabets there given, the first is copied from Hodgkin's " Calli- 
 graphia Graeca," and the other from the magnificent folio edition of Wolf's 
 Homer, printed at Leipsic in 1 806. It will be observed that the two brief 
 maxims from Isocrates, given also* as copies for imitation, comprise all 
 the letters in their various forms. 
 
 The order in which the rules are delivered is generally such, that each 
 preceding one is of more frequent use than those by which it is followed ; 
 and in pursuance of this plan, the rule for the agreement of a verb with its 
 nominative is first given, as without it there can be no complete sentence ; 
 this is followed by that for the agreement of an adjective with its substan- 
 tive, by that for the accusative governed by verbs of a transitive significa- 
 tion, and so on, for a considerable distance from the beginning. 
 
 Great pains were taken, throughout the work, to exclude all such 
 examples as required the knowledge of any subsequent rule ; and hence 
 those under the first are necessarily very short, but those under the next 
 somewhat longer, the power of lengthening them receiving an accession in 
 every succeeding rule. In general, however, where greater extent was not 
 requisite to the completeness of a sentence, or to the preservation of the 
 author's meaning, it was thought advisable not to exceed three or four 
 lines, that the rules might be more variously exemplified, and the volume 
 not unprofitably swelled. 
 
 As the nature of the work required the words of the translation to cor- 
 respond as nearly as possible to the Greek, there was danger of too great 
 a departure from the English idiom ; but that the commission of this 
 fault might be avoided, great care was taken, especially for the illus- 
 tration of the first rules, to select sentences capable of being rendered 
 literally and (when such could be found) in the order of the words 
 composing them. It is believed that the sense of the authors quoted 
 has been given with fidelity ; but should any inaccuracies of this sort 
 exist, they will be readily excused by those acquainted with the difficulty 
 of collecting, arranging, and translating so much unconnected matter. 
 
 The extracts were generally made from the original authors with no 
 alteration. Some of them, however, it was necessary to adapt for 
 admission into the work by retrenching words or parts of sentences ; 
 by employing finite verbs instead of infinitives or participles ; or by 
 discarding the peculiarities of dialects. But none of these licenses affect 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 the words adduced to illustrate the rule, and by none of them is a new 
 meaning or different syntactical structure given to an author ; while 
 without these slight modifications some of the most appropriate exam- 
 pies would have been excluded, and the \alue of others greatly diminished. 
 
 The accents are so useful an appendage to the written language, that it 
 has an ungrateful appearance when divested of them ; and therefore the 
 proper one is here given to every word, as in a lexicon. They can 
 embarrass no one ; fur those who choose to write the Exercises without 
 them, will entirely omit them ; and those who wish to discipline them- 
 selves in suiting the accents to the various inflections and situations of- the 
 words, will be enabled to do this, in almost every instance, by the rules 
 in the Grammar on this subject. 
 
 The Greek Grammar, published not long ago by the author of this 
 volume, is the one to which reference is made throughout. The Notes 
 subjoined to the Exercises are designed to assist the learner, by pointing 
 out the anomalous and the less obvious regular inflections of words, and 
 referr'ng him to those parts of the Grammar in which they are respec- 
 tively treated. These, it is believed, with the Explanations and Direc- 
 tions given below, are all the helps necessary or profitable for the pupil 
 to possess ; but for the immediate convenience of such teachers as are 
 unpractised in this mode of instruction, a Key has been published, which 
 is intended exclusively for their use. 
 
 Such a work as the present, it is obvious, could not be produced 
 without the aid of many volumes not easy to be obtained ; and for some 
 of the most valuable of these, the author has the pleasure of acknowl- 
 edging, himself indebted to the kindness of John Pickering, Esq., to 
 whom the cause of Greek letters in this country owes so much, as well 
 for his own zealous and successful labors, as for encouragement afforded 
 to the efforts of others in the same department of liberal studies. 
 
 Waltham, Massachusetts, 
 March, 1831. 
 
EXPLANATIONS AND DIRECTIONS. 
 
 1. The italicized words in the translation show what part of each exam- 
 pie is to illustrate the rule under which it is given. 
 
 2. The letters affixed to words show the case, number, gender, voice, 
 mode, participle, or tense, in which those words are to be written. 
 
 n denotes nominative. in denotes indicative. 
 
 g genitive. im imperative. 
 
 d dative. o optative. 
 
 a accusative. so subjunctive. 
 
 v vocative. inf infinitive. 
 
 pa participle. 
 
 s singular. 
 
 du dual. pr present. 
 
 p plural. imp imperfect. 
 
 ff first future. 
 
 m 1 masculine. fa first aorist. 
 
 f feminine. p perfect. 
 
 ne neuter. pi pluperfect. 
 
 sa ■ second aorist. 
 
 a active. sf second future. 
 
 p passive. ppf paulo-post-future. 
 
 m middle. 
 
 3. These letters are often omitted, where the section, in which the 
 construction of a word has been exemplified, is either referred to, or 
 supposed to be sufficiently obvious without any reference. Thus neither 
 d is affixed to xogtxph in Example 747., nor S to t/j in Ex. S24., because 
 of the references made in those places. Also Xiy-viv is, given without g in 
 Ex. 452., and <r<pa,T^x without a in Ex. 212., because it will be recollected 
 that the preposition Ik governs the genitive and verbs of a transitive sig- 
 nification the accusative. Moreover the particle of, before substantives in 
 the translation, was generally thought a sufficient sign of those genitives 
 which are governed by substantives, or by partitives, &c, as of the geni- 
 tive of IxxQu in Ex. .599., and of that of ffrgarnyo; in Ex. 691.*; and 
 sometimes in like manner to or for alone denotes the dative after verbs, 
 as that of Zih s in Ex. 1072. 
 
EXPLANATIONS AND DIRECTIONS. Vll 
 
 4. In all the remaining instances the learner is to be guided by the 
 translation, rendering the nominative by the nominative, the singular by 
 the singular, &c. ; thus, 
 
 the nominative Philip, in Ex. 1 16., by the nom. Ql\i*-xos ' 
 
 the singular stone, in Ex. 91., by the ace. sing, of xitas ' 
 
 the plural riches, in Ex. 152., by the plur. of ^JJ/tta ' 
 
 the active verb slay, in Ex. 59., by the pres. act. of airoxniva ' 
 
 and receive, in Ex. 604 , by the pres. mid. of Vi%op.eu ' 
 the passive verb are educated, in Ex. 61., by the pres. pas. of •rathiuu ' 
 the indicative needest, in Ex. 732., by the pres. indie, of tiof/oci ' 
 the imperative watch, in Ex. 357., by the pres. irnperat. of tpv\eLrru ' 
 
 and let him court, in Ex. 678., by the third pers. sing. pres. 
 
 irnperat. of &£ja«i/'a * 
 the infinitive to slay, in Ex. 194., 'by the pres. inf. of ktuvu ' and 
 
 to come, in Ex. 509., by the second aor. inf. act. of t£%of*eu ' 
 the participle having heard, in Ex. 512., by the first aor. part, of 
 
 clkoC'm ' and being asked, in Ex. 175., by the pres. part. pas. of 
 
 IPOJTCtOJ ' 
 
 the present throws, in Ex. 91., by the pres. of p'nrrw ' 
 
 the imperfect was, in Ex. 500 , by the imperf. of tlfti ' 
 
 the first future will deny, in Ex. 79 , by the first future of upiopcti ' 
 
 the perfect has been saved, in Ex. 51., by the perf. pas. of auZ,u ' 
 
 the pluperfect had Jled, in Ex. 531., by the plup. of tpiuycu ' and 
 
 had done by that of toAu . 
 the comparative more useful, in Ex. 459., by the comp. of xgfoipot ' 
 the superlative most rigid, in Ex. 437., by the superl. of axftGzs • 
 
 and most, in Ex. 578., by the superl. of vroXus. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 I. A verb agrees with its nominative in num- 
 ber and person. Grammar, Syntax, Rule III. 
 
 Active. 
 
 1. I have, thou sleep est, he Pres. s/co, evda), nlma, 
 fulls, you two rejoice, they xalgo), xoqevco, §Unw, yo- 
 two dance, we see, you think, plCa, iglyco. ' 
 
 they contend. 
 
 2. I was striking, thgu 
 wast teaching, he ivas trust- 
 itig, you two were saying, 
 they two were commanding , 
 we were suffering, you were 
 learning, they were hoping. 
 
 3. I icill scnd,.thou shalt 1st F. nipno), XaTgevw, cpal- 
 servc, he will show, you two vto, ftaodevo), olxiw, Jxw, 
 shall reign, we shall inhabit, xuxow. 
 
 you icill come, they will injure. 
 
 4. / changed, thou re- 
 proachedst, he did, they two 
 were silent, we confessed, 
 they stayed. 
 
 Imp. rviiTO), diddoxG), Tit- 
 cm voi, Xiyco, xsXivcj, Ttaoxbi, 
 ixavd-dvco, iXni^w. 
 
 1st A. dfieiCa), oveidl£<», 
 nqdoao), oiydto, o/ioXoyeco, 
 fiivw. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 5. I have written, thou Perf. ygdcpoj, adiasca, nlov- 
 hast injured, he has enriched, ■*/£», svgtaxto, dgdio, vi- 
 they two have found, we have xd&>. 
 
 done, you have conquered. 
 
 6. I had known, he had Plup. yiyvcaoxa, ntpTua, fci- 
 sent, we had supped, they nvsu, (toyd-ia*. 
 
 had assisted. 
 
 7. I threw, he fled, you 2d A. /Sa'Mw, cpevya, Xafi- 
 two received, we left, you 6uv(o> Ulna, dldco^i, tI- 
 gave, they placed. -&^(ii. 
 
 8. I shall sow, he will per- 2d F. anslgca, jtsl&ta, tiXsxg*, 
 suade r you shall plait, they xxdva. 
 
 will slay. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 9. lam struck, thou art Pres. naiw, tiItiXtj^i, xigrna, 
 filled, they two are delighted, ngyw, xoXafr. 
 
 we are kept off, they are 
 punished. 
 
 10. I was nourished, he Imp. xgicpa, pctard^a, Xslna, 
 
 was carried, we were left, 
 they were wounded. 
 
 11. I have been persuaded, 
 thou hast been proclaimed, 
 he has been thrown, we have 
 been smitten, they have been 
 turned. 
 
 12. Thou hadst been in- 
 jured, he had been covered, 
 they had been deprived. 
 
 13. I shall be called, thou Pau. xaXiw, d-dma, nXyoow, 
 shalt be buried, he shall be rdaaca. 
 
 smitten,we shall be arranged. 
 
 TlTgttiOXW. 
 
 Perf. nsl&co, xriQVGoa, gl- 
 
 71Tb), TrXrjGOOJ, TQ87KO. 
 
 Plup. ddiTiSb), xaXvmta, ots- 
 
 QStO. 
 
AGREEMENT OV A VERB WITH A NOMINATIVE. 6 
 
 14. I was moved, he was 1st A. xtria, uiairto, nianu, 
 polluted, ire were sent, they nfypoxa. 
 
 were filled. 
 
 15. Thou wilt be saved, 1st F. <jcJ>, vipow, &av- ^ 
 he shall be exalted, we shall /ua>, pamlZoi. 
 
 be admired, yoa shall be 
 baptized. 
 
 16. I was soU, lie was an- 2d A. oxiklu, ayysXkio, /51a- 
 nounced, you were hurt, they titw, endow. 
 
 tccre scattered. 
 
 17. He shall be slain, you 2d F. acpuno), deoa, xqv- 
 shall be beaten, they will be nno. 
 
 concealed- 
 
 Middle. 
 
 18. 1 receive, hebathts, you Pres. xo^l'^, Xova, <jpv- 
 guard yourselves against, luaow, didaoxw. 
 they cause to teach. 
 
 19. Thou armed st thyself, Imp. o*U£a, uq X w, gnuya, 
 he hfgan, we hastened, they -luaaw. 
 
 set themselves in array. 
 
 20. J have appeared, he Perf. cpalvxa, Xdnw, dioxw, 
 has left, you have seen, they noaooo). 
 
 It an done. 
 
 21. Thou hadst heard, it Plup. uxovco, xi)xm, 7rao*w. 
 left d, they had suffered. 
 
 22. I hired, thou causedst 1st A. piodou, noiico, xa- 
 to make t he covered himself ", Xvnioj, Tiruaaoi, ypucpoj. 
 they two shook, they accused. 
 
 2'3. / will arm myself, he 1st F. dupr-aou, xivio), a- 
 will move, they will depart. nuMuaab). 
 
4 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 24. I found, he drew to 2d A. evglaxa, ngoodyco, 
 himself, we sold, they turned. txTiodldoifii,, jginm. 
 
 25. I shall obey, they will 2d F. nel&a, nlnna. 
 fall 
 
 Active. 
 
 26. Physicians cut, two 3 Iong6g Tspva, liwv cpvXdooa), 
 lions guard, horses ran, two Xnnog &i(o im P, -frtganav xo- 
 servants took care of, heralds ^8oo imp , xr\gv$ vipojf a . 
 distributed. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 27. TVine is found, men Oivog svgloxa, dvrig naraXsl- 
 were left behind, breastplates na> im P, #w'oa| nogl^oi^. 
 were provided. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 28. Robbers approach, en- Ayaxrig TigoaigxofiaL, noXifiiog 
 emies appeared, let Phoenix (palvoi im P, d>otV/| r\y so- 
 lead. [icu fa . 
 
 II. An adjective agrees with a substantive in 
 gender, number, and case. Grammar, Rule II. 
 
 29. Long walls. Maxgbg TE~L%og. 
 
 30. A double trench. AmXoog rdygog. 
 
 31. Brazen walls. XccXxsog To7%og. 
 
 32. Swift-footed dogs. Hod(axi]g xvctv. 
 
 33. Golden crowns. Xgvasog OTecpavog*. 
 
 34. Wooden towers. nvgyog ZvXivog. 
 
 35. Of sweet water. c Hdvg vdwgS. 
 
 36. A golden-horned stag. Xgvooxegag I'XoKpog*. 
 
 37. Two brazen-footed XctXxonovg Xnnog. 
 horses. 
 
AGREEMENT OF AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 5 
 
 88. A more prudent sister. HwcpQtav ddzXcprj. 
 
 39. To smaller ships. Mixgog nXolov d . 
 
 40. A most miserable wo- "A&Xiog yvvrj. 
 man. 
 
 41. Amost famous crown. KXtivog axicpavog a . 
 
 42. Wise men confute. 2oybg avyg l%z\iyx<n. 
 
 43. Swift horses came. 'Slnvg Xnnog l'^o / uat A -* a . 
 
 44. Black ships followed. MiXtxg vai/g s7to[i<u im P. 
 
 45. Six well-booted com~ "££ evxvyuig frcugog o&Xv(o li ' sa . 
 panions perished. 
 
 46. Places mountainous XmqIov oguvog ndl dva6arog. 
 and difficult of access. 
 
 47. Here are found many 'EvTav&a evq'hjxo) noXvg xXlvrj. 
 beds. 
 
 48. Many other cultivat- HoXvg aXXog fjuegog tnprjXog 
 ed lofty trees. divdgov. 
 
 a. This rule applies to the article, adjective, adjec- 
 tive-pronoun, and participle. 
 
 49. Burning torches. Ai'&w M - PA dais. 
 
 50. The second seal. c O dsmsgog acpgaylg. 
 
 51. This land has been "0§s 6 yr\ om£<o. 
 
 saved. 
 
 52. The flying chariots. 
 
 53. Of the great harbour. 
 
 54. The written laws. 
 
 55. All the tribes shall 
 mourn. 
 
 O cpevyoo**- agfia. 
 '0 uiyag fofrijp** 
 c O ygd(p(o rA ' pT vopog* . 
 ling 6 (f>vXr\ xomoo* . 
 
 56. These good hopes. 
 
 57. My servants made. 
 
 Gwtog 6 aya&og iXnls *. 
 '0 ifibg oixhrjg fqyd^o^a^. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 58. The Indians having '0 'ivdog uoiQxofiaf'**"** Ae- 
 
 entered said 
 
 yet 
 
 fa 
 
 59. These horsemen slay. Omog o Imzevg omoxxuvw. 
 
 60. Our villages are laid e O ftfihsgog xcofi^ noQ&ia. 
 waste. 
 
 61. All the children are Ilag 6 nalg natdsva). 
 educated. 
 
 62. The true worshippers c O aXrj&Lvog ngooxvvrjTrjg 
 shall worship. ngooxvvia). 
 
 III. Verbs of a transitive signification govern 
 the accusative. Grammar, Bute XXL 
 
 63. They open the gates. ^Avolyca o nvXr\. Xen. 
 
 64. Then they water the Trjvixavia agdta 6 x^nog- He- 
 gardens. rodot. 
 
 65. Having come they "£^o i u<u A,PA - sa S^dnTto^P 6 
 buried the Cadusians. Kadovotog. Xen. 
 
 66. Seest thou these great BXina omog 6 psyag oixodofiq; 
 buildings ? N. Test. 
 
 67. And suddenly the sol- Kal i^anlvrjg 6 orgaTKorrjg <jps- 
 diers bring stones. gco Xld-og. Xen. 
 
 68. Perhaps thou hast seen "iawg ogdco 6 dvr\g fidxo(iaL TA . 
 the men fighting. Plato. 
 
 69. I hate the Lacedcemo~ *Eyw (jnoia o Aansdai^ioviog 
 nians exceedingly. oyodga. Aristoph. 
 
 70. I honor the Father, Tiy.d(a 6 Ilarrjg, teal oh <m/ua- 
 and you dishonor me. £w iyco. N. Test. 
 
 71. And you shall know Kal yLyvojoxa* 6 aXy&aa, 
 the truth, and the truth shall xal o dXij&sia iXev&egom 
 free you. av. N. Test. 
 
ADJECTIVES USED WITHOUT SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 72. Therefore a small Ovxovv ouixgbg gr({ia v.axa- 
 word extinguishes all such aftivvv^i nag 6 roiovtog 
 pleasures. tfiovrj. Plato. 
 
 73. The prisoners seize e aixftdXatog xuTaXrx^6dvco 
 the citadel, and the city 6 axgonoXig, nal 6 noXig 
 
 revolts. 
 
 UCplOT7][lL 
 
 Xen. 
 
 IV. Adjectives, adjective-pronouns, and parti- 
 ciples, may be used without substantives, the 
 ones irom which they take their gender, num- 
 ber, and case, being understood. Grammar, 
 Rule II, Obs. 9. 
 
 74. Certain persons praise 
 him. 
 
 75. Then the just shall 
 shine forth. 
 
 76. That which is true 
 never is confuted. 
 
 77. He icho struck had 
 three excuses. 
 
 78. These things I have 
 seen, and those things I 
 have heard. 
 
 79. I slew her who brought 
 forth, I will not deny. 
 
 80. The Greeks saw the 
 cavalry still assembled to- 
 gether. 
 
 81. The royal laws not 
 only punish those icho injure, 
 but also they benefit the just. 
 
 Tig 6/xeo/WsW aviog. Plato. 
 
 Tots 6 dlxmog p exXd/uTtco. 
 N. Test. 
 
 c O uXr]xrrig ne ovdenoTt OJyx<a. 
 Plato. 
 
 '0 7tazu(jou)* A, f a I'/to im P rgng 
 ngocpnaig- Demosth. 
 
 Oving ■&Eao^.UL v , xal exuvog 
 uxovco™ . Plato. 
 
 KTUV0}f a 6 TtXTW PA, * a , OVX 
 
 agvioftm. ^Eschyl. 
 '0 "EXXi t v ild(o* a 6 Inmxog 06 
 rri ovrlaT7]/ui A ' ?A P. Xen. 
 
 O ftaoiliy.bg roftog ov fiovov 
 £r)fJi6o) 6 «<5tx£W rA , aXXd y.al 
 axptXtco 6 dly.uiog p . Xen. 
 
8 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 82. The blind see, the 
 lame walk, the leprous are 
 cleansed, the deaf hear, the 
 dead are raised. 
 
 Tvcplbg avaSUnoo, xwlbg ft(Qi~ 
 naxita, lengbg xa&ctpl£<o, 
 xcocpbg axovco, vexqbg eyelqw* 
 N. Test. 
 
 V. The prepositions dvil, and, §x, ngo, govern 
 the genitive ; Iv, avv, the dative ; and sis, the 
 accusative. Grammar, Rule XL VIII. 
 
 83. Hear then a dream 
 for a dream* 
 
 84. They chose the Lace- 
 daemonians before the Messe- 
 nians. 
 
 85. The flesh they eat, 
 the fat they melt, and use 
 instead of oil. 
 
 86. This river flows, not 
 from the south, but from the 
 rising sun. 
 
 87. After the first sleep 
 he marched. 
 
 88. Few of many came 
 safe into the city. 
 
 89. For this enterprise he 
 was praised at Sparta. 
 
 90. With these flowers I 
 crowned thee. 
 
 91. He throws the stone 
 out of his hand. 
 
 92. They labor/row night 
 to night. 
 
 Axovoj* drj ovocq avxl oveiqag 
 (g. -axog). Plato. 
 
 Algia M - sa Aaxedotifioviog civil 
 Meaoyviog. Xen. 
 
 c O xgeag ea&ico, 6 ds Xlnog 
 xrjxw, xaX avxl eXaiov xqo\o~ 
 fiai. Strabo. 
 
 Ovxog o noxocpbg qew, ovx aub 
 fiEorjiJ.6glc(, aXXa unb avL>- 
 0#w PA i\liog. Arrian. 
 
 Ano o Ttgwiog vnvog %(OQiia im P. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 'OXlyog unb noXvg ow£a) F f a elg 
 b nohg. Thucyd. 
 
 Anb ovxog b ToXprjfia enoti- 
 t>£M p S a iv 2naQxi]. Thucyd. 
 
 Ano ovxog b av&og oxsq)av6uJ a 
 ov. Longus. 
 
 Plnxa o Xl&og ex b #s/o. 
 Polyb. 
 
 Hovem* ex vv!; elg vv£. ^Es- 
 chin. Socr. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 9 
 
 93 They make also wine Boiim U *& olrog $* b x*4*6g. 
 
 of the fruit Theophrast. ^ ^ 
 
 . 94. After dinner he led ^ agtorov ngoayo^ o <rt§«- 
 
 forward the army. «V* Xen " 
 
 95. He fainted /rom the MmoyvfieP* i* 6 nagadotog 
 
 . i • yaod. Chariton. 
 
 unexpected joy /°V W - 
 
 96 By war peace is *E* notefiog dg^v M aloa - 
 strengthened. Thucyd. 
 
 97 A sea-fiaht takes place Nav(ia.yja ylyvoptu ngo o Bv~ 
 before Byzantium. *""* ^^ 
 
 98 We came before noon 'EgzcpaL*-** *Q° P«"^V« 
 ioApsarus. dg "Ayagog. Aman.^ 
 
 99. He prefers beauty i7oo worn} ngoTi^aoi v.uliog. 
 before virtue. Plat0 ' 
 
 100. He dies /or Sparta. Ilgb o Sn&Qtn ano&vfaxa. 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 101. There is also in the Elul xal tv IlSvrog Efcuvog 
 Pontes Euxinus a place so X aglov ohm *aUe>" . 
 called. - Arrian ' 
 
 102 Having run away ndUv ixu^sp dMou- 
 
 again from thence, he lived axco «~ h Boionog fc**- 
 
 among the Boeotians. rao^ia^. Isocr. 
 
 103. Before all the Athc- 3 £v anag U&rp>aiog ttdiyyu rJa . 
 
 rwans wast thou convicted. iEschin. 
 
 104 During the plague 3 £v o loiubg b nuig unoGul- 
 
 he lost his children. W. iElian. 
 
 105. To send heavy-arm- 'JtittforiXXfa onlhrig h b 2v**- 
 ed soldiers into Sicily. Utt. Thucyd. 
 
 106. Epaminondas was 'EnafUivMag mQtiau^ b 
 wounded at Mantinea. JMavxirda. iEliail. 
 
10 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 107. Jesus was led by the 
 spirit into the wilderness. 
 
 103. He returned to Rome 
 with the guards. 
 
 109. You conquered with 
 the assistance of the gods. 
 
 110. We will be on the 
 side of those who are injured. 
 
 111. They threw them- 
 selves into the river. 
 
 112. He walled in Chalce- 
 don from sea to sea. 
 
 113. Let us delay the 
 marriage till autumn. 
 
 114. Look towards the 
 citadel. 
 
 115. They march again 
 against Corinth. 
 
 116. Philip was found in 
 Azot'us. 
 
 117. Celebrated among 
 the other Greeks. 
 
 118. Smerdis was sitting 
 on the royal throne. 
 
 119. From Athens twenty 
 ships came for the guard. 
 
 120. To be praised on 
 account of beauty. 
 
 'fqaovg ccyw m P ev o nvsvfia 
 slg 6 tQTjjxog. N. Test. 
 
 3 E7iavigxoy.ca k ' aa eg 6 c Pwp7 
 
 avv o doQVcpogog. Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 Nixaio im P avv o &sog. Xen. 
 
 2vv 6 adiasoj T ' FA ' pr slfil. Xen. 
 
 (log. Polyb. 
 AttotsixI^co 1 ™? 6 XaXxrjduv 
 anb ■fralaxTtt slg &aXaTia. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ava6(xXX(o i/l - sv 'P r 6 ydfiog slg 
 o fisTOTicagor. Longus. 
 
 A7io6Xeno}f a - % slg o axgono- 
 Xig. Lucian. 
 
 JZiqcctsvco naXuv slg 6 Kogiv- 
 &og. Xen. 
 
 (frlXinnog ds svglaxat^ 1 slg 
 "AfrTog. N. Test. 
 
 EXXoyipog slg 6 ccXXog "EXXtjV. 
 Plato. 
 
 Z/isgdig %^' imp slg 6 PccgIXsl- 
 og &govog. Herodot. 
 
 Ex 6 A&ijvcu sXxooi vavg 
 acpixvsoy.v.i sa eg o cpvXax^. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 'Etkxlvsco slg 6 xaXXog. Lu 
 cian. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 11 
 
 VI. The prepositions did, xazd, vnig, govern 
 the genitive and accusative ; and dvd, the dative 
 and accusative. Grammar, Rule XLIX. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 121. He dammed up the "Anoxonvvwf* 6 gi(a tK noraiuog 
 river flowing through the did 6 nohg. Xen. 
 
 city. 
 
 122. They sent ambassa- n£(into im P ng£o6vg dux Ttoaa- 
 dors by means of Tissapher- (psgvrjg. Xen. 
 
 nes. 
 
 123. With all carefulness Aid nag dy.gl6ua £Uyx<d im P 6 
 he scrutinized the words. ).6yog. Longus. 
 
 124. They are troubled Tagdaow Sid nug 6 /Slog, 
 during their whole life. Cebes. 
 
 125. This thing I pro- Ovrog fiuvrevofxai xax avxog. 
 phesy concerning him. Plato. 
 
 12G. No one will bring Ovdug y.ax iya> sladyco dixy. 
 
 an action against me. Aristoph. 
 
 127. By night he slept Kvxtwo y.uxd xXlrrj ov v.oi- 
 not upon a bed. fxdo) M - im P. Chariton. 
 
 128. The island disap- c o vrjaog uyctviQw*™? y.uxd 
 peared under the sea. 6 ddlaooa. Herodot. 
 
 129. They leap from the "jXkoftm y.uxd o ntxgu. Xen. 
 rock. 
 
 130. He wandered through 'Ado/im** ntna 6 %(ogu. Po- 
 the country. ]yb. 
 
 131. I swore by the my r- 'tyrvoto yard 6 ftvgxog. 
 tie trees. Longus. 
 
 132. Above the gardens 'Tmg 6 xfaoq agog xtliua. 
 mountain. Herodot. 
 
 133. He laid weak tim- fcmteW* $vlor dodtvrjg vnig 
 bers over the trench. g T d(pgog. Herodot. 
 
12 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 134. Beyond the desert 
 the Thyssagetse inhabit. 
 
 135. The Thracians quar- 
 rel among themselves for the 
 fragments of the ships. 
 
 136. He related concern- 
 ing Homer all the truth. 
 
 c Ttteq o EQijfiog Ovaoayixat 
 olxico. Herodot. 
 
 c O Oga$ vnig 6 vavdyiov iv 
 ov dia[uxxo(j.ai. Arrian. 
 
 'AqpqyeofMu im P vnig "Ofxrjgog 
 nag 6 aX^Eia. . Herodot. 
 Vit. Horn. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 137. On account of thee 
 I came, on account of thee 
 I kill the poor black birds. 
 
 138. By means of us you 
 possess this country. 
 
 139. By those who fight 
 well battles are decided. 
 
 140. This Theramenes 
 here has been condemned 
 according to law. 
 
 141. Egypt revolted dur- 
 ing that time. 
 
 142. You were admired 
 through Greece. 
 
 M3. He fed cattle in 
 these places. 
 
 144. He made an irrup- 
 tion through Achaia into 
 Elea near Larissa. 
 
 145. Cephallenia lies op- 
 posite to Acharnania. 
 
 Ata ov sgxofjiat A ' 8a , dice ov 
 dnoXXvoo 6 a&Xiog KOipuxog. 
 Longus. 
 
 At 3 sya I'xo) ods 6 x®Q a ' Xen. 
 
 A La 6 sv [idxo}iai,* x o [idxn 
 
 xglvco. Xen. 
 OrjgaiAEvrjg ovxool xaxaxglva 
 
 xaxa, vopog. Xen. 
 
 Al'yvnxog dcplox7][Ai Ampl xax 
 inuvog 6 xgovog. Isocr. 
 
 Oav^d^(o m P aara 6 c £XXdg. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Ni[i(o irnp xTrjvogf xaxd ovxog 
 6 xwgloV' Herodot. 
 
 Ejx6dXXco sa dta 6 Axd'ia s ig 
 6 "llXsia xaxa Aagiaaa. 
 Xen. 
 
 Kst^av ds KsyaXXrjvla xccxu 
 3 Axotgvavla. Thucyd. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 13 
 
 14G. Having run up to the Arar^tx™**"* 0, xaxd o^Axqo^ 
 citadel of Corinth, they re- xogw&og, 'Agyslog ano- 
 
 xQov(a*- fa . Xen. 
 8s aXXog f]vloxog ixxXl- 
 
 (pEt/Cd 
 
 pulsed the Argives. 
 
 147. The other charioteers 
 turned aside after the flying 
 chariots. 
 
 148. They slew above a A7ioxxdvixi fa vney -/LXiol, xal 
 thousand, and the others with 6 Xoincg ^ayUTrwg unoxo)- 
 
 vco^ a xara 6 
 ugfja. Xen.- 
 
 difficulty retired. 
 
 149. Over his left shoul- 
 der passed the point. 
 
 150. The report spread 
 through the other armies. 
 
 Qso) fa . Thucyd. 
 'Ttisq bifiog agiOTtqbg iq%o-~ 
 
 fiat, A - sa axcoxrj. Horn. 
 cprjixr] Smxtqsxio sa ava 6 Xoi- 
 
 nog oTQuronsdov. Herodian. 
 
 151. Unjustly do you pros- Adlxwg eviv^sco ava, c £XXdg. 
 per in Greece. Eurip. 
 
 152. I collected much JloXvg <$' dyuQio^ a XQW a <*»<* 
 riches among the Egyptian Alyvmioq avriq. Horn. 
 men. 
 
 VII. The prepositions d[i<pl 9 inl, (xstcI, nagd, 
 mot, ttqos, V7i6, govern the genitive, dative, and 
 accusative. Grammar ', Rule L. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 153. Thou knowest all nag il'du** ufiyl ipog ydpog. 
 things concerning my nup- Eurip. 
 
 tials. 
 
 154. The Carduchians c O di KaQSov^og tivq xalo) im P 
 kindled fires upon the moun- (m 6 ooog. Xen. 
 
 tains. 
 
 155. And they have power Kal e*ovola %w inl 6 vtiwo. 
 over the waters. N. Test. 
 
 2 
 
14 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 156. He passed over then 
 immediately in a ship from 
 Thyrea to Cyllene. 
 
 157. To mourn by the 
 ■cool Acheron. 
 
 158. He accused before 
 the king. 
 
 159. And they themselves 
 having embarked sailed to- 
 wards Chios. 
 
 160. And the foot soldiers 
 have battle-axes, as in the 
 time of Cyrus. 
 
 161. Thou changedst not 
 thy nature with thy fortune. 
 
 162. These shall fight 
 against the lamb, and the 
 lamb shall overcome them. 
 
 163. We received this 
 government from the Medes. 
 
 164. This thing is granted 
 both by thee and by me. 
 
 165. Concerning my gait 
 I will speak with boldness. 
 
 166. There come from 
 Sinope ambassadors, fearing 
 for the city and for the 
 country. 
 
 167. I honored Patroclus 
 above all my companions. 
 
 168. From him icho brought 
 he heard such reproaches. 
 
 JJsgaioca r, f a tots evdvg inl 
 nXdlov ix 6 Ovgia ig Kvl- 
 \r{vi]. Thucyd. 
 
 Mvgopai inl ipvxQog A/iguv. 
 Theocr. 
 
 KaT7iyogect)f a inl 6 fiaadsvg. 
 Diod. Sic. 
 
 Kal avrbg ia6alr(a FA - sa nXico imp 
 inl Xlog. Herodot. 
 
 Kal 6 ne£bg l%(o adyagig, 
 uunsg inl Kvgog. Xen. 
 
 Ovx aiiu6(x)f a fiixa 6 TV%rj o 
 cpvoLQ. Isocr. 
 
 OvTog (isid 6 agvlov noXejidoj, 
 xal o agvlov vixdco avrog. 
 N. Test. 
 
 Uagalay.6dvc0 sa 6 ^ye^ovla 
 ode nagd Mrjdog. Herodot. 
 
 Ovrog xal nagd ov xal nag' 
 iya 6{j.oXoyico. Plato. 
 
 Hegl 6 ipbg fiddic^a sl'gco fi£ T d 
 naggrjala. Demosth. 
 
 "jEgxofiav in 2iv<anr\ ngia6vg, 
 Cpo6s(x> M,PA nsgl 6 noXig xal 
 nsgl o xwQ a ' Xen. 
 
 ndrgoxXog iyw nsgl nag xlco mp 
 
 eraTgog. Horn. 
 Ugog 6 q>igo) PA tolooSs a- 
 xovco imp xaxov. Eurip. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 15 
 
 - 169. They are carried by "Ayw ngog Egivvvg did Tug- 
 
 tlic Furies through Tartarus. tago;" . iEschin. Socr. 
 
 170. By the gods, said I, Ilgb^ b xreog, cpr][xl sa £yh),nov 
 where spendest thou . thy 8iutqL6o), xat rig M noiiw ; 
 time, and what dost thou ? Xen. 
 
 171. He made a truce for 2novd7]V noti(a M ^ a ngog 6ty- 
 the advantage of the The- 6ouog fiuXXov, ij ngog eav- 
 bans, more than for the ad- too. Xen. 
 
 vantage of themselves. 
 
 172. Near the standard Ugbg 6 orjfiilov 6 dxovnoTrjg 
 let the darters be placed. jdooto e - 1M -P. Arrian. 
 
 173. In the time ofPsam- 3 Enl ^un^xixog cpvXaxr] xa- 
 metichus guards were sta- ■&loTrjfxi, A - sa ngog Ai&loy. 
 tioned against the jEthio- Herodot. 
 
 pians. 
 
 174. They quickly assem- Oowg ovvuyelg(a*-f a vno oxie- 
 bled under a shady plane- gog nXaxdvioxog. Theocr. 
 tree. 
 
 175. But now being asked Nvv de iguxdu vno ov igv- 
 by thee he blushes. -Ogidoj. Plato. 
 
 17G. The others through c O aXXog vno 6 cp&ovog ov oir- 
 
 envy were not silent. yaw im P. Xen. 
 
 177. Sing Bacchus with MiXnw P o diovvoog (tagv- 
 the deep-toned timbrels. 6gofiog vno xv^navov. Eu- 
 
 rip. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 178. About her fair neck "Og/xog d* a^qp' unuXbg dsigt] 
 were very beautiful chains. nigixaXXr t g dfil imp . Horn. 
 
 179. The suitors nad a 'o fivr t oxr]g i'xa) imp igig d/u<pl 
 contest about wnuic. [tovoixrj. Herodot. 
 
 180. To suffer hardships Toioode u^cpl yvvr\ uXyog nd- 
 for such a woman. o%(o. Horn. 
 
16 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 181. He lay upon the shore 
 heavily groaning among ma- 
 ny Myrmidons. 
 
 182. They immediately 
 send the heavy-armed men 
 in afeiv ships. 
 
 183. These Phoenicians 
 formerly inhabited near the 
 Red sea. 
 
 184. Immediately against 
 Tydides he bent the crooked 
 bows. 
 
 185. The women came 
 from the fountain : after 
 them came the swineherd. 
 
 186. He is renowned for 
 wisdom among all the Greeks. 
 
 187. The senate will be 
 in the power of those icho 
 speak. 
 
 188. I stand among the 
 foremost in the battle. 
 
 189. Now I sit in your 
 assembly, imploring. 
 
 190. Afterwards they took 
 supper by the swift black 
 ship. 
 
 191. Here they sewed for 
 hire with the king. 
 
 192. They had about their 
 bodies mean garments. 
 
 "Enl &lv xslfiai imp $ocgvoxsvd- 
 %(x> noXvg (isxd Mvopidav. 
 Horn. 
 
 c O onXixi\g ini i>avg oXlyog 
 sv&vg ni[iTi(o. Thucyd. 
 
 Ovxog ds o 0oivi^ xonaXaiov 
 oixso)f a inl 6 3 £gv&Qog &d- 
 Xaoaa. Herodot. 
 
 Aiipv. inl Tvdsldr]g xixal- 
 V(0 M.imp xapjivlog xo^ov. 
 Horn. 
 
 e O ds yvvr\ BQ%o}iaL A - sa dno 
 %gy\vr\ ' snl ds ov ig/oficci A,sa 
 av6uT7]g. Horn. 
 
 Evdoxiixia A snl oocplct iv nag 
 o "EXXyv. Plato. 
 
 *Enl o Xsya ri - 6 fiovXsvxrjgiov 
 tlpL Demosth. 
 
 Msxd ngwxog P loxtj^ii M dvd 
 lid%r\ a . Horn 
 
 Nvv ds (xsd-' vpixsgog dyogd 
 rj[xcu, Xloaofiou. Horn. 
 
 Aognog snutf algico M,sa -&oog 
 nagd vavg fisXag. Horn. 
 
 3 Evxav&a ds ^xsvco im P snl 
 (iio&og nagd 6 Saadsvg. 
 Herodot. 
 
 "EX(o tm P nsgl 6 owficc eo&7}$ 
 Xixog. Herodian. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 17 
 
 193. The Corinthians, 
 fearing for the place, send 
 heavy-armed men. 
 
 194. To slay the Argives 
 at the ships, confounded by 
 the s)noke. 
 
 195. They encamped near 
 Olyntlms in the Isthmus. 
 
 196. He never had a shield 
 in his left hand. 
 
 197. Besides physiology, 
 they also cultivate moral phi- 
 losophy. 
 
 198. They found an ever- 
 flowing fountain under a 
 rock. 
 
 199. Two men with their 
 teeth laid hold of the ground, 
 subdued by my spear. 
 
 200. He danced about the 
 altars to flutes. 
 
 c O Koulv&iog, dsldca M - PA * nsgl 
 6 ^w^/ov, nifxnio bnXlrrjg. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 KtsIvoj *Agyuog naga vavg, 
 aiv£o) r -* A -'P r nsgl nanvog. 
 Horn. 
 
 2?TgaT07ied£vo{iai' imp ngbg *'0- 
 Xvv&og iv 6 la & {tog. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 Ovnois uomg I'xoj sa ngbg 
 
 Xuibg x^Q' Eurip 
 JUgbg 6 cpvoioXoyla, xal 6 
 
 r}&ix6g cpiXooocpla aoxew. 
 
 Strabo. 
 
 Evgloy.M sa asvvaog xgrjvi] vnb 
 niiqru Theocr 
 
 Avo epeag odu$ vdgico sa ovdag, 
 ffibg vnb dogv <5« t uaw p-PA,8a . 
 Horn. 
 
 JJsgl b fi(x){ibg xogeva im P vnb 
 avXog. Herodian. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 201. Around thee others 9 Ap<pl de ov uXXog xrslvm 1 **, 
 were slain, fighting for thee. ^ugvauai nsgl ov s. Horn. 
 
 202. The Cadusians came c O Kadovaiog ow£ia vAm P ngbg 
 safe to the camp about even- b oxgaiomdov afupl SeIXt]. 
 
 in -. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 203. Hermione, having 
 come to the sepulchre, and 
 standing upon the mound, 
 say these things. 
 
 2* 
 
 'jCguiovif, I'gxoftai *•**"'* u(xq>l 
 6 rdcpog, xal 'lorrjiui A -' A -* a 
 in} xMpa*, X£y<»f a odt. 
 Eurip. 
 
18 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 204. He mounted Crcesus 
 upon the pile, bound in fet- 
 ters. 
 
 205. And over the merce- 
 nary force he sets Adeas. 
 
 206. He invited this com- 
 pany to supper with their 
 captain. 
 
 207. The river flows to- 
 wards the west through great 
 Armenia. 
 
 208. He marched against 
 the Egyptians ; he had 
 about him thirty thousand 
 men. 
 
 209. They besieged Barce 
 for nine months. 
 
 210. They have sent also 
 ambassadors into Peloponne- 
 sus after another army. 
 
 211. They departed out of 
 Sicily after the treaty. 
 
 212. The princess threw 
 the ball to her maid. 
 
 213. The goddess has a 
 cymbal in her hands. 
 
 214. I" came to the house 
 by day with the youth. 
 
 215. Having offered a liba- 
 tion, immediately he brought 
 the youths to Chirisophus ; 
 and they relate these things. 
 
 jtva6i6(i£a)f a inl 6 nvga 6 
 Kgolvog, iv nidrj 5s(0 T ' VA P . 
 Herodot. 
 
 Kal inl 6 &viv.bg ne aa&loxrifiv 
 
 Adsag. Xen. 
 Kcde(o-f a ovxog 6 jd^ig inl 6 
 
 detnvov avv 6 Tti&agzog. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 O noxa^og Qsoi inl dvaig dia 
 o itiyag Aginvia g « Strabo. 
 
 3 £X<xvv(o %m P inl 6 Alyvnxiog ' 
 e%(0 %m P de nsgl kavxov avrjg 
 xgiapvgioi. Herodot. 
 
 HoXiogxsw tm P 6 Bugxtj inl 
 firjv ivvia. Herodot. 
 
 Uepnoo ds xal ig HsXonovvijaog 
 ngso6vg in cillog oxgaxid* 
 Thueyd. 
 
 3 AnsQX0(ieci, A - sa in 2ixslia fisxa 
 6 gvfiSaoi?. Thueyd. 
 
 2cpaiga glnxto^ a [isxa afiyi- 
 noXog fiocolkeux. Horn.. 
 
 O &s6g xv^i6akov fisxa %eiq 
 s'xeo. Arrian. 
 
 >, EQXOficu A ' sa i7tl 6 oixla fistf 
 rjfiigcc fiETct 6 fisigdxwv° . 
 Lysias. 
 
 2nivd(o VA -f a ds, sv&vg ayto im P 
 6 vsaviaxog nagd 6 Xeigl- 
 ooq>og ' xal dirjyiofiai oviog. 
 Xen. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 19 
 
 • 216. He saw two ships 
 standing near the lake. 
 
 217. Almost during all 
 the year they celebrate 
 feasts. 
 
 218. Not only against 
 the decrees did he accuse us, 
 but also against the laws. 
 
 219. And these things he 
 has suffered from Midias by 
 reason of his poverty. 
 
 220. And they were wal- 
 lowing in the streets, and 
 about all the fountains. 
 
 221. Having stayed there 
 about sixteen days, he re- 
 tired again to Thespiae. 
 
 222. They have practised 
 piety towards the gods. 
 
 223. Having made a 
 league with the barbarians, 
 he hastened to his mother. 
 
 224. Having passed over, 
 they travelled towards the 
 rising sun. 
 
 225. He had shown bra- 
 very in the battles against 
 the enemies. 
 
 226. On account of the 
 letters they suspected him. 
 
 227. The soldiers pre- 
 pared themselves for the 
 march. 
 
 £ld(o sa dim nXoiov t ioTT}[xi A -' TA,p 
 Tiaou 6 Xifivrj. N. Test. 
 
 J?Xedbv netqet nug 6 inavibg 
 eogrd^b). Herodian. 
 
 Ov f^orov naqu o xpr t q)ia^a 
 dia6d).Xo) im P tya, aXXu xal 
 nctQa 6 rofxog. Demosth. 
 
 Kut oi'iog 7iao%oi u vnb Mei- 
 dlug s nagd 6 nevlcc. De- 
 mosth. 
 
 Kul ip 6 bdbg xaXiv8i(a li ' imp ) 
 xai ntgl o xgr t vv omag. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Miv(a* M "f a ixtt mgl ixxaldsxa 
 r\fiiga, uttozcoqeq) f a ndXiv 
 slg 0(.(j7iial. Xen. 
 
 *Aaxi(a sias6sia ntgl 6 xrtog. 
 Isocr. 
 
 27iivdG)*-* A S a ngbg 6 pdg6a~ 
 qog, ngbg 6 lxr,rrjo intl- 
 yco M - im P. Herodian. 
 
 Aiu6ulrw aa , bdotnogita imp 
 ngbg TjXiog dvloxw. He- 
 rodot. 
 
 Avdgila iv o fid^r] ngbg o no- 
 Xifxiog emSsixvva)*-? 1 . Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 IJgog 6 (moxoXii vnonnvoi xmp 
 aviog. Thucyd. 
 
 e OTgujibjTvg naqctoxiva- 
 £w "MP ngbg b t$odog. 
 Herodian. 
 
30 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 228. These ants make a Ovxog o f*vgpr)$ noiia™ oV~ 
 habitation under ground. xyoig vnb yrj. Herodot. 
 
 229. About this time the c Tno ovxog b xgovog b drjuoxga- 
 democracy was subverted. xla, xaxcdva*-™?. Thucyd. 
 
 a. c stg is often used for ngbg or tig. Grammar, 
 Rule £., Obs. 1. 
 
 230. During the peace 
 we sent to you concerning 
 our revolt. 
 
 231. He himself with the 
 ten men undertakes the 
 voyage to Tissaphernes. 
 
 °Ev 6 ug^vr\ nifi7T(o f a ag av 
 nsgl dnoaxaoig s . Thucyd. 
 
 Avxbg ^«t« 6 dixa avfjg* 
 6 nloog ag -o Tioaacpigvrig 
 tzolsg) M . Thucyd. 
 
 b. Prepositions are often understood. 
 Rule L., Obs. 5. 
 
 Grammar, 
 
 232. Agamemnon, I be- 
 seech thee by these knees. 
 
 233. Now therefore why 
 neither payedst thou the 
 tribute 1 
 
 234. The cities they burn- 
 ed with their temples. 
 
 235. And they sailed im- 
 mediately with jive . and 
 twenty ships, and afterwards 
 with another fleet. 
 
 236. During this the A- 
 thenians having arrived, and 
 having marched immediate- 
 ly with all the army, take 
 Thyrea. 
 
 Ayapifivwv 7 , Ixsxsiho av (ngbg) 
 
 ods yovv s . Eurip. 
 Nvv ovv (did) rig a,ne ovxs 6 
 
 daofibg dndyco sa . Xen. 
 
 c O nolig i(X7il7TQr t fiL im P (ovv) 
 avtbg d,p o Isgov. Herodot. 
 
 Kal nlmf* iv&vg (ovv) nzvxs 
 xal tl'xoot vavg, xal voxsgov 
 (ovv) I'xsgog oxolog. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 'Ev ovxog 6 3 A&7)v.cuog xaxi- 
 X(o rA - sa , xccl X(aQS(o TA f a sv&vg 
 (ovv) nag 6 oxgaxid, algeoo 
 6 Ovgea. Thucyd. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 21 
 
 VIII. Adverbs of place, time, cause, quanti- 
 ty, concealment, separation, exception, exclama- 
 tion, and adverbial nouns, govern the genitive. 
 Grammar, Rule XLIV. 
 
 237. You lament stand- 
 ing near the tomb. 
 
 238. The Persians en- 
 camped near the Egyptians. 
 
 239. Here at the extrem- 
 ity we saw a cave near the 
 sea. 
 
 240. They pour the pitch 
 into a pit dug near the lake. 
 
 241. The Strymon is not 
 far from the Hellespont. 
 
 242. Thou diedst at Troy 
 far from Argos, and about 
 thee others were slain. 
 
 243. He perished far 
 from his native land, among 
 
 an unknown people. 
 
 244. Standing at a dis- 
 tance from the pile, he 
 sheared off his yellow hair. 
 
 245. Zacynthus lies over 
 against Elis. 
 
 246. Thence he was car- 
 ried straight towards Gy- 
 theum. 
 
 2v 8s &QT]vi(o iyyvg Icrz^— 
 ^ t A.PA.i> Tc jg, 0ff> ^Eschyl. 
 
 'O Jlsgorjg l£(o M ' im P nsXag 6 
 Alyvnnog. Herodot. 
 
 "Ev&a 8° in iax«rla d oniog 
 ti'do) sa ay%i &<xXuooa. 
 Horn. 
 
 D Eo%to) 5s 6 nlaaa ig Xdxxog 
 6qvgog) p -* a ' p ayxov 6 Ujxvr]. 
 Herodot. 
 
 '0 J?TQV[/(OV elfu OV TIQOGW 
 
 6 *Elti\anovTog. Herodot. 
 Ovr l ox(o sa (v Tqola Ixug^Aqyog, 
 uficpl de oil* uXXog xthvu 1 ™?. 
 Horn. 
 
 3 0XXv(a w,sa T7]Xo&i naxga, aX- 
 Xoyvonog tvl drj^og. Horn. 
 
 "lOTrjUl Vi " Sa (X7IUVIV&8 TCVQUf 
 
 £av&6g anoxtlQ0) ¥ ^ a X a ^ T7 l- 
 Horn. 
 
 Zuxvv&og xu^lul avTiniqag 
 
 "l/Xig. Thucyd. 
 'Exii&ev uv(tyu} T f a tv&v /V- 
 
 ■frtiov. Xen. 
 
22 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 247. Straight to the 
 deep trench they drove the 
 Greeks. 
 
 248. Alexander having 
 marched from these parts, 
 penetrated as far as the 
 Ganges. 
 
 249. They see horsemen 
 beyond the river completely 
 armed, and footmen upon 
 the banks drawn up above 
 the horsemen. 
 
 250. To tie the horse 
 above his head. 
 
 251. I saw thee under 
 the fig-tree. 
 
 252. Within the yard he 
 made twelve swine-cotes 
 near one another. 
 
 253. He stood without 
 the tent, and presently he 
 beheld a shameful affair. 
 
 254. He went into the 
 town with Oleander. 
 
 255. They drew him out 
 of the temple ; and forthwith 
 the doors were shut. 
 
 256. He went sometimes 
 before Hector, sometimes 
 behind. 
 
 257. About dark . he 
 comes to a village, and at 
 
 'l&vg Tcccpgog (ja&vg (o&i(o^ a 
 "Analog. Horn. 
 
 AXs$avdgog o^acu p - PA ^ a urtb 
 6 pegog omog uxgi 6 Tayyr\g 
 disQxofiv.L A - sa . Arrian. 
 
 Ogam Inntvg nsgav 6 noxa^bg 
 £|07rA/^w p - PA '-P, 7is£og <5' inl 
 6 oxd"t] d nagaxaoo(o p - FA - p 
 avco 6 LTiTtEvg. Xen. 
 
 JsGfisva) 6 Xnnog avw&ev o 
 xeycdrj. Xen. 
 
 JEl'dca sa ov VTioyMTCo 6 ovxij. 
 N. Test. 
 
 "jEvroo&ev d J avXrj ovcptbg dvo- 
 xaldsxa noiico im P nXrjolov 
 aXXi'iXwv. Horn. 
 
 "ioTrifii sa <5' imbg xXioia, rc^ct 
 $ £iasld(o sa e'gyov aeutrjg. 
 Horn. 
 
 JEtaco 6 xuxog cc7isiui M -P l avv 
 
 KXsavdgog. Xen. 
 °JEXy.a) sa avrbg l'£w o hgoV not 
 
 tv&swg y.Xtl(of a 6 &vga. 
 
 N. Test. 
 
 0>oiT«a) im P cxXXots [iev ngoo&sv 
 ExTtog, hXXote omo&sv. 
 Hom. 
 A^icpl xvicpctg* ngbg xtof/y* 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 23 
 
 
 the fountain before the wall 
 he finds women from the 
 village carrying water. 
 
 258. Behind the foot he 
 placed the whole cavalry. 
 
 259. On both sides of 
 the way the Lacedaemonians 
 stood. 
 
 260. Mesopotamia lies be- 
 tween the Euphrates and the 
 Tigris. 
 
 261. He added also iron 
 scythes about two cubits 
 long to the axle-trees on 
 each side of the tohcels. 
 
 262. Within three months 
 he recovered all Macedonia. 
 
 263. They slept until far 
 in the day. 
 
 264. They skirmished 
 frequently until evening. 
 
 265. This supper is pre- 
 pared once a year. 
 
 266. Thrice a day I re- 
 volve to myself the things 
 which have been said. 
 
 267. They followed, not 
 ordered by their command- 
 ers, but for the sake of 
 plunder. 
 
 268. On account of the 
 god I nourished thee. 
 
 ex o v.M{n] yvri) ngog o xgr r 
 r)} d y.vcTalayCuiO) t\u7Tgo- 
 adtv 6 i'gi\ua. Xen. 
 
 "Oniad-ev 6 ns'Qbg inLTaooco^ 
 6 nag c innog f . Herodot. 
 
 *A(xcpOTLQG)&tv 6 odbg o Aaxz- 
 daifioviog 'ioii]ui sa . Xen. 
 
 Mtaonoja^ila xeeftai usra^v 
 
 o Ev(fQUTi]g xal o Tiyqiq* 
 
 Strabo. 
 flQooTid-r l [Ai-f a de xal d.gsnavov 
 
 utdijgtog wg dlnrj^vg ngbg 
 
 u u$(av* i'v&sv xal ivSiv o 
 
 TQOXoq. Xen. 
 JSvjog TQSig pirjv anag xaTtxw sa 
 
 JWaxsdovla. Isocr. 
 Ku&evdo} im P (iixgi noggco 6 
 
 r^utga. Xen. 
 *A>igo6oXr£oucu im P noXXaxig us- 
 
 Xgig tanega. Xen. 
 Ovtog b dslnvov nagaoxtva'C,ia 
 
 ana% 6 iviavrog. Herodot. 
 'J'glg 6 fj^igu avaxvxXooi 7ig6g 
 
 f'iiuvtov* 6 tgta) F ' F *' p . Lu- 
 
 cian. 
 
 u Enoucu xm P, ov Ta(Joo)*' VA -f a 
 vrio o argmriyog b , akk 
 ugnt/yi] t'vtXEV. Xen. 
 
 'O \)tbq I'/.an ov rgicpb)^ 1 . 
 Eurip. 
 
24 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 269. And now I have 
 enough of afflictions. 
 
 270. He sent me without 
 the knowledge of the other 
 Greeks. 
 
 271. Without labor no- 
 thing succeeds. 
 
 272. I will bring women 
 hither without arms. 
 
 273. Without courage no 
 art avails against dangers. 
 
 274. I sent you without a 
 purse. 
 
 275. They slew all, ex- 
 cept a few. 
 
 276. Besides these, he 
 maintains garrison-soldiers 
 in the citadels. 
 
 277. They dismissed 
 these commanders, with 
 the exception of Conon. 
 
 278. O the insolence ! 
 thou wilt not cease laugh- 
 ing. 
 
 279. Alas the rose-bed ! 
 alas the violet-bed ! alas the 
 hyacinths ! 
 
 280. Innumerable men 
 destroyedst thou on account 
 of one woman. 
 
 281. They were proclaim- 
 ed before all the Grreeks. 
 
 Kal vvv TiTjfici ctdrjv e/(o. 
 Eurip. 
 
 ni[X7i(af a (yd) Xd&ga 6 uXXog 
 "EXXtjv. Herodot. 
 
 Jlovog XMQiSt ovdslg ne EVTC%i(o. 
 Soph. 
 
 'jB/w yvvrj dsvgo onXov ayco 
 dycc. Eurip. 
 
 Avsv ivipvxla ovdslg xsyvy\ 
 nqog 6 xlvdvvog a loxvca. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 'AttootsXXoj f a av aisg ftaXuv- 
 tiov. N. Test. 
 
 'AuoxtsIvw f a anag, (xTog oXl- 
 
 yog. Xen. 
 Xtoglg ds ovxog, (pvXa!; (v 6 
 
 axQonoXig Tgsqxo. Xen. 
 
 Oviog 6 OTQarrjyog nav(a^ a f 
 ttXtjv Kovmv. Xen. 
 
 *SL o v6gig ! ov tkxv(o h ys- 
 /t«w FA . Lucian. 
 
 G>sv 6 Qodowiu! cpsv o Icovidf 
 q>sv o vdxiV'&og ! Longus 
 
 Mxfglog anoXXva f a slg yvvr\ 
 X^qw. Eurip. 
 
 *Avayogsv(ji) %m P (vtaniov ornaq 
 6 "EXXvp. vEschin. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OP ADVERBS. 25 
 
 a. Many adverbs of exclamation are frequently joined 
 with other cases besides the genitive, and some with 
 other cases only. Grammar, Rule XLIV., Obs. 3. 
 
 282. Ah me ! what wilt 0* iy'ta n * rig ne Xiyo, firjrr}g v ; 
 thou say, mother ? Eurip. 
 
 283. Ah me ! I am de- Ot £yw d , yzXaio, xegrofiico iyw 
 rided, you taunt me in my £v xaxov. Eurip. 
 afflictions. t 
 
 284. Woe unto the world Oval 6 y.oopog* <xnb 6 axdv- 
 because of offences. dakov. N. Test. 
 
 285. O Socrates, said he, ~Sl 2(axgdrr\g y , (fr\^l sa y noi dy 
 whither pray goest thou, and nogsva* , xal nod-sv ,- Plato, 
 whence ? 
 
 b. The genitive is often governed by tvuxcc, on account 
 of, with respect to, understood. Grammar, Rule 
 XLIV., Obs. 1. 
 
 286. I esteem you blessed Maxagl'Qca av 6 xrrj[j.q.. 
 on account of the possession. Plato. 
 
 287. O daughter, I praise ~Sl &vydrr)g v , alviia av 6 ngo- 
 theefor thy alacrity. &v[iLa. Eurip. 
 
 288. I blame Clitus great- 3 Eya> KXurog [ih 6 v6gig nsya- 
 ly for his arrogance, and I Xwarl ixi^q>o(xai, *AXi$avdgog 
 pity Alexander on account of 8e 6 ovfxyogd oixnlgco. 
 his calamity. Arrian. 
 
 289. Ah me miserable on Ai iya> n ' f rdXaq oiangdoou*-*** 
 account of the ruined army ! orgaxog. ^Eschyl. 
 
 c. Adverbs of accompanying govern the dative. 
 Grammar, Rule XLIV., Obs. 4. 1. 
 
 290. They sailed with nXio) im P «//« 'laxialog ig Bv- 
 Histiaus to Byzantium. £dvxiov. Herodot. 
 
 3 
 
26 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 291. At sun rising he sent "Apa ijXiog <xvoctsXXco px kt^S 
 heralds about a truce. nipnwfi 1 nsgl anovd^-? . 
 
 Xen. 
 
 292. They sent also two °A7ioatsXXo}f a de xal diaxoaiot 
 hundred heavy-armed men oTiXhrjg ofiov 6 Koglv&iog. 
 with the Corinthians. Thucyd. 
 
 d. Adverbs of swearing take the accusative. Gram- 
 mar, Rule XLIV.j Obs. 4. 3. 
 
 293. Thou art mad, O MeXayxoXato, w av&g(a7iog v , 
 man, by heaven. vrj 6 ovgavog. Aristoph. 
 
 294. But by the gods I \4XXa pet 6 &sog ovu syays av- 
 will not pursue them. to? diaxa. Xen. 
 
 295. Yes by Jupiter, said Nal pa Zevg, cpi]fu sa , w 7ra- 
 he, O father, I remember. xtjg v , paw p 'P . Xen. 
 
 IX. The modes required by particular ad- 
 verbs are as follows, with the exception of the 
 infinitive, for which see Rule XXIX., Obs. 3. 
 Grammar, Rule XLIIL, Ohs. 4. 
 
 a. c, E(og, oyqa, as long as, take the indicative or sub- 
 junctive ; in the sense of until, the indicative, optative, 
 or subjunctive. 
 
 296. As long therefore as .. "Bag ovv slpl ev aaq>aXtjg, opv- 
 you are in safety, beware. Xdoo(a M -f a . Demosth. 
 
 297. He feasts as long as Aalvvpi^ ocpga i&eX(o SXJ . Op- 
 he pleases. pian. 
 
 298. After that they pro- "Ensixa ngoxugiu imv 81a Ke- 
 ceeded through Cecropia, xgonlaZ, I'cog acpixveoficu sa 
 until they came to Acharnse. eg 'Axagval. Thucyd. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 27 
 6V?' 
 
 299. But I obeyed not, AlV iya> ov tisL&oF 
 until I should see him. avibg si'doj - sa . Horn. 
 
 300. Wait until we drive nsoi^iivoi p sag 6 o%log diM- 
 away the multitude, and then &ico M - 3V ^ a , ensna ds xatf 
 
 Xen. 
 
 at leisure we will converse 
 together. 
 
 i}OV/ia a ovyyiyvofiai. 
 
 b. "Aym, fxeygi, I'ote, as long as, take the indicative ; 
 in the sense of until, the indicative or subjunctive. 
 
 301. As long as Pterelaus "jfrgi £dw im P nxsgilaog, ov 
 
 lived, he was not able. 
 
 302. Clearchus strove ve- 
 hemently, until he prevailed. 
 
 303. Pharnabazus waited 
 at Chalcedon, until he came 
 from Byzantium. 
 
 8vva[iaL im P. Apollod. 
 O 8s Kliagyog layvgojg y.axa- 
 
 TSlV0i im P, SOTS 8Ltt7lOttOOGi U -f a . 
 
 Xen. 
 
 tI>aQvu6a'£og nsoifiivoi im ? ev 
 Xalxrjduv, f^sygig i'gyo- 
 fiou A - sv - sa in o Bv^dvnov. 
 Xen. 
 
 c. Mtoq>u, until, takes the indicative ; tlooxe, com- 
 monly the subjunctive. 
 
 304. We will repay gold, Xgvobg dnodldojfii, tlootce obg 
 until thy heart is gladdened. xrjg ialva psu -/ a . Horn. 
 
 d. i/olv, before, is joined with the indicative, optative, 
 or subjunctive ; naqoq, with the indicative. 
 
 305. Yet I desisted not, "Ofuog ds ovx uylaTtifii K ' sa , 
 before I finished the oration. tiqIv b loyog unoxslto)^-^ . 
 
 Isocr. 
 30(5. They are not willing Ov fiovlofjai nw, noh t<V no 
 yet, before they obtain some- ldp6ava)' vaa . Thucjd. 
 thing. 
 
28 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 C. "Ore, bnoxs, rjvUa, oTtrjvixa, svzs, when ; insl, inEcdrj, 
 after or when, take the indicative or optative, and some- 
 times the subjunctive. 
 
 307. He rejoiced when he 
 beheld the neighbouring 
 ports. 
 
 308. But now by reason of 
 your simplicity, he renders 
 accounts when he pleases. 
 
 309. The companions 
 were amazed, when they per- 
 ceived. 
 
 310. When we entered, we 
 found Protagoras in the ves- 
 tibule of the porch walking. 
 
 311. And whenever he was 
 present, no other person put 
 the king upon his horse. 
 
 312. He ran forth from 
 the tree ; but when the stones 
 Jlew, he retired quickly. 
 
 313. When they come out, 
 let us throw them with their 
 arms into the lake. 
 
 Xalgco im P oxs §Xino) im P yu- 
 xvw ogpog. Horn. 
 
 Nvv ds diu 6 v^iixsgog svri~ 
 ■d-£ia a , sv&vvrj dld(0[iL bwr\- 
 vixa (iovioiiai. Demosth. 
 
 Exatgog &a[j.6s(a A - im P > ti>ze 
 vosoi fa . Apoll. Rh. 
 
 'Ensidtj 8s elosQ%o[iai A, * a , 
 aaxuXa^Sdvco aa Jlguxctyo- 
 
 QOtg EV 6 TtQOGTOOV 71SQ171CC- 
 
 xioa. Plato. 
 Kal bnoxs ndg£i(.a - pr f ovdsig 
 aXXog fiaoLXsvg inl 6 Xnnog* 
 dvotfdXXw im P. Xen. 
 
 Jlgoxgixco * mp cenb 6 divSgov ' 
 insl ds b Xl&og q>EQ(o M -°-P r , 
 dvaxd^ofiai im P svnsxag. 
 Xen. 
 
 e Hvlxa d i^iqxoy.au h " ix: ' sa , ig 
 Xlfivr] avzbg avv evxeci (2dX- 
 Xb)™' sa . Horn. 
 
 /. c 'Owv, bnoxav, inav, inEidav, usually take the sub- 
 junctive, sometimes the optative, the indicative rarely. 
 
 314. I rejoice exceedingly 
 when I punish an enemy. 
 
 c Tnsgxoclg(o oxav Ix&gog xifiw- 
 gia M.su.?r e Xen. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 29 
 
 315. When the barbarians 
 shoot their arrows, they hide 
 the sun. 
 
 316. When they mangled 
 thus themselves, from the 
 surrounding spectators they 
 collected oboli. 
 
 317. Thou shalt afflict 
 many shepherds, when thou 
 shalt meet. 
 
 Enav 6 (3dg6ctoog aq)lr]iu,L sv,pr 
 o t6$si\ucx, 6 rtXiog anoxgv- 
 TiTca. Herodot. 
 
 Ensiduv ds xuiaxoTtia} -^ 1 ov- 
 T(og ecxviov, ex 6 7ieQuaxr\- 
 ^a.pa.jj & £ (XTr]s ovUeya im P 
 66oX6g. Lucian. 
 
 IloXvg dxaxeco {XTjXo6ozrjQ, bno- 
 zctv <xvToia) l *-ff. Horn. 
 
 g. 7>c, otiok, when or after, take the indicative or 
 optative ; in the sense of as, how, they take the indic- 
 ative, optative, or subjunctive. 
 
 318. When they rode up 
 to the Greeks, they attacked 
 by squadrons. 
 
 319. The Trojans shud- 
 dered, when they saw the 
 spotted serpent. 
 
 320. Whenever Minos re- 
 quested, they manned his 
 ships. 
 
 321. These things they 
 did as he commanded. 
 
 322. After love wounded 
 me, I considered how I should 
 bear it. 
 
 323. Then we will con- 
 sult concerning the children, 
 how we may educate them. 
 
 3* 
 
 c flg 7TQ0OtXavv(af a irgog o "EX- 
 X)]v a , 7TQoa6dXXo) tmp xazct 
 rtXog a . Herodot. 
 
 Tgatg 5e Qiyitafi 1 , onox. 
 aloXog ucptg. Horn. 
 
 ud(o s 
 
 'Oncog Mlvwg dtofj.ru °'P r , nXt]~ 
 g6<o im P 6 vavg. Herodot. 
 
 Ovtog 7ioic(of a wg xeXev(o^ a . 
 Xen. 
 
 3 Enn 
 
 tya lyojg titqcooxo)- 
 
 imp 
 
 oiuog <.ftoo) 
 
 o.fa 
 
 avTog m . Eurip. 
 
 TOIS (iovXtVOpff TllQi 6 T6- 
 
 xvov s , onwg naidtvw ,c, ' r 
 avTog no . Xen. 
 
30 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 h. "Apa, avxUta, as soon as, are joined with the in* 
 dicative. 
 
 324. For as soon as they ^« yfy nkovtia xal ov pi- 
 are rich they also hate you. aica. Lysias. 
 
 i. "&n, where, is generally followed by the indicative* 
 
 325. He learned where 12w&dvopiu sa Xva slfil im P o 
 were the Delians. jfaog. Herodot. 
 
 326. They build houses Olxodofiea olxlov Xva avibg 
 where he himself directed in -^o'fw* 6 jrf Qa t. Hero- 
 the country. dot. 
 
 Jc. Mh when it expresses a wish, takes the optative ; 
 when a prohibition, the present imperative, or the aorist 
 subjunctive. 
 
 327. M ay God not perform My oviog Osog rtUa ^ 
 this thing. Horn. 
 
 328. Receive him not into My Xafi6dv(o *"* avvog tig ol- 
 a house - xla. N. Test. 
 
 329. Be not terrified by Mr) xatanXyoaa su -* a -P vnb o 
 the cry. xgavyyz. Demosth. 
 
 L El ycto, sl'&s, ug, O that, utinam, are construed 
 with the optative. 
 
 330. Othathe may perish 'Jig 6Uv<o"-™ nayxdxtog. Eu- 
 most wretchedly. r j p# 
 
 331. O that Alcinous may Al'&s TsXevtaaf' Snag AXxU 
 accomplish all things. voog , Horn. 
 
 332. O that silver-bowed M y d Q T yXi m og t3<iXX«>« 
 Apollo may smite Telema- d QY v Q 6totog 'A^Uar. 
 chus. Hom 
 
CONSTRUCTION OP CONJUNCTIONS. 31 
 
 When the wish relates to any thing past, rfft is joined with the 
 indicative. 
 
 333. O that the sea had AV&s ov novrog, £ivog v , diag- 
 destroyed thee, stranger. qaia/ a . Apoll. Rh. 
 
 334. O that we had found El'&s svgio>c(o sa ov, > 'Adfirjiog r t 
 thee, Admetus, not grieving. py Xv7i£<o w -* A -P r . Eurip. 
 
 m. El yug, d'&s, <og, are often prefixed to the im- 
 perfect and second aorist of oyuXw, with an infinitive 
 following. 
 
 335. O that I had re- El yotg ocptiX(o sa tqiu6oXov 
 ceived three oboli. Xan6dv(a lVF - sa . Aristoph. 
 
 336. O that thou hadst El'&s 6cptlX(a 8a iv &sog Ul- 
 left thy life among the gods. nco l " T - 8a (iiog. Eurip. 
 
 337. Thou hast come i0 Eqxo}ia^ sa in noXepog' wf 
 from battle ; O that thou 6<f>tlX<o 8a avzo&t oX- 
 hadst there perished. Xvu* 1 ™*- 8 *. Horn. 
 
 Sometimes the particles are omitted. 
 
 338. O that he had come 'Oq>uX<» 8a % 0/ u«i ,WF ** tlq 
 into the bottomless gulfs. a6vooog xdopct. Eurip. 
 
 339. Yet O that some "Efinag %lg avrog f aXXog 6<pei- 
 other one had obtained it. X(o 8a Xayxdv(o tl(r ' sa . ^Eschyl. 
 
 X. Conjunctions generally couple similar 
 modes and cases. Grammar, Rule XL VI. 
 
 340. They sung and "Ada?™? xal xogev<a im P. Xen. 
 danced. 
 
 341. Endure, friends, TXruu, 8a , ylXog, xal /xiv<»f* inl 
 and wait for a while. xqwos*- Horn. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 342. He slew his children 
 and his wife and his concu- 
 bines and his servants. 
 
 343. Xenophon came with 
 the rear-guards and targe- 
 teers and heavy-armed men. 
 
 344. Nicias or Laches has 
 discovered or has learned. 
 
 345. In the resurrection, 
 they neither marry , nor are 
 given in marriage. 
 
 346. Hurt not the earth, 
 nor the sea, nor the trees. 
 
 Z'cpdTTwf" S xixvov xal 6 yvvrj 
 xal o TtcdXaxt) xal 6 oixhrjg. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Zevocpuv s'Q X ofiai^ sa ovv 6 
 omo&ocpvXa$ xal niXjaaxrig 
 xal onXlryg. Xen. 
 
 Nixiag jj Adxng evglaxto % 
 fiav&dvo). Plato. 
 
 Ev 6 dvaaxaaig, ovts yajnea), 
 ovie ixyafilgio. N. Test. 
 
 Mi adixiu^^P e y%, R „ 
 6 S-dXaooa, fiijrs 6 divdgov. 
 ■ N. Test. 
 
 a. To this rule belong, not only the copulative 
 and disjunctive conjunctions, but several others, as 
 also adverbs of likeness. 
 
 347. The city consists 
 of more than ten thousand 
 houses. 
 
 348. They found no other 
 thing than naked dead in 
 the campi 
 
 349. All men with delight 
 await festivals, but kings. 
 
 350. Him we will treat 
 as a benefactor and friend, 
 not as a slave. 
 
 351. I behold Rhesus 
 like a god standing among 
 the horses. 
 
 'O noXig ix nXdiov jj fivgiot 
 olxla owloT7i(u. A -P. Xen. 
 
 Ovdslg clXXog svgiox(o aa ij vs- 
 xgog m -P yvpvog iv 6 oxga- 
 ronedov. Xen. 
 
 n&g av&gumog yditag ngoa- 
 dixo[iai 6 eogxTj, n l^ v « 
 rvgavvog. Xen. 
 
 Ovxog &g svsgyhTjg xal cpiXog, 
 ovx cog dovXog nsgiimo. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ogata 8s c P%oog dW dal[i<ov 
 torwu^P iv 6 Xnnog. 
 Eurip. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 33 
 
 352. They choose a mid- »i7£oa*oe'o 1 uca fiixgiog (Slog 
 
 dling life with justice, rather ftzxa diy.aioavri]S ^dllov, 
 
 than greed wealth with in- i] nlovxog fii/ag (xex« 
 
 justice. udixla s . Isocr. 
 
 XI. The conjunctions iW, ocpga, ojias, ©?, 
 fii} 9 commonly take the optative when the lead- 
 ing verb denotes past time, and the subjunctive 
 when it denotes present or future. Grammar, 
 Rule XLVIL 
 
 353. The Athenians, that 
 they might not be separated, 
 followed close. 
 
 354. They hauled down 
 the galleys, that in the 
 galleys they might save 
 themselves. 
 
 ^•j."». He sent for the 
 shipSj that he might land 
 heavy-armed men within 
 and without the gates. 
 
 35G. That thou mayest 
 he still more courageous, 
 consider also this thing. 
 
 :5"J7. Thou speakest well : 
 for watch me, lest somehow 
 I (lectin- thee. 
 
 :'">S. Take the whip and 
 the curiously made reins, 
 and I ivill alight, that I 
 
 ■q? fight. 
 
 'O ds Afrrjvaiog, Xva /zr/ dia- 
 O7id(o*- -f a , inay.oXov&i(o vn P. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ka&t?j((o' a o Tgirjgiig, wg iv 6 
 TQiriQiig owQo} hUO -P r . Xen. 
 
 c O ruvg ^sta7ti(i7iofiai v ^ a / 
 OTiwg onXixrig ct7io6i6d£(o°S a 
 tXaoi nod t'Sw 6 tivXt] (254). 
 Xen. 
 
 'jig di i'u {laMov ■&aqgi(u lv '^ r , 
 xal ods xaxavoia/ a . Xen. 
 
 Kttkag Xiym' (pvlaxxia yag eya, 
 fir) nr) 7iaQaY.Q0V(ti*- tV! -f a av. 
 Plato. 
 
 Mumi% xa* r\viov aiyaloug 
 dizofiai/"'*, fym <$' dnoftal- 
 
 Hom. 
 
 oyqa fiaxofica' 
 
34 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 359. As the sun awaits "jlontQ 6 r t Xiog ov Tzsoifiivco 
 
 TeXX(o su -f a , ovno fitids ov 
 7i£Qi[iiv(o lyl xgoTog xal x}jo- 
 cpog xal znatvog, Xv sv noi- 
 sco 5U 'f a . Epict. 
 
 not prayers and incanta- 
 tions, that he may rise, so 
 neither do thou await ap- 
 plauses and shouts and 
 praises, that thou mayest 
 benefit. 
 
 a. e Jlg, wots, that, so that, take the indicative or 
 infinitive. 
 
 360. He has so great Jvva^ig <5' %%& tooovrog, cog, 
 power, that, having been vnb <t>aQvu6at,og g udi- 
 
 injured by Pharnabazus, he 
 takes revenge on him. 
 
 361. They put them- 
 selves in array, so as to 
 Jill the street. 
 
 TlflWQSCO" 1 "" av- 
 
 Xen. 
 
 xm v ' v ^ a , 
 Tog a . 
 
 2?WT(XOGC0 U -f a WOTS iflTtXl]- 
 
 &(o w-/« < % £ Sm Xen. 
 
 b. c flg, that, in quoting the words or sentiments o£ 
 another, takes the indicative or optative. 
 
 362. They say that thou 
 acquiredst great wealth with 
 the spear. 
 
 363. He learns that the 
 kingdom had devolved to 
 this man. 
 
 Likewise tru 
 
 Aiyco oog ov fisyag nXovxog 
 xxao^iai M- ^ a ovv &i>Xfiq* 
 iEschyl. 
 
 Hvv&<xvo t uai cog o fiaoiXela 
 nsQisQ%0[xaL M ' o ' p ig ovxog o 
 avtjg. Herodot. 
 
 364. He reported in as- *Anayy£XXo) f a £v ixxXrjola, oil 
 sembly, that Lysander de- avr.bg Avoavdoog xecog xaxi- 
 tains him so long. x (alIipr - Xen. 
 
 365. I heard that Peri- 'Axovcof" on llsgixXijg noXvg 
 cles knew many charms. inloxa^ai -^ iTKodrj. Xen. 
 
 MMMMi 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 35 
 
 Also in the sense of becatise. 
 
 366. Certain ones bring Eyu xlg slg dlxv ayco, ov% 
 me into law-suits, not be- oxi aSixea) 1 * vii iyaS. 
 cause they are injured by Xen. 
 
 me.' 
 
 367. They were indig- Ayavaxxiw A - im P, on l^w°P r 
 nant, that they had kings (x avyxXr^og (iaoiXtvg. He- 
 from the senate rodian. 
 
 c. El, if takes the indicative or optative, and some- 
 times the subjunctive. 
 
 368. But go now, rouse '.4M'. ffyu ,H -i |r vvv, Al'ag avi- 
 Ajax, if thou pitiest me. (jtij/u 111 ^, u eyto iksaigw 1 *. 
 
 Horn. 
 
 369. He sent before chos- ITqo7isfi7i(o fa Xoyag, ug, & I'ttsi^ 
 en men, that, if they should pi °- sa , anoxXslb) °f a avtog. 
 approach, they might pre- Herodian. 
 
 vent them. 
 
 d. 'Av, in the poets xs or xiv, is put with all the modes 
 and participles, to which it gives a potential sense. 
 
 With the indicative. 
 
 370. I should glory and 
 think highly of myself, if I 
 knew these things. 
 
 371. Then indeed the 
 unhappy Ulysses would have 
 perished against destiny, if 
 blue-eyed Minerva had not 
 given prudence. 
 
 372. Whenever being ex- 
 pelled he came into another 
 
 Kattvvo)*- im P x^ xal u6qv- 
 vG}"- hn P uv, d inlaxa- 
 ptn tn ** ovtoc;. Plato. 
 
 Ev&u, xe drj dvoiyvog vniq 
 [iooog a oXXvco u - sa D Odva- 
 otig, u (ir) tnicpgoovvt] 81- 
 dwfii Iw ^ a yXuvxwmg 'A&rj- 
 vt). Horn. 
 
 "Ono)g untXuvv(o TA i(tfo^ai A - 0, * a 
 t'g liXXog olxlu, uneXavv(o im P 
 
86 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 house, he was expelled also av xal ornb ovtoq f . Hero- 
 
 from this. dot. 
 
 373. Ships might anchor Navg 6q[x%&) ™ %im v av ngbg o 
 
 near the rock, not far from 7ihpa d , ov tto'^w «7to 
 
 the outlets. 6 ix6oXq. Arrian. 
 
 With the optative. 
 
 374. Medocus would not 
 applaud me, if I should ex- 
 pel my benefactors. 
 
 375. In a great tumult 
 how could one hear, or 
 speak 1 
 
 376. Hear now concern- 
 ing the state. 
 
 377. But how he dis- 
 honored, I will relate. 
 
 Ovx av Mrj&oxog iya inav- 
 vs(»)P r , si e$sXavvia°- pr 6 svsp- 
 yhrjg. Xen. 
 
 Ev noXvg opadog nwg xev xlg 
 axovcaf", rj ento sa . Horn. 
 
 Axovco p av ydrj nsgl b noXi- 
 
 tsla s . Plato. 
 Hag 8* an[itt£(0f a , iyw (pga- 
 
 £eo w av. Plato. 
 
 With the subjunctive. 
 
 378. He will behold, and Eloomo^ai^ teal ovx av al- 
 will not praise. vioa^. Eurip. 
 
 379. Consider now, how &pa£o> M vvv, onfog xs noXig 
 thou mayest save the city. oad£<of a . Horn. 
 
 With the infinitive. 
 
 380. But let us go while "Alt slfii tv - sa tag hi ofo/iai, 
 yet we think that we shall svnstag xgariio II,T -f a av. 
 easily conquer. Xen. 
 
 381. We granted that 'O^ioXoyia^ svdaifiovia 1 **-* 7, 
 we should be happy and do av xal sv ngaxxta IIfp J> r . 
 well. Plato. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. * 37 
 
 With participles. 
 
 382. Those who would e O yding fiiv av itiyxa p - PA -*», 
 willingly be confuted, if they d jlg no prj akt]&i)g Uya) -P r ' 
 should say any thing not fjdbcog <5' av iUyxu *•**/<*, e £ 
 true ; and who would willing- tlq jig no /xrj alrj&rjg Xs- 
 ly confute, if any one should yu °-P r , Plato. 
 
 say any thing not true. 
 
 After the relatives It, oarn, orttt, &c, at has mostly the signifi- 
 cation of the Latin cunque, soever, in which case it is generally fol- 
 lowed by the subjunctive, sometimes by the optative, rarely by the 
 indicative. 
 
 383. He will declare ichat- El'gw og ne -P av av imojil- 
 soever things thou may est ?.w 9U ^ a . Xen. 
 
 order. 
 
 384. Whatsoever other a Oaxig™ av aXXog fiav&a- 
 thing he may learn, he will vw °-P r , gaov ' fiav&dvco M . 
 learn more easily. Plato. 
 
 385. There is Rome, 3 Exzi ufu o 'Pwfir}, onov av 6 
 wherever the emperor may (iaaiUvg sl^l BV . Herodian. 
 
 he. 
 
 386. To follow both by "Enotxai xul xaia yij a xal tiara 
 land and by sea, wherever tiaXaxxa*; onov av rffio- 
 they may lead. fxuc sv -P r . Xen. 
 
 387. Whithersoever he "Onov uv eianogsvofiai IN - im P r 
 entered, into villages, or ac xto/iy, ?/ noXig, rj aygog. 
 cities, or fields. N. Test. 
 
 e. Via*', by contraction $v or av, in the Ionic poets 
 et y.c or ul'xs, if, takes the subjunctive. 
 
 388. I will do these things, JToiio) ovxog, xal ijxw nagu 
 and I will come to thee to- av a avgi'ov, (av Oibg i&iXw. 
 morrow, if God be loilling. Plato. 
 
 4 
 
38 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 389. They fight valiantly ; 
 but if they dismount, or are 
 thrown off, they are easily 
 taken. 
 
 390. If some ohey not, 
 lead us against these, that 
 we, not they, may rule. 
 
 391. If Alexander hills 
 Menelaus, let him then have 
 Helen. 
 
 revvalojg fidxofiai ' tjv di ano- 
 6aivoj sa , rj xaTccq>£Q(o T -f e , 
 gadiag ocXlaxa. Herodian. 
 
 *AV di [17} 7lSl&(0 U 'P r Tig, en} 
 ovxog a iy<n aya P, 
 iyoj, fit} ixslvog agxa 
 Xen. 
 
 El psv xsv MsviXaog Atesav- 
 dgog xaranicpva, amog 
 
 07l(Oi 
 
 B7ISI& 
 
 Horn. 
 
 EXiv n fyco ,M -P r . 
 
 f. 'jEnst, insidrj, inelnsg, iTtsidrfnsg, inuxoi, Since, for 
 as much as, commonly take the indicative, the opta- 
 tive rarely. 
 
 392. Since you are very y Ensl ngo&v^so^ai, ovx ivav- 
 desirous, I will not oppose. -uoopou, ^Eschyl. 
 
 393. Withdraw, said he, MsTaxagsw fa , 977^ * a , imdr) 
 since I have punished thy (y<a b abg ex&gbg rifia- 
 enemy. gico *■?. Xen. 
 
 394. Since you are willing, ^Enelnsg (iovXonai, nsgijiiivbi 
 
 wait till I return : I will 
 come quickly. 
 
 eat av sya igxofiai 6 " 
 qua ds taxswg. Xen. 
 
 XII. One verb governs another in the infini- 
 tive. Grammar, Rule XXIX. 
 
 395. They began to de- y Agxa> u ^ a xaTa6alv(o dnb 6 [ict- 
 scend from the hill. arog. Xen. 
 
 396. To attack he durst 3 Efi6dXX(o ov toXfida f a , ovds 
 not, nor was he willing to fioiiXopai im P diamvdvvsva. 
 hazard a battle. Xen. 
 
INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY ANOTHER VERB. 
 
 39 
 
 397. Hesitate not, said 
 he, but try to appease the 
 man. 
 
 398. I am not able yet ac- 
 cording to the Delphic pre- 
 cept to know myself. 
 
 399. If one receives thir- 
 teen talents, much more does 
 he desire to receive sixteen. 
 
 400. They were not able 
 to stop the flux, before he 
 fainted. Then indeed it 
 ceased. 
 
 401. We will endeavour 
 to take care, that thou shalt 
 never be ashamed of our 
 friendship. 
 
 402. And I indeed, if in 
 thy house I should undertake 
 to learn to manage a family, 
 perhaps should corrupt the 
 house. 
 
 403. Rightly therefore 
 spoke he, knowing that he 
 himself designed to accuse 
 me to you. For he spread 
 the report that I purposed 
 already to do these thin 
 
 404. And coasting along 
 they saw the shore, where 
 the Argo IS said to have come 
 ,'n haul 
 
 Mi] dy.iico s , cpr lt ul sa , ul£ iy/Ji- 
 qia) s a <xvr,Q y.arangavibj. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ov dvvupui nw y.uxa o Atkyi- 
 y.hg ygufif.iu & yiyvojoyAu sa 
 t\uai'Tov. Plato. 
 
 Uv ruXuvxov rig XapGu- 
 TO) M (§ 11., c.) rgioxul- 
 dey.a, nolv fiaXlov im&vpia) 
 lau6arco ** exxaldstta. Aris- 
 toph. 
 
 Ov dvvaucu imp egai m 6 qsv^icc, 
 tiq}i> Xuno\\iV/ i i^ a (305) * 
 
 tots psvxort, ye navto 
 Xen. 
 
 ufa 
 
 Eyti nsiQixbi M i7ii(.ieliofiai, (fig 
 fir t 7iore ov inl 6 ijperepog 
 (fdlu d aioxvvio *-™-f a . Xen. 
 
 Kal f'/w 8r), u iv 6 oog oly.og 
 imxeiqifa 0, f a pav&av<o olxo- 
 ropiw, locog av xaraXvpal- 
 ropcu °f a av 6 oixog. Xen. 
 
 'OpOoig uga ).iyoif a , yiyvojoxo} 
 on avjog tniGovXtvb) ,m P 
 di(tOa)J.b) £y(x) npog ov a * 
 i/.cpipwf a yuo o Xoyog cog 
 tyi» npuxTO) ovrog oiavoeo- 
 pm °-P r i',Sr}. Xen. 
 
 Kcti Tiauanlibi \)fcopib) tmp o 
 a/.irj, tvOa 6 y Jpyui Xiyo) 
 ooi//> Mfa . Xen. 
 
40 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 a. There is a periphrastic future, made up of [xiXXw 
 and the infinitive of the present, future, or aorists, cor- 
 responding to the Latin participle in rus joined with the 
 verb sum, and denoting that one is about to do some- 
 thing, or intends to do it. Grammar, page 62. 
 
 405. The Peloponnesians 
 are about to make an irrup- 
 tion into Attica. 
 
 406. I intend to march 
 an army through Europe 
 against Greece. 
 
 407. If therefore any 
 others were about to judge 
 concerning me, greatly 
 should I fear the danger. 
 
 408. He sent them from 
 Ephesus through the Greek 
 cities, (he) being delighted 
 that they were about to see 
 the Greek cities living hap- 
 pily in peace. 
 
 409. If even they icere 
 about to draw themselves up 
 in battle array for him, you 
 excel in bravery. 
 
 risXoTTOwrimog {AsXXa uo6dXXco 
 slg o 3 ArTi7it}. Thucyd. 
 
 MsXXoi iXavvoj Gioaxbg diet 
 o Evqwtit] s inl 6 EXXdg a . 
 Herodot. 
 
 El (jlev oiv ccXXog ilg }A,iXX(o i ' n P 
 tieqI iya % diayiyvwaxco M Sf, 
 aq>6dQcc av cpo6ico M ' IN - im P o 
 xlvdvvog. Lysias. 
 
 ni[i7i(ti-f a avrog an "Ecpsoog 
 8ia 6 'jEXXqvlg noXigS, 
 %dm p - PA -? r on fiiXXco im P 
 omoy.aiff 6 EXXrjvlg noXig 
 (v elgrjvt] svdaipovixwg 8id- 
 yw VA . Xen. 
 
 El xal fj,sXX(o imp vtisq ambg & 
 TiagaTdaoco M *^ a , iv dvdgsla 
 TiQoexo). Herodian. 
 
 XIII. The infinitive mode has an accusative 
 before it. Grammar, Rule IV* 
 
 410. Of these stones they 'Ex oviog o Xl&og q)tjfil im P 
 said the pyramid was built. 6 nvQayiXg olxodopiw p, ^ a . 
 
 Herodot. 
 
INFINITIVE WITH AN ACCUSATIVE BEFORE IT. 
 
 41 
 
 411. And let no one think 
 me to be angrily disposed 
 towards them. 
 
 412. He spreads a report 
 that Xenophon wishes the 
 army to stay. 
 
 413. But I think the sun 
 to be still upon the moun- 
 tains, and not yet to have 
 set. 
 
 414. When they heard 
 that Sardis and Croesus had 
 been taken, they sold the ves- 
 sel in Samos. 
 
 415. Artabanus entreated 
 him by no means to under- 
 take an expedition against 
 the Scythians. 
 
 41G. In the morning he 
 arises, and orders a splendid 
 entirtainment to be prepared. 
 
 417. He heard that Nico- 
 lochus with his ships urns be- 
 sieged in Abydus by Iphi- 
 crates and Diotimus. 
 
 418. But when they con- 
 ceded not that Messene 
 should be under the Lacedae- 
 monians, he assembled a 
 large mercenary force, that 
 he might make war in con- 
 junction with the Lacedae- 
 monians. 
 
 4* 
 
 Kal fir t dug ol'ojxat IU iyco dva- 
 
 xoXcug diuxsipai ngbg av- 
 
 Tog a . Isocrat. 
 *Ex(pifm Xoyog otl Zevoywv 
 
 /5ovAo//at xaTajiivco^ 1 o 
 
 OTQuzid. Xen. 
 AXk oifxaL en yXiog sifil irrl 
 
 6 ogog d , xal ovrtta 5vo) p . 
 
 Plato. 
 
 *Eitsl nvv&dvoixaL sa 2<xgdzig 
 is xal Kgoloog aXloxa) x,p , 
 anodidwfxi M,sa o xquttjo (v 
 Zapog. Herodot. 
 
 AgxdSavog xgfj£(a tmp ^t}dafiag 
 avxbg otgaiela inl JFxv&rjg* 
 Tiotio) M . Herodot. 
 
 "Eg)&sv dvurnifii M , xal xeXeva 
 Xafi7iQog eozlaoig nagaoxtv- 
 d'£(ti *S a . Longus. 
 
 Axova)f a Nix6Xo%og ovv 6 vavg 
 TioXiogxioj r \v 'A6v5og vno 
 *I<pixgdxr\g e xal Aioxi^iog 
 (§ 10). Xen. 
 
 'gnu de ov avy%(agi(o tmp Mia- 
 Q7\vr\ vno Aaxedaiuoviog d 
 ei[ui, $Evixog n * noXvg ovXXi- 
 yu) imp , onwg noXepio) °- pr 
 /xtxd AaxedoafioviogS. Xen. 
 
42 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 419. The Persians desire 
 that the government and the 
 revenue should come into the 
 power of themselves. 
 
 420. After this he com- 
 manded them when they had 
 supped to he present before 
 the camp. 
 
 'Em&viiioi niqariq o agxv *ai\ 
 b xaQiiaoig ylyvofiai sa iq> 
 
 3 £x ds ovTog dsmvsoi PA -/ aa -P 
 nagayysXX(o^ a ndgsi^ii tiqo- 
 
 G&SV 6 GTQCCTOTtsdoV (256). 
 
 Xen. 
 
 a. The infinitive takes before it the same case as the 
 preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same per- 
 son. Grammar , Rule IV., Exc. 
 
 421. The Thebans having 
 come forward said that they 
 also wished to speak. 
 
 422. Ther sander said that 
 he also was invited by Atta- 
 ginus to this supper. 
 
 423. For he said that he 
 often in the night, though 
 marching with a few men, 
 was separated with the horse- 
 men from the foot soldiers. 
 
 424. The others said that 
 they after having consulted 
 would make known their reso- 
 lution ; but Xenophon said 
 that he would depart now 
 from the army and wished to 
 sail away. 
 
 °0 ds Or]6cuog nagsg%o- 
 
 TO? @OvXo[ACU 871(0 INF -*°. 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 G>rj{u sa ds 6 Osgaavdgog xa- 
 Xsoj F 'f a v. at avtbg vnb *At- 
 Taylvog g em o dsinvoy a 
 ovTog. Herodot. 
 
 UoXXuy.ig yctg (ptjfil sa vvxtojq 
 avrbg, xal ovv oXlyog no- 
 Qsvo^ai PA , anoanaco *f a 
 ovv 6 Xnnog anb b ns^og. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 • 
 
 c O nsv aXXog (prjfil im P /Sov- 
 Xsvco M- PA -/ ffl - n anayysl- 
 
 Xoj 1NF ff' Esvocptov ds 871(0 sa 
 oTt anaXXaooo) M -°-/ a %dn 
 anb b oTQccTiot xal fiovXo- 
 fiat 0, P r anonXea. Xen. 
 
 ■fflHOHn«BHI 
 
 ■■ 
 
VERB WITH THE SAME CASE AFTER IT AS BEFORE IT. 43 
 
 b. When the infinitive and the preceding verb relate 
 to the same person, the subject of the infinitive is 
 generally omitted, but expressed when an emphasis lies 
 upon it. 
 
 425. He weeps, and says 
 that he is poor. 
 
 426. When J said that I 
 was rich, thou laughedst at 
 me. 
 
 427. / think that with 
 the assistance of the gods 
 J shall easily recover my 
 government. 
 
 428. You also he hates, 
 and thinks himself to be 
 injured by you. 
 
 429. /, O men, acknowl- 
 edge that I struck many 
 men for breach of disci- 
 pline. 
 
 K).a<a xal (pr/fii ncvoftai. 
 Aristoph. 
 
 "Ore iyw cpr]fii sa nlovTUOy 
 ydaa)f a in iy<a d . Xen. 
 
 Olofiat, Ixv avv 6 &f6g gadlwg 
 anolafifiuvo sa 6 «££*?'• 
 Xen. 
 
 Zv ds xal fiiutco, xal adixiw r 
 vo/il&u vno ov s . Xen. 
 
 Eyto, oi avi t q, o^ioXoyioj 
 nsdm f a dr) anw nolvg 
 Bvexa areola (267). Xen. 
 
 XIV. Any verb may have the same case 
 after it as before it, when both words refer 
 Grammar, Rule V. 
 
 to the same thing 
 
 430. Athos is a mountain 
 large and celebrated, extend- 
 ing to the sea, inhabited by 
 men. 
 
 431. He ventured to 
 come to Archidamus, and 
 begged him to be saviour. 
 
 O > 'AOo)Q si/u oqoq fiiyag xs 
 xal ovouuuTog, eg duXaaaa 
 y.e.t/rjxo) FA , oixiia r - v *-P vno 
 la^o". Herodot. 
 
 ToXf.iu(D^ a l'Qxo k uai K ' tT,r ' sa ngog 
 6 slQzld(tfuog*, xal deo- 
 (^at ,mp avrog* 0biTi]Q ylyvo- 
 fx'at lKFaa . Xen. 
 
44 
 
 GREEK. EXERCISES. 
 
 432. The Cappadocians 
 by the Greeks are called 
 Syrians. 
 
 433. After these things 
 Theramenes was chosen am- 
 bassador plenipotentiary to 
 Lacedaemon. 
 
 434. Gelon after not a 
 long time on account of his 
 valor was appointed to be 
 commander of the cavalry. 
 
 435. I love to speak the 
 truth always, and / am not 
 a wily man. 
 
 436. Immediately the 
 Pharsalians had peace, and 
 soon Jason by common con- 
 sent was made ruler. 
 
 437. After the most rigid 
 sect I lived a Pharisee. 
 
 438. He thought that 
 through her the she-goats 
 appeared beautiful. 
 
 439. I so desire to learn 
 to ride, that I think, if 
 / become a horseman, that 
 i" shall be a flying man. 
 
 440. To receive this 
 thing from those who pro- 
 fess to be lovers. 
 
 O ds Ka7i7iad6xr]g vnb Ek- 
 XtjvS jsvQiog 6vo[id£a. He* 
 rodot. 
 
 Msxa ovrog Ot]QU[ievT}g ah- 
 QE(o p f a TiQSofoviTjg eg Aaxs- 
 dalfiav avToxgdzag. Xen. 
 
 c O riXuv [1ST ov noXvg xgovog* 
 
 dl* (XQET7) d (XTtodsiXVVG) & 
 
 slfil Xnnagxog. Herodot. 
 
 &ds(a Xiya 6 dXrjdtjg™ act, 
 xal ov dmXoog q>v(o A * avyg. 
 Eurip. 
 
 Ev&vg {iev 6 OagodXcog (Iqt^vtj 
 ay(o m P, tcc%v ds 6 'laowv 
 ofxoXoyovftivag xaybg xcx&l- 
 atrjfxi a -p\ Xen. 
 
 Kaxct o axgiGyg aXgsoig a 
 £aoof a &agioouog. N. Test. 
 
 ]Yo}il£(o im P di' sxslvog* 6 «t| a 
 cpalva M - 1NF xaXog. Longus. 
 
 Eyw ovxcog E7ii&V(i,s(o \n- 
 
 71SVCO 1NF [iCCV&aVbJ lvr - sa , Wff 
 
 j>(tyi/£w, iccv IjtTisvg ylyvo- 
 pai sa (§ 11., e.), av&gu- 
 nog nxrjvbg slfxl iar ^ 
 . (§ 13., &.). Xen. 
 
 Ovxog nagaXay.6<xv(o naga 6 
 cpdoxct) PA -SP igaoxrig S-P sifiL 
 Plato. 
 
INFINITIVES, &,C. USED AS SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 441. Having come to the 
 city, together with those who 
 wished to be free he be- 
 sieged the tyrants. 
 
 ES 
 
 45 
 
 gcotv, 
 
 ttfia o fiovlofiat pa -' , -p eifil 
 itev&fQog d - p 7iohoQY.i(x>f a 
 6 Tvganog. Herodot. 
 
 XV. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, 
 often supplies the place of the substantive, 
 and then the adjective is put in the neuter 
 Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 3. 
 
 singular. 
 
 An infinitive, or some part of a sentence, 
 often supplies the place of a nominative. 
 Grammar, Rule III, Obs. 2. 
 
 442. And to betray them 
 no longer was honorable. 
 
 443. To be envied is bet- 
 ter than to be pitied. 
 
 444. That the good shoidd 
 do well is right. 
 
 445. To go over the others 
 by name icould be much 
 work. 
 
 44G. When they heard 
 th.it which had happened, 
 that they were grieved ex- 
 ceedingly w as rvidf/'t. 
 
 447. Among the Lydians, 
 and mostly also among the 
 other barbarians, even for 
 a man to be seen naked leads 
 to great infamy. 
 
 Kal 7TQo8ldojfii sa avibq ovy.ixi 
 dfil im P xaX6g ne . Thucyd. 
 
 *P&ovt(a y.Qiloowv elpl i] ot- 
 tndon. Herodot. 
 
 zor t or6g a -P sv 7to«itw INF- P r 
 Ufil dr/.aiog. Aristoph. 
 
 °0 uilog a -P ovoijaou duo%o- 
 f.iui A,sa noXvg (XV IQ'/OV 
 tiul ° . Isocr. 
 
 Enu <$' uy.ovo) Iy ^ a 6 yiyro- 
 pt r,PA ' ne , on acpodga uvl- 
 do) F ^ a di'j/.og ylyvo^.UL aa . 
 Xen. 
 
 Ilagu 6 jlvdog '', a/tdov da y.u\ 
 nana o u).Xvg {juQditQoq d , 
 y.(u avrjo* onjOftaL ri **f a 
 yrurirg f'g unj%vvri (.ttyag 
 
 i(ino). Herodot. 
 
46 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 448. Unless some one El fit] ilg nQoxataXap6d- 
 shall secure Cithasron, to V(0 ^^-ff q Ki&aigm>, ov 
 get into Thebes will not gddiog slpl tig 6 07}6ai ep- 
 be easy. 6dXXu ,NF - sa . Xen. 
 
 So also with impersonal verbs, (which otherwise have no 
 nominative.) 
 
 449. It was resolved to Aoxii^ a 3s dva6dXX(a UAVT - sa 
 adjourn to another assembly. ig hegog ixxXyala. Xen. 
 
 450. Upon the golden 3 Enl 6 xgvosog /%*o£ s vx 
 altar it is not lawful to sa- sl-sari -&vo3. Herodot. 
 crifice. 
 
 451. For no longer was Ov ydg hi iyxcogel A - im P piva, 
 it practicable to stay, on did 6 nXrj&og a . Xen. 
 account of the multitude. 
 
 452. It is lawful to sail v E^saxi dnonXsa ex 6 Xipl\v 
 away out of the harbour, ovtog, onoi av xlg fiovXo- 
 whithersoever one pleases. pai so . Demosth. 
 
 453. It teas decreed to Aoxu^ a 6 ts Xiprjv ano/m- 
 block up the harbours, ex- vvo)™ F -f a nXr\v slg (277), 
 cept one, and to repair the xal o tuxog evTQ£7il£<a 1 '* F -P r , 
 walls, and to set watches. xocl cpvXaxrj e(fiazTjpi lsT -P r . 
 
 Xen. 
 
 a. Frequently a substantive verb takes for its sub- 
 ject, instead of an infinitive or part of a sentence, the 
 subject of an infinitive or part of a sentence, with 
 which the adjective agrees in gender, number, and case 
 Grammar, Rule II., Obs. 3. 
 
 454. It is right that we AlxaiogV- m dpi P ,lst pers ' did 6 
 on account of our zeal save ^{xhegog nQo&Vfila a ovtoq 
 both him and us. ts o(6£w INF ^ a xotl iyu. 
 
 Lysias. 
 
 MBB^^^HM 
 
NEUTER ADJECTIVES REFERRED TO XQW a 0R TlQa/fia. 47 
 
 455. It becomes manifest KarudrjXog P ,m de ylyvo- 
 
 both in wars and in hunt- 
 ings that they preserve emu- 
 lation in their minds. 
 
 456. Lysis often looked 
 at us, and it was evident 
 that he desired to approach. 
 
 pai P- 3d P er3, xal iv 6 noXe- 
 p.og xal iv 6 &r\ga on 
 <jw£w imp 6 cpiXoveixog ne iv 
 6 ifjvxq. Xen. 
 
 Avoig -frapa iniaxo- 
 nibi MAm P iyd), xal dijXog sm 
 il[xl tm P im&vniw**- 7ZQ0OSQ- 
 
 Xopai 
 
 Plato. 
 
 XVI. An adjective in the neuter gender 
 must often be referred to x^W a or Trpa^a 
 understood. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 4. 
 
 457. He showed that dili- 
 gence is profitable. 
 
 458. Fortune is blind and 
 miserable. 
 
 459. They think riches 
 more useful than brothers. 
 
 460. In cities having 
 good laws virtue is most 
 honorable. 
 
 461. Nature is confessed; 
 but laws, orderly. 
 
 462. Unskilfulness with 
 modesty is mere profitable, 
 than dexterity with arro- 
 gance. 
 
 /}tixvo)f a on xeodaXeog elfu 
 6 impeXeia. Xen. 
 
 TvcpXbg xal dvaxrjvog elfxl 6 
 Tv%r]. Men and. 
 
 Xorjaipog vo^a) XQV^ aV % 
 adeX<p6g* (§ 10., a.). Xen. 
 
 Ev 6 evvojuog noXig jlfiiog si pi 
 6 aomy. Plato. 
 
 c pev cpvaig si pi axaxiog ' 
 o de vo t uog, idaoo) r - PA -P. 
 Demosth. 
 
 *Apu&la per a owepooovvr) " w- 
 (peXipog (ilpl), i] dtSioTTjg 
 pixa uxoXuuluZ. Thucyd. 
 
48 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 XVII. Adjectives referred to substantives 
 are often used for adverbs, or for substantives 
 in the dative, particularly adjectives denoting 
 time. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 8. 
 
 AVQLOV (JV 
 a • 
 
 ngtav ayia ngog 
 avTog " ' xal sl'db) ™ ,p , cm 
 tnu8av av ud(a au ' sa , aa^is- 
 
 vog 
 
 p.m 
 
 OVVTgt%(0 
 
 M < Xen. 
 
 Ogaco 6 epilog nag i&sXovoi.og 
 ovvsTiof.iai. Xen. 
 
 463. To-morrow early we 
 will bring you to them ; and 
 I know, that when they see 
 you, they will gladly assem- 
 ble. 
 
 464. We see all thy 
 friends voluntarily accom- 
 panying. 
 
 465. In the evening he c Ean(giog 5' l'gxo[iai A ' sa " ami- 
 came ; and immediately into na <f slg svgvg ansog iXav- 
 the wide cave he drove his vaJ a nlcav pijXov. Horn, 
 fat sheep. 
 
 466. But come, eat food *Ak$ ayco im -p, ia&ia figa^ 
 and drink wine here all aal nlvto oivog av&i navr\- 
 day. psgiog p 
 
 467. They took many ylafi6dva) s 
 both slaves and cattle ; and nodov xal ng66axov ' xai 
 they arrived the sixth day at dcpixvsofiav sa sxialog elg 
 Chrysopolis. XgvaonoXig. Xen. 
 
 So also participles in some instances. 
 
 468. At last they were TsXtvxda PA *- m ds nsl&(o p f a 
 persuaded to receive sure- syyvyxyg nag iywS di%o- 
 ties from me. ^ai M - INF A Isocr. 
 
 469. Open, open thou 'Avolyco™- 9 , avolyca avv(a VK ^ a 
 quickly the school. 6 cpgovTioxrigiov. Aristoph. 
 
 470. I will do these Jloiica ovzog, aXXa dagger** 
 things, but speak thou Xiyco. Plato. 
 
 boldly. 
 
 l . Horn. 
 noXvg aal uvSgd- 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 49 
 
 XVIII. One substantive governs another in 
 the genitive (when the latter substantive signifies 
 a different thing from the former). Grammar^ 
 Rule X. 
 
 471. The cattle know the 
 voice of the herdsman. 
 
 472. The hare is terrified 
 by the barking of the dogs. 
 
 473. Anactorium lies at 
 the mouth of the Ambracian 
 gulf- 
 
 474. When the priest of 
 Apollo crowns the stern of 
 the ship. 
 
 475. The water of the 
 Phasis putrefies not, but re- 
 mains pure even beyond the 
 tenth year. 
 
 17G. After the irruption 
 of the JPcloponnesians, im- 
 mediately Lesbos, except 
 Methymne, revolted from the 
 Athenian-. 
 
 477. By reason of the 
 heaviness of his voice a cer- 
 tain humming sound arising 
 in the chamber made indis- 
 tinct the things said. 
 
 478. He was observing 
 both the whizzing of arrows 
 and the clashing of spears. 
 
 5 
 
 c O fiovg 6 cpMVT] 6 fiovxoXog 
 yvaql^o). Auct. Geop. 
 
 '0 Xctycjg vtio 6 xXayyrj g 6 
 xvoiv ixTxlrixTbi. Arrian. 
 
 Avuxxooiov xelfzai inl 6 oio- 
 [iu d 6 AftTtQaxixog xoXuog. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Ensidav 6 Ugsvg 6 AnoXXoav 
 oiscpQ) sv f a 6 nqvava 6 
 nXolov. Plato. 
 
 c O vdojQ 6 ftuoig ov orjno) u , 
 aXXtt fiivo) axgai(pVT}g ne 
 (§ 14.) xal vnsg dixuTog 
 ixog a . Arrian. 
 
 Mstu 6 ia6oXrj 6 TIsXoTtovvtj- 
 OL.og, ev&vg AioSog, nXtjV 
 Mrj&vfivr} (§8.), acplojr}- 
 f u *- sa an AOrivaiog. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 Aiu 6 ftaQVTrjg a 6 cptovi) 
 (3o t u6og rig ev 6 olxrjfiu yi- 
 yvo/xai uocKprjg Ttoitu imp 6 
 Xiyw P - PA -P r . Plato. 
 
 2x{,nTonai imp o'iorog t£ (>6l- 
 £og xulSoimog uxwv. Horn. 
 
50 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 479. Nor found they the 
 officers of the guards sleep- 
 ing, but all sat watchfully 
 with their arms. 
 
 480. They entered about 
 the first sleep with arms into 
 Platcea of JSosotia. 
 
 481. They departed, not 
 towards Peloponnesus, but to 
 JEolis, and Pleuron, and to 
 Proschion of JEtolia. 
 
 482. On account of his 
 hatred of the Lacedemo- 
 nians he approached not. 
 
 483. Who shall separate 
 us from the love of Christ ? 
 
 484. O that neither any 
 desire nor love of the chase 
 may ever seize you, nor of 
 angling. 
 
 Ovds fj,sv svooj PA - a P cpvXa!; 
 rj/rJTGJQ svglaxco sa , aX£ 
 iygrjyogrl avv rsv/og rj- 
 fioti lm P nag. Horn. 
 
 EatQXo^iai A5a ntgl ngSxog 
 VTtvog* %vv onXov ig IlXd- 
 zaia 6 BoiojTict. Thucyd. 
 
 3 Ai'ax(0Qsa>f a , ovx inl Udonov- 
 vrjoog S, aX£ ig 6 AloXig, xal 
 HXsvgav, xal ig Ilgoo/iov 
 6 AhcaXla. Thucyd. 
 
 Aim o [uaog 3 - b Auxsdaifioviog 
 ov nXrjoid^oi wl P. Xen. 
 
 Tig iyoi %(ogt,£a) dnb b aydnr\ 
 6 Xgiaiog ; N. Test. 
 
 .Elds ah [xr\T£ Tig ini&vfxltx 
 jUtjt sgojg o &qga ttots Xajj.- 
 6dvu sa (§ 9. l.) } fltids 
 uyxiGTQua. Plato. 
 
 a. The substantive which governs the genitive is 
 often understood. Grammar, Rule X, Obs. 3. 
 
 485. They ordered me 
 to follow with them to the 
 house of Damnippus. 
 
 486. In the temple of Am- 
 nion he was called the son of 
 Jupiter by the priest. 
 
 487. I never yet asked 
 them if they meant the son 
 of Sophroniscus. 
 
 488. Paris married the 
 
 KsXsvco imp iyu [is& 3 avzov 6 
 dxoXov&sco (§ 13.) slg Adp- 
 vuinog (6 dwpa). Lysias. 
 
 3 £v d* "A^ficov (o Ugbv) vnb 
 6 nQOcprjTtjg S nalg Zevg 
 ngoaayogsvca v -f a . Plut. 
 
 Ovtkotzots avxbg dvSg(OT(Xb)-' a 
 si 6 (vlbg) 2(acpQOvioxog 
 Xiyu °-P r . Plato. 
 
 Ildgig oe ydfi<»f a 6 (&vydxi]g) 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 51 
 
 daughter of Jupiter, but not Zslg, y^ t uw PA, ^ a 8s fit], 01- 
 
 having married, he would yuio P - Ti -P r b x?j<5o? %w l *- im P 
 
 have formed at home an alii- £v dopog p. Eurip. 
 ance not spoken of. 
 
 b. Substantive pronouns are governed in the genitive 
 like substantive nouns. Grammar, Rule X., after Obs. 5. 
 
 4S9. Go out of thy land, ^'o^ouat A - sa ex 6 yr\ ov, v.al 
 
 and out of thy kindred. £x 6 ovyyivua ov. N. Test. 
 
 490. They hired not our Ov fxLO&6b) fa iym 6 ohog, I'owg 
 house, perhaps they will say. el'gu. Demosth. 
 
 491. And they laid their Kal £7it6dXX(o sa 6 y w HQ avxov 
 hands on the apostles, and inl 6 unooroXog a , xal tI&tj- 
 put them in the common p" avibg iv TTjgrjoig 
 prison. drjfxooiog. N. Test. 
 
 So also adjective-pronouns when used as substantives, or hav- 
 ing a noun understood. 
 
 492. He was killed by y £*uvog pav &i>joxco A -P vnb 
 you, and Ms son has the ovS, 6 ds naig exslvog 6 
 government. «^jj I'^oj. Xen. 
 
 493. Of him he had put Ovxog 6 ddeXrpbg dvcugsaP 1 , 
 to death the brother, accused, dia6dXX(» PPA / a ^iv, ovx 
 but not convicted. (Xiyxu PPA -/ a 8i. Herodian. 
 
 c. The possessive pronouns are equivalent in signifi- 
 cation to the genitive of the personal pronouns. Some- 
 times also, like the genitive, they are taken passively. 
 
 494. From this accusation 3 Ex ovxog 6 xuxr t yogla o ffibg 
 the calumny against me has diuCoXr] yLyvopui™*. Plato, 
 arisen. 
 
 405. I am present, being riugu^i, <Wx« vnb b"j:XXr t vt 
 persecuted by the Greeks on dtu 6 obgtpdla*. Thucyd. 
 account of my friendship 
 towards thee. 
 
52 GREEK EXERCTSES. 
 
 XIX. The genitive is used to express that 
 one thing is the quality or circumstance of an- 
 other. Grammar, Rule XI. 
 
 496. He left a son of four Tlbg anoUlnto sa xexxagsg sxog. 
 years. Polyb. 
 
 497. There was in this Mpl im P ds iv 6 xipzvog ovxog 
 temple a statue of twelve dvdgidg dvrodsxa 7ifj%vg. 
 cubits. Herodot. 
 
 498. They built near the Olxodofisaj f a ngbg b 'ilgouov d 
 temple of Juno an inn of two v.axaywyiov diaxooioi novg. 
 hundred feet. Thucyd. 
 
 a. This genitive frequently stands alone, avd-gwnog, 
 xgw a > or tne like, being understood. 
 
 499. He was a body- Jogvcpogog xs sifu Kafi6va7]g, 
 guard of Cambyses, and of xal loyog ovdslg nw [isyctg. 
 no great importance yet. Herodot. 
 
 500. And straightway the Kal sv&ioog «nW^t A -* a 6 xo- 
 damsel arose, and walked : gdaiov, xal nsgmaxiw im P ' 
 for she was of twelve years. Hfil ydg sxog dadsxa. N. 
 
 Test 
 
 XX. The relative os, rj, o, agrees with the 
 antecedent in gender, number, and person; and 
 is construed through all the cases, as the an- 
 tecedent would be in its place. Grammar, 
 Rule VI. 
 
 If no nominative come between the relative and the verb, the 
 relative will be the nominative to the verb. 
 
 501. O old man, who in- 3 Jl ysgtov v , og olxia bds Xd'ivog 
 habitest this stony sepul- xdcpog, a7iodld(afii, lM - sa 6 
 chre, restore my wife. ifibg ddfiag. Eurip. 
 
 m^^m^mmmmm^ 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 
 
 63 
 
 502. He threw down from 
 the battlements a tile ; which 
 having fallen made a noise, 
 and immediately there was 
 an alarm. 
 
 503. In the Leucadian 
 ship, which sunk near the 
 merchant vessel, Timocrates 
 sailing, when the ship was 
 destroyed, slew himself. 
 
 Kaxa6dXX(a sa anb 6 snaX$i$ 
 xegu t ulg ' og nlmai PA ** a 
 ijjocpog noub)f a , xul avilxa 
 (ior t dpi. Thucyd. 
 
 '£nl ds b. Atvxubiog vavg*, 
 og neol b bX/.ug a xaxddv- 
 1*l sa , Ti}xoY.QUii]g nXito, <aq 
 b vavg dia(p&ecQ(o imp , aqpar- 
 T(o fa eavTov. Thucyd. 
 
 But if a nominative cotne between the relative and the verb, 
 the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun following, 
 or the preposition going before, usually governs. 
 
 504. The Sicilian town, 
 of which the Syracusans 
 held the citadel. 
 
 505. 1 will not refuse to 
 tell the art, by which I effect 
 this thing. 
 
 506. They retire to the 
 two companies, which they 
 left by the carriages. 
 
 c O JScxeXty.bg noXiOfia, bgS 
 b uxQonoXig Zvoaxovaioq 
 e/b) im P. Thucyd. 
 
 Ov q>&ovsca eTtco ,NF - aa b ts^pt], 
 di og ovtog anegyd£o[iai. 
 Xen. 
 
 Avaxotoiix) nobg b dvo xd$i,q*, 
 bg xuxuXsiiib) sa nagd b 
 oxtvocpoQov d . Thucyd. 
 
 a. The antecedent often stands in the same clause, 
 and in the same case, with the relative. 
 
 507. There is not a dan- 
 ger which they do not un- 
 dergo. 
 
 508. The grass which they 
 
 5* 
 
 Ovx el pi ouxtg* xlvdvvog* 
 ovx vnopivw. Isocr. 
 
 ATjQOg 
 
 n.f 
 
 <5i f 
 
 tut og • vefiw 
 
54 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 feed on is dry, but it fattens pozdvrj a , dXXd mocha oq>6- 
 exceedingly.* dga. Strabo. 
 
 509. The woman whom c O ds yvvr\ a , og a svglaxco sa , 
 I found wishes not to come. ov povXopcu sgxo^ai A - aa . 
 
 Chariton. 
 
 b. The relative frequently stands alone, the antece- 
 dent being understood. 
 
 510. They send Xeno- 
 phon, and with him tlwse 
 who seemed to be most suit- 
 able. 
 
 HsfiTico 6 Asvoywv, xal avv 
 aiiTog (ixslvog) og doxto) im P 
 imTrjdeiog ( § 14.) slfil. 
 Xen. 
 
 511. Hold; for I behold ^Enloxw p • slaogua ydg (sxsU 
 those whom we pursue. vog) og diojxaj. Eurip. 
 
 512. They bring him to "Ayw avxbg nagd o KXsagxog a , 
 Clearchus, and relate the xal (pgafr (o ngdy^ia) og 
 things which he says. Cle- Xsyco ' o ds KMagxog a- 
 archus having heard was novo) f a , Tagdaow r -f a , xal 
 troubled, and feared greatly. q?o6sco M - im P oyodga. Xen. 
 
 c. The indefinite adjectives' oaog, olog, &c. are also 
 sometimes construed like relatives. 
 
 513. My inexperience all 
 know, who know me. 
 
 514. He heard all things 
 willingly which they wished 
 to say ; and afterwards also 
 he praised them thus. 
 
 c O tjxog ansigla anag ibij/u, 
 oaog iyo) yiyvwoxo). Lysias. 
 
 Aiaxovo) imp nag rjdioig oaog 
 (2ovXo[xai im P Xeya) ' tnsixa 
 
 ds 
 ovxojg. 
 
 xav eitaivsw 
 Xen. 
 
 fa 
 
 aviog 
 
 But these have commonly other adjectives either expressed or 
 understood, which answer to them. 
 
 515. What bride did ever HoXog vvfiopt] numoxs xoaovxog 
 so many horsemen, and tar- Irnxsvg, xal nsXxaax^g, xal 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 
 
 55 
 
 geteers, and heavy-armed 
 
 soldiers conduct, as would 
 
 conduct thy wife to thy 
 house ? 
 
 onXhr^g ngoni/xTtb) f a , 000$ 
 o oog yvvr\ ig o aog oixog 
 7iQoneij.7i(o f a uv ; Xen, 
 
 — and are often applied to different substantives. 
 
 516. Thou thinkest that 'llyiopai Toaovxog jehjx^qiov " 
 thou producest as many ar- nagsxo} M - lT,F (§ 13., b.) 
 guments, as thou hast writ- boog tuq Xoyog ygdyio P. 
 
 ten discourses. Plato. 
 
 d. The relative is often attracted into the case of 
 its antecedent. Grammar, Rule VI., Exc. 1. 
 
 517. With the treasures 
 which my father left. 
 
 518. To purchase the 
 necessaries from the market, 
 which they furnished. 
 
 519. And having come 
 to Arcadia, he desired Ce- 
 pheus, with the twenty sorts 
 whom he had, to assist him 
 in fighting. 
 
 V20. They no longer ob- 
 served the laws, which they 
 received from their ances- 
 tors, nor continued in the 
 customs, which formerly they 
 had. 
 
 021. After he had done 
 these things, he sends to 
 Cyaxares, and by letter re- 
 quested him to come to the 
 
 2vv 6 xtrjoavpog bg tuxttjo 
 hoctuXsItioj sa . Xen. 
 
 O emrrjdeiov oiviofxai iv. 6 
 ayopd, bg 7iaQe^o) im fi. Xen. 
 
 Kul 7zupuylyvo l ucu F/L - sa elg 
 Apy.udia, a$i6(i) im P Kycpevg 
 fitju 6 naug ° , bg v/m im P, 
 u/.ooi, ovpfiaxew. Apollod. 
 
 Ovy.ixi o rofxog <pvXurT(o xm P, 
 bg napu 6 npbyovog 8 -napa.- 
 Xufifiuvo) sa , ovd* iv 6 rjdog 
 i/J t uir(o tm P, bg npoxiqov 
 l'/o) im P. Isocr. 
 
 J^nu de ovxog dtunpuoob) M -f a t 
 nijino) Tigog Kva^ugT]g & , 
 y.dl iauniXlu ltnp ijx(o av- 
 log & tnl o oipdjevpa*,' 
 
56 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 army, that they might con- 
 sult about the fortresses 
 which they had taken. 
 
 emeu? nsgl 6 q>govglov&, o( 
 Xap6dvco P l , ftovXsvoi M -°A 
 Xen. 
 
 The antecedent is often found in the same clause with the 
 relative attracted. 
 
 522. He had overcome mxdw $vv og d uvrbg %vXXsyta fa 
 with the cavalry which he lnnixog d . Xen. 
 himself raised. 
 
 523. He himself steals Avzbg vnE&gxofiou fistf og * 
 away with the guard which e/co im P cpgovgoc * nsgl eav- 
 he had about him. tov & . Herodian. 
 
 Frequently it is understood. 
 
 524. He learned obedi- 
 ence by the things which 
 he suffered. 
 
 525. But I, said Xeno- 
 phon, with those whom I 
 have, will seize the emi- 
 nences. 
 
 526. Having come into 
 the plain of Thebe, he en- 
 camped near the temple, 
 and there besides that which 
 he had he collected from 
 every quarter a very nu- 
 merous army. 
 
 Mav&dva sa dnb (o ngdyfiot) 
 og% ndax(o sa b vnaxo^. 
 N. Test. 
 
 ''Alt iya, cpT]fil sa 6 Esvocpav, 
 ovv (ixslvog) og d t#o>, o 
 axgov xaxaXa^iSdvoi^. Xen. 
 
 :> Acptxvso^.at VK,sa ds ig Ori6r] ns- 
 dlov, xaraargaronsdsv(o v ^ a 
 nsgl o Isgbv*, xal ixsl ngbg 
 (ixslvog d ) og d sx(o im P £v>U 
 Xsyco im P navT(xx6&£V nap,- 
 nXrj&Tjg argciTsvfia. Xen. 
 
 c. The relative frequently differs in number from 
 the antecedent, when the idea of plurality is involved 
 in the singular. Rule VL } Exc. 2. 
 
 527. I stopped the other "jXkoq navw im P fivrjarrig, o tig* 
 suitors, who did such things. roiovxog ys gi£(o°. Horn. 
 
 ^m 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 57 
 
 528. They took the pro- AauGuvw im P 6 inn-fid eiov 
 visions which any one saw ooxig s,no xlg oquco frxog 
 within the army. o ydkuy* (§ 8-, Ex. 262.). 
 
 Xen. 
 
 f. When the relative is placed between two sub- 
 stantives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in 
 gender with the latter. Rule VI., Exc. 3. 
 
 529. And take the hel- Kul b nsgixtcpalala 6 oaxrj- 
 met of salvation, and the gtov ds^ofxai 1M -/ a P, xul 6 
 sword of the spirit, which fudxaiga 6 Tivtvfia, og ne slfil 
 is the word of God. gypa Osog. N. Test. 
 
 When the antecedent is a part of a sentence, the relative is 
 put in the neuter gender. 
 
 530. They suspected some c Tno7ixBvto im P rig acplaxrj- 
 (of the cities) would revolt fxt **msff (§ 13.) n g^ g £ 
 to the Argives ; which also ^Agystog a * oonsg xal ylyvo- 
 happened. (iui sa . Thucyd. 
 
 531. They grieved that "Jx&oficu ""* b'xi h %#o~ 
 the Greeks who went with put A - FA - sa "MXyv avv avxbg 
 them had jlcd } which they (ptvyw, og ovnia ngoo&sv 
 never before had done dur- nouco iv 6 axgaxda. Xen. 
 ing the expedition. 
 
 XXI. The article is often separated from its 
 substantive by adjectives, participles, adverbs, 
 or prepositions with their cases. Grammar, 
 Rule VIIL, 6. 
 
 532. The ancient contests 'O nuXrubg ayo)v vaxtgov elgoj. 
 we afterwards will relate. Isocr. 
 
58 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 533. I think him to la- 
 ment Ms present poverty. 
 
 534. The irruption into 
 the Carduchians they make 
 thus. 
 
 Oi[i(u 5' avrbg odvgofxai 
 (§ 13.) o ndgeipi FA nevla. 
 Isocr. 
 
 8 elg 6 Kagdov/og i[x6oXr] 
 (o8e 7roi£oj M . Xen. 
 
 When these words, for the sake of greater emphasis or clear- 
 ness, are put after the substantive, they are preceded by the 
 article. 
 
 535. Your power is not 
 able to protect the places 
 by the sea. 
 
 536. They came to the 
 gate of iron which led into 
 the city. 
 
 537. And after these 
 things was read the letter 
 from Philip. 
 
 538. The Stratians raised 
 a trophy of the battle against 
 the barbarians. 
 
 c O dvvajxig o vpiiegog ov 8v- 
 va-iiai o x w Q' l0V o iv o #«- 
 Xuixa <5iaaw£w. Demosth. 
 
 y 'EQXO{xai A,sa em 6 nvXt] a o 
 OLdrjgsog*' { , 6 cpigco PA,a - f slg 
 o n6Xig. N. Test. 
 
 Kal [aetcc omog avayiyvia- 
 oxoj imp 6 inioToXr] 6 naga 
 6 fPilmnog s. Demosth. 
 
 °0 8e 2Tgauog rgonaiov Xovr)- 
 fiif a 6 fid/r] 6 ngbg 6 /&xo- 
 6otgog. Thucyd. 
 
 a. Frequently adverbs with the article prefixed are 
 equivalent to adjectives. Grammar, Rule II. , Obs. 10. 
 
 539. They put to flight 
 all the rear guards. 
 
 540. He excelled in all 
 honorable actions, by reason 
 of his constant practice. 
 
 541. Many and necessary 
 delays happened during the 
 intervening time. 
 
 Tgenco M J a nag 
 
 omo&ev 
 
 cpvla%. Xen. 
 diacpigw tmp iv nag 6 y.aXog 
 egyov, dia 6 del fieXhi] -. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 JToXvg xal avaynatog diatgi6r) 
 ylyvofiai sa iv b fxeta^v 
 Xgovog. Demosth. 
 
COxXSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 59 
 
 542. He is conveyed by duxxo(d£a vn avxbg g eg 6 
 them into the continent op- ^neigog 6 xaxuvTiy.gv. Thu- 
 
 posite. 
 
 543. The army came to 
 the pass, which leads - from 
 Macedonia the loiccr to 
 Thessaly. 
 
 cyd. 
 arguTog uq>ixvio(icu sa t'g o 
 tu6olr], baneg unb Maxedo- 
 vla o xuva ig Oeooa/Jot 
 (ptga). Herodot. 
 
 Hence they acquire the character of substantives. 
 
 544. He orders him to Kehvo) avxbg 7Tagaylyvo[j,cM sa 
 come to the front. rig b ngoa&ev (fxegog). Xen. 
 
 545. It is worth while "Asiog™ xolvvv (el fit) xui exel- 
 therefore to consider also rog e$exu£a)f a , nwg noxk o 
 that thing, how formerly the nalai o r/pj vesica *"-*. 
 ancients bestowed honors. Demosth. 
 
 b. In like manner genitives are placed either between 
 the article and the substantive by* which they are gov- 
 erned, or after the substantive with the article before 
 them. Grammar, Rule VIII. , 6. 
 
 546. The government of c O 'PufAuiog Svvuaxuu (uexa- 
 
 He- 
 
 7U7ttco j " sig (xovagxia. 
 rodian. 
 
 the Romans changed into a 
 monarchy. 
 
 547. Such things you 
 saw in the comedy of Aris- 
 tophanes. 
 
 548. Laches with the Auxr t g axgaxevco^ jxexu b $vj.i- 
 allies made war upon MyltB ftuxogS inl Mvhti* b a -?- f 
 
 Toioviog bguh) im P ev b Agi- 
 oioyuvrrf xu pojdla. Plato. 
 
 of the Mcssenians. 
 
 ">19. And now going to 
 the tent of Xcnophon, they 
 said that they had not pro- 
 visions. 
 
 6 MiouTjviog. Thucyd. 
 Kul i'jdr) e'nl axtp •>, a tiiu rA - sa 
 b af Eevoyav, ie/io"" 1 ' art 
 ovx tfom °' pr *> tnm'fieiov. 
 Xen. -, 
 
60 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 c. Very frequently the article is used without a sub- 
 stantive expressed. 
 
 550. Withdraw into the 
 territory of Pharnabazus. 
 
 551. If thou undertakest 
 to manage the affairs of the 
 state. 
 
 552. He preaches the 
 things concerning the king- 
 dom of God. 
 
 553. Thou mightest infer 
 this thing also from the per- 
 sons on hoard ships. 
 
 554. If he should be will- 
 ing to lie in ambush, he 
 might take Gadatas and the 
 men with him. 
 
 Mna^cogioj^ a - a eg 6 <Pagvd6a- 
 
 £og (xwga). Xen. 
 EcCV ETTLXEIQSCO (§ 11. e.) oP- no 
 
 o noXig (nga/fxa) ngdrcoi. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 EvayyeXl^ofiai o p,ne neql 6 
 PaaLXslaS 6 Osog. N. Test. 
 
 Tsx/j.cctQ(o' u,0 f a & av omog xal 
 ano 6 iv 6 vavg. Xen. 
 
 El fiovloficu ivsd()ev(of a , Xafi- 
 6av(o °' sa av 6 raddiag xal 
 6 ovv aviog. Xen. 
 
 XXII. Partitives, and words placed parti- 
 tively, comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, 
 and some numerals, govern the genitive plural." 
 Grammar, Rule XIV. 
 
 555. He mounted twenty 
 men upon each one of the 
 towers. 
 
 556. Some of the histo- 
 rians say, that he married 
 the sister of his mother. 
 
 557. They took the arms, 
 but they stript off the gar- 
 ments of no one of the citi- 
 zens. • 
 
 3 Avoc6i6(x£a im P ds enl 6 nvgyog 
 sxaarog a dvtjg sl'xooi. Xen. 
 
 "Eviot ds 6 Xoyonotog Xsyco, cog 
 6 a,f 6 firixrig ddsXcprj yd(x(x/ a . 
 Xen. 
 
 c O pev onXov Xap6dvco sa , o ds 
 Xvtwv ovdslg 6 7ioXhr}g oxv- 
 Xsxi(a fa . Xen. 
 
PARTITIVES, &C. GOVERNING THE GENITIVE PLURAL. 61 
 
 558. They landed many 
 of the Persians on the small 
 island lying between Sala- 
 mis and the continent. 
 
 559. Besides him they de- 
 stroyed moreover others of 
 the horsemen. 
 
 560. And of two ships 
 drawn ashore the inunda- 
 tion shattered the one. 
 
 561. He lost thirty ships, 
 but the men escaped to the 
 land, and the rest of the ships 
 he drew ashore under the 
 wall. 
 
 562. In Caria the younger 
 of the brothers expelled Ada 
 from the government. 
 
 563. I believe her to be 
 of all women the most beau- 
 tiful 
 
 564. What one of the 
 -prophets did not your fathers 
 persecute ? 
 
 565. Of the commanders 
 two escape, and two die. 
 
 566. He sent without the 
 knowledge of the Athenians 
 a thousand of Macedonians , 
 who came afterwards. 
 
 Eg 6 vqolg fiera^v JZaXajxlgS 
 T£ xupcu xal 6 jjneiQog S no- 
 Xvg 6 Ilsga^g a7io6i6d£(o-f a . 
 Herodot. 
 
 Ilgog exeivog^ dXXog ngoaa- 
 noXXv(af a 6 Innevg. Hero- 
 dot. 
 
 Kal dvo vavg aveXxvco P -' A -.P 
 6 ereuog xaxayvvca f a 6 inl- 
 xXvaig. Thucyd. 
 
 A7ioXXy(of a vavg xqidxovxa, 
 o 8e avrig eg o yr\ anocpev- 
 yoj sa , 6 de Xoinog 6 vavg 
 I'.to o xe}%og d aveXxvb)f a . 
 Xen. 
 
 Kuxu ds 6 Kagla a 6 veog 
 6 ddeXcpog ix6dXX(o sa ex o 
 dvvaaxela "Ada* Diod. Sic. 
 
 3 E/(x) de nel&co M exelvog a elpl 
 nag yvvi] xuXog. Herodot. 
 
 Tig 6 TiQoqpyxrjg ov diojxa)f a 
 6 nuxrjg ov (§ 18.6.)/ 
 N. Test 
 
 c O orgarrjyog dvo fiev dno- 
 (pevya, dvo ds xeXivxdu. 
 Herodot. 
 
 IIefi7io)^ a xgvcpa 6 ^A&Tjvalog * 
 XiXiol Muxsduv, bg vaxegor 
 tgxofiai*" 1 . Thucyd. 
 
 6 
 
62 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 567. And when thou 
 takest the lyre, they prevent 
 thee not from stretching and 
 relaxing whichever one thou 
 pleasest of the chords. 
 
 Kal insidccv 6 Xvqa Xa[i6u- 
 voi sv - sa ) ov diaxwlvo) av 
 emzslpo) INF, / a tc noil avlr}- 
 p iNF. 5 a % g a.f « v p iXopcu ,u 
 
 6 %oydij. Plato. 
 
 a. Other adjectives in the positive degree frequently 
 take their substantives in the genitive, where otherwise 
 instead of the genitive the case of the adjective would be 
 used. 
 
 568. We shall find ambi- JEvglaxot 6 (pd6ri[iog a -P xal 
 
 tious and magnanimous men 
 wishing to be praised. 
 
 569. The Athenians in 
 the tumult destroyed both 
 the resisting and the flying 
 ships. 
 
 (xs/aXoipvxog a,p 6 uvtjq 
 
 emxiveb) 
 Isocr. 
 
 fiovXopou 
 
 PA.a.p 
 
 'Ad-qvociog iv 6 &6qv6og 
 x£QaL'£(o vnp 6 re av-d-lair}- 
 fip M - PA - a -P y.ai 6 cptvyw PA - a -P 
 o vavg s. Herodot. 
 
 b. The genitive is often governed by slg or tig 
 understood. 
 
 570. Thou acknowledg- 
 edst justice to be one of the 
 greatest goods. 
 
 571. I should not wonder 
 if thou shouldst become one 
 of the men renowned for 
 wisdom. 
 
 'OpoXoysa f a (tig ne ) 6 psyocg 
 ayu&bv sifil dixouoovvij a . 
 Plato. 
 
 Ovx av &av[id£(a ° ri (tig) 
 6 iXXoyifiog g,p ylyvoficu ° mSa 
 
 ccvrjQ ent ooqpia 
 
 Plato. 
 
 572. There went also cer- JSvvigxofiai ASa de xal (jig) 
 tain ones of the disciples 6 [xa&rjTrjg anb KaiooiQuct 
 
 from Caesarea with us. avv-syd. N. Test. 
 
NEUTER ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 63 
 
 XXIII. An adjective in the neuter gender 
 without a substantive governs the genitive. 
 Grammar, Rule XII 
 
 573. Bat yet hear also the 
 rest of the fable. 
 
 574. The goodness of God 
 leads thee to repentance. 
 
 575. The accuracy of the 
 investigation will not be 
 made to appear. 
 
 576. They drove us all to 
 this pitch of cruelty. 
 
 577. lie proceeded to such 
 a degree of madness and 
 petulance, as to reject his 
 paternal name. 
 
 578. The most of the ar- 
 my, marching with Xerxes 
 upon Athens, entered among 
 the Boeotians. 
 
 5T9. The Athenians made 
 their government stronger, 
 and they themselves ad- 
 vanced to a great degree of 
 power. 
 
 Alt Ojxajg axovw ■ xal u Xot- 
 nog o fiv&og. Plato. 
 
 c O XQrjozog 6 d~eog eig (usjavota 
 ov w/w N. Test. 
 
 c O uy.Qi6i]g o I'isTaoig ovx 
 iliyxto *&. Herodian. 
 
 .Lig ovrog i cofxoirjg unag e/u) 
 xa&laTrj i ui fa . Isocr. 
 
 Eig Toaoviog fxavlu xat nagoi- 
 via 7iQozo)(je(x)f a , wg 6 nu- 
 jqtooq TiQoartfogla TiayaiTio- 
 
 rodian. 
 
 (§ 11. a.). He- 
 
 z O noXvq 6 OTQaiog, afia £eq- 
 
 his 
 
 7100SV0UUL 
 
 Afyvai a , io6dXX(o sa t'q 
 Boionog. Herodot. 
 Adrjvalog 6 ts UQxr) iyxQaxijq 
 xa&lairjiui M ^ a , xal avxoq inl 
 fisyuq a ^a)O60) f a Svvu^iig. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 a. Instead of the neuter, the adjective frequently 
 takes the gender of the substantive in the genitive. 
 
 580. They made an irrup- 'EpSdXXoa sa ng o \inyila, x«* 
 tion into Argia, and laid noXvq o xaoa 8rj6<t)f a . 
 waste much of the country. 
 
 noXvq o 
 Diod. Sic. 
 
64 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 581. The greater part of 
 the gold the Indians obtain 
 thus, as the Persians say. 
 
 582. But when the king 
 goes forth to the chase, he 
 takes out the half of his 
 guard. 
 
 c O nlslwv 6 xgvoog ovtw o 
 'ivdog XT(xo[iai, wg Hsgotjg 
 (prjpl. Herodot. 
 
 'Otccv ds £$ei(ii* v ' sa ftaoiksvg 
 sTil &t]qcc a , itaya 6 rifxiovg 
 6 cpvXaxi]. Xen. 
 
 XXIV. The cause, manner, and instru- 
 ment are put in the dative. Grammar, Rule 
 XXXVIIL 
 
 583. And the mortar, for 
 want of vessels, they carried 
 upon the back. 
 
 584. They court the alli- 
 ance of the Lacedaemonians, 
 through fear of the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 585. They said that many 
 would join, through hatred 
 of the Lacedaemonians. 
 
 586. This tribute the king 
 lays up in the following 
 manner. 
 
 587. They proceeded run- 
 ning to the first garrison of 
 the island. 
 
 588. And having ascend- 
 ed as they were able, they 
 drew up one another with 
 their spears. 
 
 Kcu 6 Ttrjlog, d/yslov anogla, 
 
 STll 6 VWTOg S (pSQGi lTn P. 
 
 Thucyd. 
 c O a,f 6 slaxsdaipoviog £v[i- 
 fiaxlu, (po6og o A&rjvotlog, 
 ■frsgansvo). Thucyd. 
 
 0t]ixl tmp ds noXvg a-p . nqoaxoi" 
 Qsa v,llxr ff, [uaog 6 Aaxs- 
 doufioviog. Thucyd. 
 Ovrog o cpogog \hr}oavgl£co 6 
 fiaoiXsvg igonog Toioods. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Xcogica tmp dgofiog inl 6 nga- 
 Tog cpvXaxTriQLOV a 6 vfjoog* 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Kai ava6aivb3 PA,sa wg dvva- 
 pai im P, avifiaa im ? aXX^Xmv 
 6 dogv. Xen. 
 
CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT IN THE DATIVE. 65 
 
 589. Another indeed per- "AXXog de ye I'oug nam fa nv*, 
 haps I struck with my fist, oncog pr} Xoyxn v™ ° tojLe- 
 that he might not be struck fiiog * nalto °' pr . Xen. 
 
 by the enemies with the 
 spear. 
 
 590. Here Agesilaus by *Ev&a 6 \4yr\oiXaog [Mcyog fiev, 
 an inconsiderable but sea- xalgiog <5' iv&vfirjiua evdo- 
 
 f\ Xen. 
 
 sonable device became fa- 
 mous. 
 
 UflSW 
 
 591. With snares they Aa^.6av(o sa figoxog xh v &YQ l0 $> 
 took wild geese, and ducks, xal vtJtiu, xal wtig. Lon- 
 and bustards. gus. 
 
 592. I should be indig- Ayavaxteo) °f a av 6 eQwnjfia 
 nant at the question and xal enw °- sa av, Evcprjueai, 
 should say, Speak good w av&Q(onog v . Plato, 
 words, O man. 
 
 593. The youths were de- c O veavlag o /.tev avdgela o 
 lighted with the vcdor of Ma$iuivog xatQCo Kjm P, 6 de 
 Maximinus, but they scoffed 3 AXilat'8qog & eniaxbmTO) im P. 
 at Alexander. Herodian. 
 
 594. I behold a child ly- 'Oqccw naidlov ngoxH/uat., y.o- 
 ing, adorned with gold and ouica ppa -p xgvuog re xal 
 variegated clothing. f'aO-rjg noixiXog. Herodot. 
 
 595. I am her father by ExelvogZ 6 piv yvotg, narrjQ 
 nature ; but if you should uul ■ 6 de yXixla avibg * ei 
 see her stature, you would ei'dca °- sa ovx av &vyarr)Q * 
 not think her to be my lyu s, a XX 3 ddeXcpy a «/"' IWF 
 daughter, but sister. aurog* vo^oi°^ a . De- 
 
 mosth. 
 
 6» 
 
66 
 
 GREEK EXEltCiSES. 
 
 XXV. Substantives signifying the same thing 
 agree in case. Grammar, Rule I. 
 
 596. Simonides the poet JZifxowlStjg o Jtoitjxrjg ci<pixvio~ 
 came once to Hiero the [icu sa noxk ngbg 'isgwv * 
 king. o xvguvvog. Xen. 
 
 597. From iEgeus the Ati Alysvg Aiys~i8au xwAe'w, 
 jEgida are called, a large (pvXrj fisyag iv 2ndgx^ 
 
 tribe in Sparta. 
 
 598. He suffers this pun- 
 ishment, as they say, because 
 he had an ungovernable 
 tongue, a most shameful dis- 
 ease. 
 
 599. Rhodopis was freed 
 by Charaxus, the son of Sca- 
 mandronymus, and brother 
 of Sappho. 
 
 600. The others, when 
 they arrived, plundered the 
 city Tarsus, being enraged 
 on account of the destruc- 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 Tlvca ovxog 8Urj, w? Xsya, oxt 
 dxoXaoxog I'xco sa yXwaaoc* 
 aloxqbg voaog. Eurip. 
 
 Podanig Xva)f a vnb Xdga^og 8, 
 o 2xa^iav8giavv(xog Ttcilg, 
 d8sX(pbg 8s Hancpo). Hero* 
 dot. 
 
 c O 8s aXXog, S7tsi8r) %x(o sa , 
 o noXig 6 Tagaol 8iagnd~ 
 £(»•&, 8id 6 oXs&gog* 6 ov~ 
 axgaxumxrig bgyl^m. Xen. 
 
 tion of their fellow-soldiers. 
 
 601. And having made an Kal io6dXXm ViL - sa ig 6 Agysia* 
 irruption into Argia, they xaxaXa[i6dv(a "OXnaL, xefyog 
 take Olpce, a strong fortress inl XocpogZ lo/vgog ngbg 
 on a hill by the sea. b daXaooa d . Thucyd. 
 
 602. And passing through Kal 8t,a b 'Aygala s sJfu PA -*», 
 Agraea, they destroyed izm- Aiyuvaia, xafxrj axsi/iaxog, 
 ncea, an unwalled village ; nog&ia) f a ' dcpixvsouat xs 
 they come also to Stratus, inl 2xgaxbg*, noXig fisyag 
 the largest city of Acar- b Axagvavla. Thucyd. 
 nania. 
 
AGREEMENT OF ONE SUBSTANTIVE WITH ANOTHER. 67 
 
 a. The substantive added to another in the same 
 case contains generally an explanation, or fuller defi- 
 nition, but not unfrequently it denotes character or 
 purpose. 
 
 603. They filled skins, 
 which they had for cover- 
 ings. 
 
 604. The soldiers receive 
 Cyratades as commander, 
 and went out of the town. 
 
 Ji<p&sga, bg l/tu imp Griyaopa, 
 mftTzlrjfii iT *P. Xen. 
 
 e O axgaTmxrig 6 re Kvgarudr\g 
 ds^ofiac axgaxriybg, xal I'|<» 
 
 o Tii-xoq g 
 Xen. 
 
 anegxoficu 
 
 b. Sometimes one of the substantives is understood. 
 
 605. We women are a ( 3 Eya) ywrj slfil dtrjgbg xaxoy. 
 noxious evil. Eurip. 
 
 606. Thus we the Mas- Ovxw 8s (iya) 6 MaooaXi(o- 
 silians punish, if any one trig xoXa^m, si rig nctgdvofiog 
 
 should write things contrary 
 to the laws. 
 
 ygaqxo 
 
 °-f*. Lucian. 
 
 Or its place is supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence. 
 
 607. The Trojans died 
 for their country, the most 
 honorable glory. 
 
 609. And then indeed I 
 considered how / should 
 strip the shaggy hide of 
 the dead wild beast from 
 his members ; an exceed- 
 ingly difficult labor. 
 
 Tgwg 8s, 6 xaXbg xXiog, vneg 
 ndxga ^nfaxw in P. Eurip. 
 
 Kal xoxs dt] fiovksva im P ontog 
 XaaiavxrjV fivgoot &r)g -&vq- 
 oxto rrA -P anb psXog igvoi ^' 
 ugyaXiog fidXa /id##oc*. 
 Theocr. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 XXVI. The nominative of the neuter plu- 
 ral is commonly joined with a verb singular. 
 Grammar, Rule IIL> Exc. 1. 
 
 609. Small things are 
 small in comparison with 
 great things. 
 
 610. Letters shall be 
 written on the bark in 
 Doric. 
 
 611. The arrows pene- 
 trated through the shields 
 and through the breast- 
 plates. 
 
 612. Very many buck- 
 lers were taken, which the 
 Greeks rendered useless. 
 
 613.. And thence in like 
 manner are exported the 
 aforesaid goods, 
 
 614. And other sheep I 
 have, which are not of this 
 fold. 
 
 615. All the Acarnanians 
 fled into the cities, and all 
 the cattle went away to a 
 great distance, that they 
 might not be taken by the 
 army. 
 
 '0 Gfiixgog ngbg 6 fisyag* 
 opixgog elfil. Plato. 
 
 rgdftfia d* iv yXoibg ygu- 
 qxa F 'PPf.j(OQiou. Theocr. 
 
 °0 ds Tol-svfia x^Qito imf> #*« o 
 aoTilgS xal did 6 &(oga£ &. 
 Xen. 
 
 Tiggov ds ndy.7ioXvg Xa[i6d- 
 vcof a , og 6 "£XXrjV dxgsiog 
 Tioiico im P. Xen. 
 
 Kal ixst&sv ofioltag ixcpsgo) 
 
 o Tigosgsa) r ' 
 Arrian. 
 
 P.PA.p 
 
 (pog-uov 
 
 Kal aXXog ng66axov c^w, og 
 ovx eifii ex o avXtj ovzog. 
 N. Test. 
 
 Ilag fikv 6 'Axagvav (psvyoi aa 
 eg 6 aaiv, nag ds 6 ^oaxrjfia 
 anoxcogsoj f a nogga, oncog 
 fit} aXlaxo) tv 'P r vnb 6 argd- 
 TsvpaZ. Xen. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 69 
 
 XXVII. Adjectives of plenty, want, diversity, 
 property, worth, cause, also verbals, compounds 
 of a privative, and those signifying an affection 
 of the mind, govern the genitive. Grammar, 
 Rule XIII. 
 
 616. Ah, ah, there is at 
 hand a great conflict, full 
 of groans, nor void of tears. 
 
 617. The city will be full 
 of merchants and strangers 
 and (migrants, of whom now 
 it is destitute. 
 
 6L8. The Carthaginians 
 were destitute of arms and 
 warlike engines. 
 
 619. When the soul is 
 purified from all the evils 
 and desires about the body. 
 
 620. All the way is bare 
 both of wild and cultivated 
 frets. 
 
 621. Of what human de- 
 Ught thou wilt he in want 
 I see not. 
 
 822. But since thou fear- 
 T will make thee free 
 firm* this far 
 
 083. The Jax;irtfs from 
 beginning to end is different 
 from the Oxus. 
 
 Ai, ui, nufjloryn^P uyuv fie- 
 yug, iih'tor^ aiivaypa, ovds 
 duy.ov xevog. Eurip. 
 
 O nohg /aearog ylyvoftai l]u- 
 Tiogog y.al Strog y.al ixstoiy.og, 
 og vvv iQ^uog y.oc&lor^ui, A,p . 
 Isocr. 
 
 'O KaQX^Soviog yvfivbg eliul 
 onlov y.al oqyavov 7io).ejuy.6g~ 
 Herodian. 
 
 EittiSuv o yv/r) xa&ttQog 
 tifil™ nag o (§21.) tzeqI 
 o obijja 0, xaxbv xal im&v- 
 fitu. Plato. 
 
 Ilug 6 686g ydbg tlfil xal 
 uyoiog y.al ijjxcgog divdgog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Onoiog uv&Qomivog evcpQO- 
 avvrj ircide^g uiul ov% oquoj. 
 Xen. 
 
 Enti 5s T(io6tw, tyio ov jl&r]fiL 
 65e iltv&epog cp66og. Eu- 
 rip. 
 
 O Ia^HQxr]g uTiaQX^ /^p* 
 rikog (§ 8.) iTigog tlpl 6 
 "Olog. Strabo. 
 
70 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 624. All these things were 
 thought foreign to soldierly 
 discretion. 
 
 625. For this thing is 
 peculiar to history. 
 
 626. There are in this 
 Apollonia sheep sacred to 
 the sun, which are fed near 
 a river. 
 
 627. He is unworthy of 
 thee, but worthy of me. 
 
 628. He presented a sil- 
 ver cup, and tapestry worth 
 ten mince. 
 
 629. Woman, these things 
 are small, and, as thou say- 
 est, not worthy of my gov~ 
 ernment, nor of Greece. 
 
 630. They led who also 
 were the authors of the at- 
 tempt, and they crossed the 
 ditch. 
 
 631. He wishes to make 
 the youths skilful in pro- 
 curing the necessaries. 
 
 632. The country is fer- 
 tile of grain, and rice, and 
 oil. 
 
 633. If the most wealthy 
 shall be indisputably pos- 
 sessed of Sicyon, assuredly 
 the city again will favor the 
 Lacedaemonians. 
 
 JJag ovxog acoopgoavvi] axga- 
 ■ZLb3TiY.bg aXXoxgiog vo[il£(o im P 
 (§26.). Herodian. 
 
 Ovxog yccg I'diog slfil 6 laxogla. 
 Polyb. 
 
 Elyl (§ 26.) ev 6 'AnoXXoivla 
 . ovxog Ugog r\Xiog ng66axov, 
 
 Og /?9ffXG) (§ 26.) TUXQOC 
 
 noiapog a . Herodot. 
 3 Ava$iog (.isv {slpl) av, xaxu- 
 %iog S' iyco. Soph. 
 
 /JOlQEOflOuf* Cpiull] dQ'/VQZOg, 
 
 xal xanig v^iog dsxa pva. 
 Xen. 
 
 rvvr) y , ods slfit (§ 26.) oy.i- 
 xgog, xav fiovag%ta ovx 
 a$iog, wg cpr^/j.}, 6 ipog (535), 
 ovds e £XXag. Eurip. 
 
 c Hyiofitti mp ds oansg xal 6 
 nuga acxiog d[u, xal 6 xd- 
 cpgog dia6alvw sa . Thucyd. 
 
 Mr\%avixog o imxrjdsiov /?ov- 
 Xofiat 6 naig noiim. 
 
 HoXvcpogog <5' (sifil) 6 x<oga 
 rilxog, xal ogv£a, xal sXaiov. 
 Arrian. 
 
 El o nXovGiogV oacpwg iyxga- 
 xrjg dfil 6 2ixvtav, axe^vag 
 ndXiv Xaxbjvl^b) 6 noXig. 
 Xen. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1 
 
 634. I am unaccustomed 
 indeed to such like confer- 
 ences. 
 
 635. How bold is Bac- 
 chus, and not unpractised 
 in icords. 
 
 636. He assembled a 
 great army, but unacquaint- 
 ed icith fighting and hard- 
 ships. 
 
 637. If thou wast not 
 insatiable of riches, thou 
 wouldst not open the re- 
 positories of the dead. 
 
 638. The servants were 
 faithful, and skilful in mili- 
 tary affairs. 
 
 039. I am acquainted 
 with JEolis, and Phrygia, 
 and Troat, and the lohole 
 government of Pharnabazus. 
 
 040. Thinkest thou not 
 that thou art foolish, if thou 
 
 iderest not how thou 
 i not be unacquainted 
 with this I 
 
 'Arjd-Tjg y' Ufil 6 totovtog 
 Xoyog. Plato. 
 
 c Jlg xrgaovg (slfil) 6 Baxxog, 
 xal ova ayvp>aoxog Xoyog. 
 Eurip. 
 
 Holvg orgaTia (i&gol£co-f a , 
 tiXtjv ansigog fia%W xal 
 novog. Herodian. 
 
 El jur) anXrjOTog ffyu 17 *^ xgrjficc, 
 ovx av vtxgbg p &r\xr\ avol- 
 yco iri - im P. Herodot. 
 
 IliOTog el/ul o vnfjgixTjg, xal 
 imoTrjfiwv 6 OTgaxmxixog. 
 Xen, 
 
 "Efinsigog ds upl 6 AloXlg, xal 
 6 ffrgvylcc, xal 6 Tgcaag, xal 
 6 <I>agvd6a£og (546.) agxfj 
 nag. Xen. 
 Ov fiwgog (§ 14.) ol'ouai 
 tlpl INF (§ 13., b.), e! fxrj 
 o/.onio) onwg (xr\ iSmx7\q 
 rifil-tf ovrog 6 I'gyov ; Xen. 
 
 XXVIII. The comparative degree governs 
 the genitive. Grammar, Rule XV. 
 
 Oil. Thou thinkest not Ovx rjyio/jiai b aog dovXog fttX- 
 thy slaves better than thy- iliov ov. Plato. 
 
 self 
 
72 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 642. There is not a pos- ol>x dpi l Qn $ * T ^ n T ^ 
 session more precious than Eurip. 
 
 virtue. 
 
 643. One among many m g iv noXvg Xotog svglaxco °- sa 
 perhaps thou mightest find, &, oaTlg ^i rf X si Q(ay 
 who is not worse than his nai^g. Eurip. 
 
 father. 
 
 644. Achilles was fairer, U Z dXsvg sl^l xaXXLnv ov fx6vor 
 not only than Patroclus, but ndrgoxXog, aXXa xal o ygag 
 also than all the heroes. Snag. Plato. 
 
 645. He is more beautiful Evfiogcpog ph mgsvg dpi, B v- 
 than Nireus, more nobly y^g ds o Ksxgoy, q Ko~ 
 
 descended than Cecrops, or 
 Codrus, more prudent than 
 Ulysses, and more wealthy 
 than sixteen Croesuses to- 
 gether. 
 
 646. Envy, according to 
 Pindar, is better than pity : 
 the envied have a splendid 
 life; but the very unhappy 
 we pity. 
 
 dgog, ovvsrog ds 6 'Odvoosvg, 
 nXovoiog ds ovvd^ia Kgdloog 
 sxxaldsxa. Lucian. 
 
 O <p&6vog olxTiQfiog, xaxot 
 Illvdagog* , etftl cifxslvav ' 
 6 §aaxalv(o ™*-pr-P Xa^ingbg 
 sxa tflog ' 6 ds Xlav octv- 
 xn? a ' p olxTslgto. Pallad. 
 
 a. Instead of the genitive, comparatives are also con- 
 strued with the conjunction j or fasg, followed by the 
 same case with that of the thing compared. 
 
 647. They are stronger 3 lo X vgbg dpi % ov. Plato. 
 than thou. 
 
 648. What greater wit- 
 ness can I produce than 
 thee against thyself? 
 
 Tig fiagrug 
 
 , M.SU.50 . 
 
 TOV S 
 
 fisl^wv Ttagi- 
 ov xaxa osav- 
 Demosth. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 73 
 
 649. We have to speak of 
 more important things than 
 these. 
 
 650. They came to Celae- 
 nae, where the fountains rise 
 of the river Maeander, and 
 of another not less than the 
 Mceander. 
 
 JIsqI onovdouog nqay^ia^ !^<o 
 Xsyw, rj ovzog. Isocr. 
 
 IIoiQayiyvonai sa eg KsXaival, 
 Xva Ttrjyr) avadcdoca Malav- 
 dgog Tioxauog, xal steqoq 
 ovx iXdaawv r\ Malavdgog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 b. Sometimes jj is placed between two comparatives. 
 
 651. Thou wouldst call Tga^vg 6 xwga $ nedivog av 
 the region more rough than Xeyto °. Plato. 
 
 plain. 
 
 652. See that thou make 2xonew, oTtojg aoqxxXrjg jj xa~ 
 thy return more safe than ^u? noiioj M0 ^ a 6 indvodog. 
 
 Eurip. 
 
 are construed like compar- 
 
 c O vi)$ TgiTiXaaiog 6 r^xiqu 
 Ttoisco f a diccyiyvuoxb) p . 
 Lucian. 
 
 IIe£6g dvvctfiig a&Qol£(t) pl , xal 
 Innevg TioXXaTiXaoiog l/w *"** 
 6 BoiMTog. Diod. Sic. 
 
 Ev oviog 6 xwgog xufiai xaX- 
 xtlov, peys&og d xul t!-a- 
 nluaiog o (§21.) inl 6 
 
 OTOfMX d 6 IlOVXOg XQCCTTjQ, 
 
 oc Iluvanviag 6 ( § 18., a.) 
 KhouGnoTog nvail&ijftif'*. 
 Herodot. 
 
 speedy. 
 
 c. Proportional numbers 
 atives. 
 
 653. He has resolved to 
 make the night three times 
 as great as the day. 
 
 654. He had assembled a 
 foot force, and he had many 
 times more horsemen than 
 t/ir Boeotians. 
 
 655. In this place lies a 
 brazen vessel, in size even 
 nix times as large as the ves- 
 sel at the mouth of the Pon- 
 tic, which Pausaniai the 
 son of Cleoinbrotus dedi- 
 cated. 
 
74 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 d. The excess or defect of measure is put in the 
 dative. 
 
 656. He is therefore Elpl ovv 'looxgdirig (§28.) 
 younger than Isocrates by viog hog ££. Diog. Laert. 
 
 six years. 
 
 • 
 
 657. By how much soever "Oaog «V (isydlccvxog sl(xl av , 
 more proud they may be, rooovxog dvodkcaiog ylyvo- 
 by so much more difficult to [icu. Plato. 
 
 be caught they become. 
 
 658. The horses here Elfil <5' o xavrt] 'imtog (isimv 
 were smaller than the Per- [tiv 6 IZsgaixog ( § 28.), 
 sian ones, but more spirited d-vficodrjg ds nolvg. Xen. 
 by much. 
 
 Also with superlatives. 
 
 659. They contrive for Mrixavdo^iaL dy inl o xa&o- 
 his return a thing the most dog d ngdypa svy&rjg [ia- 
 foolish by far. xgog. flerodot. 
 
 XXIX. Adjectives signifying profit or dis- 
 profit, likeness or unlikeness, &,c, govern the 
 dative. Grammar, Rule XVI. 
 
 660. But if thou shalt di- El ds diaondca, ovts av slftl 
 vide them, neither thou wilt ixstvog XQtjoifxog, ovis «<«*- 
 be useful to them, nor they vog av. Herodot. 
 
 to thee. 
 
 661. Whether therefore, ~Ag ovv, cprj[u sa 3' iya, ovtoq 
 said I, are these things slpl ( § 26.) dya&bg, og 
 good, which are advanta- elfil (§ 26.) axpihpog o 
 geous to men ? av&ganog ; Plato. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 75 
 
 662. The oration shall be 
 neither long, nor unprofit- 
 able to those who hear. 
 
 663. But I judge that 
 these things will be good, 
 and honorable, and agreeable 
 to the spectators. 
 
 664. Orontas soon found 
 him more friendly to Cyrus 
 than to him. 
 
 665. The Camarinaeans 
 were well disposed towards 
 the Athenians, but ever at 
 variance with the Syracu- 
 sans. 
 
 666. The Athenians were 
 carried towards Chios by- 
 sea ; for Asia was hostile to 
 them. 
 
 667. During the war they 
 were troublesome, and were 
 more friendly to the enemies 
 than to Lacedamon. 
 
 668. If we perceive any 
 one opposed to the oligarchy, 
 as far as ire are able, we 
 make away with him. 
 
 669. And the winds them- 
 selves are not seen, but the 
 things which they do, are 
 manifest to us. 
 
 ()7<>. It was evident to the 
 Thebans, that the Laceda> 
 
 Eifil 5' 6 loyog ovte (xaxgog, 
 oiixs avojcpelijg 6 dxovto FA . 
 Isocr. 
 
 riyr(6(jy.(o di, on ovvog dya- 
 &6q, xal xodog, xal 6 &e- 
 urrig 7]Svg Hfil (§26.). 
 Xen. 
 
 Ooovxag t<x%v avibg tVQioxto sa 
 Kvgog cplXog, rj eavxov. 
 Xen. 
 
 di Kccfiarjivaiog 6 fxiv A&rj- 
 valog svvoog sipi, 6 di 
 ZZvoaxovoiog uel didyogog. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Avdya im P di 6 'A&yvcuog inl 
 o Xlog s neXdyiog ' 6 ydg 
 Aolu noXifiiog ctvxbg ufil. 
 Xen. 
 
 *Ev 6 noltfiog %yxupoLi im ? , xal 
 o nolifxiog evfisvrjg u[it rj 
 6 Aaxedalfiwp. Xen. 
 
 Ear rig aia&dvofiai' v ivav- 
 tlog o oXiyagxla, oaov dvva- 
 fitti, exnodwv Ttoido) M . Xen. 
 
 Kul avtjxog nviog /niv ov% 
 bono), og ( § 20., b.) di 
 noito), (puvfQog iyoj el/j.1 
 (§26.). Xen. 
 
 Jj]).og (446.) o Ot]6ul- 
 og yiyvopai sa , on i^i6dU 
 
76 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 monians would make an 
 irruption into their country. 
 
 671. He was sitting in 
 the nearest seat to Seuthes. 
 
 672. An oligarchy suitable 
 to the Lacedcemonians was 
 established. 
 
 673. It is not easy for the 
 horse to turn in a little time, 
 especially if the place be 
 rugged or slippery. 
 
 674. It is difficult for me 
 to notice each one of the 
 leaders. 
 
 675. I do not think the 
 route to be difficult for you, 
 but altogether impossible. 
 
 676. They make Asia 
 equal to Europe. 
 
 677. At every ten battle- 
 ments were large towers, 
 and equally broad, with the 
 wall. 
 
 678. Whoever of you 
 wishes to become like to 
 Achilles, or Ajax, or Nestor, 
 or Ulysses, let him court me> 
 
 679. They have a mode 
 of living similar to the Bac- 
 trians. 
 
 Xw °- pr o Aaxsdatftoviog ig b 
 
 %iaga amov (491). Xen. 
 Ev o nXtjolog dlcpgog ^ev&rjg 
 
 xd&r}[i(u irn P. Xen, 
 OXiyagxia sTiix^dsiog o Aaxs- 
 
 dcu{x6viog xa&lGnjfiL A - sa . 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Ov gadtog ( § 15.) o Xn- 
 nog xdcfXTiTO) iv (xixgog, 
 aXXwg re xav anoxgoxog % 
 oha&rjgog slfil 8 ° 6 x^Qlov. 
 Xen. 
 
 AgyaXsog (§ 15.) ds iyco slfxl 
 diotGxomdo{iai sxaaxog r\ys- 
 ixoov ( § 22.). Horn. 
 
 Ov %<xXs7z6g (§ 14.) av elpl 
 (§ 13.) vo[tl£o) b nogsla -, 
 aXXct na.vxana.Gi advvaxog. 
 Xen. 
 c O Aala 6 JEvgconrj noU(a i'aog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Aid dsxa ds snaH-igS nvqyog 
 slfil [tsyag, xen lGonXaxr\g 
 6 rsi/og. Thucyd. 
 
 "Ooxig av av ( § 22.) fiovXo- 
 fiai su ylyvofiat INF - sa ofioiog 
 *AxiXXsvg, r\ Ai'ag, ij Nsoxcog, 
 % 'Odvaasvg, iya dsgansva. 
 Xen. 
 
 Bdxxgiog naganX^Giog Ijjfw 
 dlaixa. Herodot. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 77 
 
 680. There are said also 
 other things resembling those 
 which are false concerning 
 this man. 
 
 681. He showed himself 
 obedient to the magistrates, 
 and willing to labor. 
 
 682. He wished all the 
 Ionian cities to be subject to 
 himself. 
 
 683. I was not disobedient 
 to the heavenly vision. 
 
 684. Relying on an am- 
 biguous oracle, they marched 
 against the Tegeans. 
 
 685. 1 think you all will 
 acknowledge this contest 
 to be common to me and 
 Ctesiphon. 
 
 636. But see that thou 
 do not make thyself obnox- 
 ious to all these things on 
 account of thy poetry. 
 
 687. I fear lest we shall 
 find certain pleasures con- 
 trary to pleasures. 
 
 638. Thou hast a tongue 
 the contrary to Orpheus. 
 
 Aiyto ( § 26.) xal aXXog y/sv- 
 dt)g el'xsXog nsgl 6 avrjo* 
 ovrog. Herodot. 
 
 'Eavrov naoixco xm P tvTiSL&rjg 
 o ecQxav, xal i&eXonovog. 
 Xen. 
 
 Id^ioto tmp o 3 I(avix6g noXig 
 uTiug savrov vnr]xoog elul. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ov yiyvouat sa anu&r t g 6 oil- 
 odviog oTiraala. N. Test. 
 
 *Enl Ts/sdtTjg a argarevco u - im P t 
 XQTjafxog xl6dj]).og nlovvog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Oiuat ds ov a nag av (380) 
 ofxoXoyio) 1KT -f a (§ 13.) xoi- 
 vbg slul (§ 13.) ovtooI 
 6 aywv* iyoi re xal Kttjoi- 
 qptov. Demosth. 
 
 2xo7ii(o dr) oTiug {ir) nag ovrog 
 i'ro%og oavrov nouot iV -f a di,a 
 o noir\aig*. Plato. 
 
 <T>o6i(a u 5e fir] rig rjdovri 
 i,dovrj EVQioxaff ivarclog, 
 Plato. 
 
 'Oocptvg ds yXwooa 6 ivavrlog 
 f/w. iEschyl. 
 
78 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 a. 
 
 Compounds of avv and opov, also verbals in tog 
 taken passively, govern the dative. 
 
 689. Helicon is contigu- 
 ous to Phocis. 
 
 690. Such forms of gov- 
 ernment axe familiar to you. 
 
 691. He took with him 
 one of the generals, who was 
 of the same mind with him. 
 
 692. Of the Armenians 
 bordering upon us there will 
 be present four thousand 
 horsemen, and twenty thou- 
 sand footmen. 
 
 693. Formerly the Athe- 
 nians made the polemarch 
 of the same right of suffrage 
 with the generals. 
 
 694. Greece was inacces- 
 sible to us, on account of the 
 war. 
 
 695. After the death of 
 Chalcideus, and the battle 
 at Miletus, he was suspected 
 by the Peloponnesians. 
 
 696. The hide was not 
 easy to be cut with iron, nor 
 with stone, when I tried, nor 
 with wood. 
 
 °0 ds c £Xt,xa>v ovvsxrjg slpl 6 
 
 &toy.lg. Strabo. 
 c O ds TOLovTog noXnsla avvr\- 
 
 -d-rjg dpi av. Demosth. 
 
 Il0CQCcX(X[l6(XV(O sa Slg 6 OTQ<XT1]- 
 
 ybg, oaxig upl avrog 6[io- 
 yvcofiwv. Thucyd. 
 
 Aqfisviog ds 6 bfiogog (535) 
 eya TidgEifiL iTTusig (isv 
 TSTQctxio/lfooi, ns^og da 
 8lo[ivqloi. Xen. 
 
 TonuXaibv A&ijvaiog opoipr)- 
 q>og o noXsfAttQXog noisoi yi ' xmp 
 6 GTQartjyog. Herodot. 
 
 y 'A6aTog syw 6 'jEXXocg eifii, did 
 6 noXspog a . Isocr. 
 
 Msza 6 (546) XaXxi- 
 dsvg &dvaiog, xcu 6 (534) 
 iv MlXtjTog fioi^Vy o IleXo- 
 7iovvv\GLog vnonxog sifu. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 e O fivgaa ova tlpl oldtjoog 
 (§ 24.) T^tjjog, ovds Xl&og 
 (§ 24.), nnpdco M - PA ^- d , 
 ovdsvXr) (§24.). Theocr. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 79 
 
 b. 'o avzog, the same, governs the dative. 
 
 697. You were both born si xal cpvfxi sa iv 6 avzog iyw 
 
 and educated in the same xojga, xal zgecpa *- sa . Xen. 
 country as we. 
 
 698. We are indignant, Idyaraxzea, u [ir\ 6 avzog exti~ 
 
 if we have not the same 
 honor as they. 
 
 699. He drank both when 
 he was prcetor and when he 
 was consul the same wine as 
 his laborers. 
 
 vog Tiftrj ego). 
 
 Isocr. 
 
 Illv(x) sa 8s xal ozgaT^yt(o FS xal 
 vnatsva)** 6 avzog oirog 
 6 egyaTtjg. Plut. 
 
 c. Many adjectives which usually govern the dative, 
 are sometimes found with the genitive. 
 
 700. This thing indeed is 
 common both to the Greeks 
 and to the barbarians. 
 
 701. Hesiod also has as- 
 serted things similar to these 
 of Minos. 
 
 702. For many genera- 
 tions they were obedient to 
 tin' hi ws, 
 
 703. lie answered that 
 they .said the contrary things 
 to that which was expedient. 
 
 701. Whosoever blas- 
 phemes against the holy 
 spirit, is in danger of ever^ 
 las t in g p a n ishment. 
 
 Koivbg drj ovzog, xal 6 "EXXyv, 
 
 y.al 6 '^dg6aqog sifd. Stra- 
 
 bo. 
 3 £ge(a p (5c xal 'llolodog adsX- 
 
 (fbg ovzog elg 6 Mh'otg. 
 
 Plato. 
 'j;nl noivg ytvta* xazi'jxoog 
 
 rifd b vofxog. Plato. 
 
 'Anoy.(jii'OfxuL^ a ott 6 ivavzioq 
 Uym °- pr b avpysQG) PA> P r . 
 Xen. 
 
 "Og d' av fiXao(f)7][Atb)' ,u S a elg 
 6 nv&fUt 6 ay log (535), 
 \vo%og ft/ii aiotviog xQiaig. 
 N. Test. 
 
80 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 705. These things are ofcog 6 dya&6v dpi (§ 20.) 
 related to good more than ^Uov ? o favn Svyyeris. 
 to pleasure. Plato. 
 
 706. I think myself to 'Hytofiat opodovXog (§ 14.) 
 be a fellow-servant of the dpi (§ 13., b.) 6 xvxvog, 
 swans, and sacred to the xal U Qog fi a ^ r6? # e6? 
 same god. ( 6 26). Plato. 
 
 XXX. Etjil and yiyvo[iai, signifying posses- 
 sion, property, or duty, "govern the genitive. 
 Grammar, Rule XVII. 
 
 707. These things are 
 the part of a noble and 
 good citizen. 
 
 708. And these things 
 he did, thinking it to be 
 the part of a good man to 
 benefit his friends. 
 
 709. This plain belonged 
 once to the Chorasmians, 
 but since the Persians have 
 the sway, it belongs to the 
 king. 
 
 710. All the goods of 
 those who are conquered 
 become the property of those 
 who conquer. 
 
 711. Let us kill him, 
 that the inheritance may be 
 ours. 
 
 Ovxog tifu (§ 26.) yevvouog 
 xal dya&og noMirig. De- 
 mosth. 
 
 Kal ovxog noi£a) im P, yyiopai 
 up} avTjg dya&og (oyeXia 
 o cplXog. Lysias. 
 
 Ovxog 6 ntdlov upl /usv note 
 Xogdofiiog, enel ds llioorjg 
 tya 6 xgdxog, lipl o (laoi- 
 Xsvg. Herodot. 
 
 ndg o (546) o vixdu p -* A # r 
 dya&ov 6 vixdu *•**•& 
 ytyvofiai (§ 26.). Plato. 
 
 Anoxxdvu * V -P r avxbg, Xva iyu 
 
 yiyvopcu 8 
 N. Test. 
 
 o xXijgovofjua. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 81 
 
 a. The neuters t \u6r, o6v, &tc. are used in this 
 sense, instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns, 
 
 iflOV, GOV, &/C. 
 
 712. It should be yours to 'TpiTtoog av sl{xl° navco, xa\ 
 stop, and to cure such things. idouou 6 totovzog. Lucian. 
 
 713. It is my duty and 3 Epog a ( u* xaX 6 aXXog epilog 
 that of thy other friends toiovtoq xul Xeya xal 
 both to say and to write yqdepw. Isocr. 
 
 such things. 
 
 XXXI. Verbs of remembering, forgetting, 
 beginning, ceasing, desiring, ruling, &,c., govern 
 the genitive. Grammar, Rule XVIII. 
 
 714. Thou seemest to be 
 jealous, and to remember 
 Semele. 
 
 715. And the decree of 
 Philocrates he remembers ; 
 but the letter, which he sent 
 to you, when he was be- 
 sieging Amphipolis, he has 
 
 forgotten. 
 
 716. For I should not 
 speak, if I were not greatly 
 solicitous for all Greece. 
 
 111. I neglect myself, and 
 manage the affairs of the 
 Athenians. 
 
 718. Thou showost sufli- 
 ciently, that thou never be- 
 ttotoedst any care upon the 
 young. 
 
 J£u inL^TjloTVTiia) el'xw M -P, xul 
 6 ^sfiiX-n fivT)[tovsv(o. Lu- 
 cian. 
 
 Kat 6 (546) fxsv (InXo- 
 xgartjg iprjquo t ua [ivrio- 
 jxat, F -P ' 6 ds imaroXt), og 
 noog au a 7i£[i7i(of a , oV 
 ^fxcplnoXig noXiogxew iv 'P, 
 imXavOdvw *-P. Demosth. 
 
 Ov yitQ uv Xiyw im P, el fir] 
 (xtyuXo)g xr t 8(a u ' im P avvdnag 
 6 c £Xld$. Herodot. 
 
 Eftavzov (uiv tl/.ieXto), 6 no-p 
 (§ 21., c.) ? 'jld-rjvcuog 
 
 TTOItTlbl. PlatO. 
 
 fxuruig t'mdelxri'iAt,™, art, ov- 
 dsnojTioJS <pnoi>ii'C l <j}f a o vt- 
 Of*. Plato. 
 
82 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 719. They were neglectful 
 of the truth in their narra- 
 tions, but they cared not 
 least for both diction and 
 euphony. 
 
 720. I admire thee, that 
 thou preferredst not to pos- 
 sess treasures of silver and 
 gold rather than of wisdom. 
 
 721. I wonder at the 
 commanders, that they en- 
 deavour not to supply pro- 
 vision for the journey. 
 
 722. They say that thou 
 honorest those who flatter, 
 and despisest those who ad- 
 vise. 
 
 723. The private person 
 desires a house, or a farm, 
 or a servant ; but the kin or, 
 either cities, or much terri- 
 tory, or harbours, or strong 
 citadels. 
 
 724. That thou mayest 
 seem to desire justice, not 
 on account of weakness, 
 but on account of reason- 
 ableness. 
 
 725. And these things 
 were those whicl most he 
 desired. 
 
 726. Greatly indeed, said 
 he, O Socrates, do I want 
 
 \ 
 
 O (isv aX^&sia iv o occpyyrjoig 
 ohycoQi(of a , ovx rjxioxa ds 
 srii/xeXsoficci v f a cpodoig xs 
 xal svqxtivla. Herodian. 
 
 Ayu-iLa.1 ov, dioxi, ovx ugyvqiov 
 xal xqvoIov nQoaigia u ' sa 
 &7]oavg6g xxdopcci *•? fidXXov 
 y oocpla. Xen. 
 
 Oav^dl^tx) 6 OTpcmiyog, on ov 
 nsipdco M ixnogl^w oixrjgs- 
 olov. Xen. 
 
 uisyco wg ov 6 fisv xoXaxsvco PA 
 Ti^ida, 6 ds ovfi6ovXsva r * 
 xaxa<pgovd(». Isocr. 
 
 O [isv IdicoTrjg olxla, ij aygog, 
 rj olxixrig im&vfiiw • 6 ds 
 xvgavvog, % noXig, % xugct 
 noXvg, jj Xifirjv, j$ dxgonoXig 
 ioxvoog. Xen. 
 
 "iva doxsw av ogiyon M 6 dixotio- 
 ovvt}, pi) di' do&svsia*, 
 ctXXoc di inttlxsia* . Isocr. 
 
 Kal ovxog si/il (§ 26.) og 
 (uxXlotcc yXlxoiiou im P. De- 
 mosth. 
 
 Zcpodga ye, (prjjul sa , w 2mxgd- 
 rt]g v , ovxog 6 dgsxT] diopai. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 83 
 
 
 this virtue. By Jupiter, said 
 Socrates, thou desirest the 
 noblest virtue and greatest 
 art. 
 
 727. Hector. Assign a re- 
 compense, except my king- 
 dom. Dolon. We desire not 
 thy kingdom. 
 
 728. I perceive also some 
 kings, who so vehemently 
 covet riches, that they do 
 much baser things than 
 those who are most needy. 
 
 729. For through us they 
 both live, and enjoy their 
 present goods. 
 
 730. The city was not 
 full of law-suits, nor of ac- 
 cusations, nor of exactions, 
 nor of poverty, nor of 
 wars. 
 
 731. He abounds with 
 flatterers, but is in want 
 
 of friends. 
 
 '<:\2. If therefore thou 
 necdest a master, thou art 
 not yet v> 
 
 733. But if you seem still 
 to need any thing, speak to 
 me ; for with the assistance 
 of the gods we shall be in 
 want of nothing, 
 
 734. We want not food 
 with thee, but a habitation. 
 
 Ni) Zivg (§ 8., d.), wnl 3 * 
 6 £(oy.guTr t g, 6 xaXog agsrr) 
 y.ul fjsyag i<f>lrifii M t£%vt). 
 Xen. 
 
 "E h t w g . Taooa u -f a -* ds /«- 
 o&og, nXrjv i/uog rvguvvlg 
 (§8.). A 6 X a v . Ov oog 
 fouoi Tvqavvlg. Eurip. 
 
 Alo&dvofiat 8s xal xvgavvog 
 ilg, og ovtwg av nsivdo) 
 Xgijfia, oioxs noisca tcoXv 
 detrog 6 dnogog (§ 28.). 
 Xen. 
 
 Aid ydg (yd) a xal £««, xal o 
 vndg%(o PA aya&bv ano- 
 Xava. Isocr. 
 
 Ov dlxrj, ovds syxX^/ua, ovd 
 uocpogd, ovds ntvltx, ovde 
 noXsfxog 6 noXig ysfito imp . 
 Isocr. 
 
 KoXu$ /usv svnogiw, cplXog da 
 
 onuvl£b). Polyb. 
 \ 
 El 8 ugee ov diddoxccXog dio- 
 
 fj.nL, bvnoj cpgovto). Plato. 
 
 El 8s t/,- Ire ivdiofica Soxifo, 
 nobs iyk a Xiyat ' ovv ydg 
 &t6g ovbug unogiw. Xen. 
 
 Ov%i xgoyrj Tiagu ov d xgt'i&, 
 uXXd fiovt'i. Lucil. 
 
84 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 735. They begged of me 
 and advised not to leave 
 the oration half finished. 
 
 736. He entreated the 
 Athenians to come to them. 
 
 737. These I touched 
 not, but I laid hold of the 
 youth. 
 
 738. With his left hand 
 he laid hold of this cloak, 
 and said, We shall not dis- 
 miss thee. 
 
 739. Cease from trem- 
 bling, and let go of my 
 robes. 
 
 740. To obtain health, 
 and strength of body, and 
 honor in the state, and good- 
 will among friends, and in 
 war honorable safety, and 
 wealth honorably increasing. 
 
 741. He is happy, who 
 has obtained both these 
 things. 
 
 742. You shall receive 
 hospitable presents, such as 
 my house conceals. 
 
 743. The Rhodians used 
 their slings, and the archers 
 imitating the Scythians shot 
 their arrows, and no one 
 missed a man. 
 
 /Hopai im P iyw xal ov^6ov- 
 Xsva il7l P py xotTodslna) INF - 5a 
 6 Xoyog riixuhlrfi. Isocr. 
 
 X^w %m P 6 3 A&r\vauoq ngoa- 
 
 X(OQS(0 1SF -f a TlQOq eOCVTOV*. 
 
 Herodot. 
 Ovvog pev ov% anna w - im P, q 
 peiqdxiov d' emXapSa- 
 voj udm P. Lysias. 
 
 'O aQioTSQa (§ 24.) dvxiXap- 
 6dvto* l - sa tq16cjv omog xal 
 enca , Oux ayirjpi av. 
 Plato. 
 
 Tgofiog navoo u -f a -P } xal p e - 
 dirini M - sa -P ipog nenXog. 
 Eurip. 
 
 'Tyleia xvyxavw, xal guprj 
 aupa, xal Tifirj ev noXig, 
 xal evvoia ev <plXog, xal ev 
 noXsfiog xaXbg ocoTrjola, xal 
 TtXovxog xaXoog av£(o M>PA . 
 Xen. 
 
 J ' OX6tog (el/nl), og ovxog dpcpo- 
 xeqog Xayxdv(a sa . Theog. 
 
 Siviov xvgew, olog (514) ipog 
 xev&eo do/.iog. Eurip. 
 
 e O c Podiog oysvdovdaf", xal o 
 2xv&0T0$6irjg To$ev(o fa , xal 
 ovdelg dfiagTayco im P dvrig. 
 Xen. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 85 
 
 744. He made the engage- 
 ment thus, and he ivas not 
 disappointed of his hope. 
 
 745. But now, as we set 
 out, let us go, and let us hear 
 the man. 
 
 746. We beg therefore of 
 you with benevolence to hear 
 the things which are said. 
 
 747. The Atlas is said 
 with its tops to toueh the 
 heaven. 
 
 748. The thousand ta- 
 lents, which during the whole 
 war they desired not to 
 touch. 
 
 749. They will be quick- 
 scented, if they smell the 
 hare in places bare, dry, 
 sunny. 
 
 750. Few of them in the 
 evening tasted of food, and 
 few kindled fires. 
 
 751. But when he heard 
 a shout, he leaped upon his 
 horse, as if being frantic. 
 
 75*2. And he began his 
 defence somehow thus. 
 
 753. It is just that thou 
 thouldst lead the inquiry ; 
 for thou also beginncst the 
 conference. 
 
 8 
 
 c O avix6oXrj ovtoj noiico M '^ a , 
 xeu ov ipsvdo) p J a o IXnig, 
 Xen. 
 
 elfxi 3V -* a , v.ai dxovco 8V ' fa 6 
 dvriq. Plato. 
 
 Ako\uu ovv ai) (xtx svvoia s 
 dy.godofiat, IITF -/ a o A«- 
 yo) "A.pr t Isocr. 
 
 °0 ds "Alias Xje/co 6 xo^i/qpij 
 (§24.) yaw 6 ovqavog. 
 Pausan. 
 
 c O x'lUol tocXuvtov, og diu nag 
 6 noXs^iog g yXl%o[xai tmp (jLr\ 
 amu*f a . Thucyd. 
 
 Evgiv tip}, idv o Xaycog 
 oocpgaivofiai (§ 11., e.) iv 
 Tonog ipiXog, ^r]Qog, ngooq- 
 Xiog. Xen. 
 
 OXiyog fiev aviog tig 6 wnsQCt 
 oItov ysvofiui f a , oXlyog 8s 
 tivq xulb)f a . Xen. 
 
 fig <5 alo&uvouai sa y.Quv/T], 
 uvujtr}du(tif a inl 6 innog*, 
 ojutcsq ivfrovaidh) PA * Xen. 
 
 Kul o anoXoyiu wde nug 
 ug%(o M - im P. Xen. 
 
 AUaiog m (454) .£fd****V** 
 ov n nyiofUu in *'t* 6 oxe- 
 
 yjig ' ov ydq xul x«t«^w 4 
 o Xoyog. Plato. 
 
86 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 754. But come, cease from 
 contention , nor draw thy 
 sword with thy hand. 
 
 755. They desired to de- 
 sist from the war. 
 
 756. Cadmus reigned over 
 Thebes; the Carians inhab- 
 ited the islands ; and Pelops 
 was master of all Pelopon- 
 nesus. 
 
 757. O woman, said he, 
 the Athenians rule the 
 Greeks; I, the Athenians; 
 thou, me ; thy son, thee. 
 
 758. He had married the 
 daughter of Theagenes, who 
 at that time was tyrant of 
 Megara. 
 
 759. Suffer Orestes to 
 possess Argos ; and do thou 
 having come reign over the 
 Spartan land. 
 
 760. They were masters 
 of all the baggage, and of 
 the provision of those who 
 were besieged. 
 
 761. He ordered Clearchus 
 to command the right wing ; 
 and Menon, the left. 
 
 762. No one of the Greeks 
 shall ever be master over him. 
 
 763. In the labors he sur- 
 
 AXX a/a 3 , fa'iya i'gig, fur t ds 
 Uyog sXxco M x^io ( § 24.). 
 Horn. 
 
 £m&vps(of a navco M -^ a 6 no- 
 Xsfiog. Xen. 
 
 Kadfiog ds Or\6cu fiaoiXsvco f a ' 
 Kag ds 6 vrjaog y.ccToixsco tm P ' 
 UsXoTtovvTjaog ds avfiTiag 
 IlsXoyj xQaTsa>f a . Isocr. 
 
 'Jl yvvr\ y , s7i(o sa , 'A&rjvaiog 
 [xtv aQ%(a o "jZXXrjv ' syco ds, 
 A&t]va7og ' syu ds, av ' av 
 ds, o vlog. Plut. 
 
 Tausoj ds fivydnig Oeaysvrjg, 
 og xar sxslvog 6 xgovog a 
 Tvgavvsw im P Msyaqa. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 Aoyog d Ogiar^g sd(o a xga- 
 
 TS(ti • SQXO[l(U A - p A.«J fe 
 
 ccvdooG) 2foagTi(XTig. ^wr. 
 Eurip. 
 
 KVQUV(x)f a ds O (XTTOOXSVT} 
 
 omag, xal 6 (546) 6 no- 
 Xioqxsco p -r±-pr nagaoxsvri. 
 Polyb. 
 
 KsXsvw im P KXsaqxog* fisv 6 
 ds$t6g xs'gag ijysofica ' Ms- 
 vojv a ds, 6 svuvvfxog. Xen. 
 
 Ovdslg Axaibg ods dsanofa 
 
 nors. Eurip. 
 c O novog (§ 24.) ov fiovov (ya 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. 
 
 87 
 
 passed not only me, but also 
 all the others. 
 
 764. Thou art foolish, if 
 thou thinkest that your valor 
 can prevail over the power 
 of the king. 
 
 765. In these dangers 
 Achilles excelled all, and 
 Ajax after him was the most 
 valiant. 
 
 766. The mountains are 
 not inferior to the Ta'ygetus 
 in height. 
 
 767. The fine flax in Elis 
 in respect of tenuity is not 
 inferior to that of the He- 
 brews, but it is not equally 
 yellow. 
 
 768. They are not the 
 first of those who are second, 
 but they take the lead of 
 chiefs. 
 
 769. The Athenians sailed 
 to ^Egina ; and they were 
 later by one day than that 
 agreed upon. 
 
 770. Cease therefore from 
 these things ; for I hear that 
 gods have been overcome by 
 love. 
 
 111. Neither will he ab- 
 
 7regleiui imp , u).Xa xal o 
 a/log uTiug. Plato. 
 
 Avor^og elul, el ol'oficu av 
 (3S0) 6 vuexegog agnr, a 
 negiylyvouai iyr - sa & (546) 
 ftuodevg dvvafiig. Xen. 
 
 Ev ovxog o xtvdvvog A/dlevg 
 [.lev uJiag dia(pegai^ a , Al'ag 
 5e fieT exelvog a agioxevco-f a . 
 Isocr. 
 
 c O ogog ov folnco* (§26.) 
 6 Tavyexog xaxa vyog a . 
 Strabo. 
 
 e O de fivooog 6 (537) ev o 
 '/Dug Xenxoxqg S fiiv elvexa 
 ova anodeoj 6 S ' 3 ' { c E6galog, 
 elfil de ov% ofiolag $av&6g. 
 Pausan. 
 
 Ov devxegog ngwxevw, aXX 
 r t ye(x(i)v iiyepovevb). Xen. 
 
 e O A&r t va7og nXeio im P inl 6 
 Ai'yiva a * xal voxegi^ia^ 
 Tjuega (§ 28., d.) elg 6 
 ovyxeifxuL rxf . Herodot. 
 
 Jluvb) M ••^ , • , ovv ovxog ' e'yco 
 vug &ebg* axoi'io eg(og 
 Tjoodofiai p>IIfr P. Xen. 
 
 Ovxe jig cpovog dewog ani- 
 
88 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 stain from any horrid slaugh- 
 ter, nor food, nor deed. 
 
 772. Nemausus is distant 
 from the Rhone about a hun- 
 dred stadia. 
 
 773. After this thought 
 immediately he tried the 
 oracles. 
 
 774. He spared not his 
 own son, but delivered him 
 up for us all. 
 
 775. So far indeed as this 
 I know not if the royal life 
 rliffers in any thing from the 
 private life. 
 
 776. He begets Pelops, 
 of him Atreus was born. 
 
 777. Eumenes is believed 
 to have been born of an indi- 
 gent father. 
 
 778. He will hold to one, 
 and will despise the other. 
 
 779. If therefore we are 
 wise, we shall keep hold of 
 him. 
 
 780. Again he aimed at 
 the lad, and said, Euthyde- 
 mus deceives thee. * 
 
 781. 1 beseech you, breth- 
 ren, suffer the word of exhor- 
 tation. 
 
 %o) v-ff, ovxs figwpa, ovxs 
 sgyov. Plato. ._, 
 /Jdxco ds 6 Ns^iavoog { 6 c Po- 
 davbg nsgl sxaxbv oxddtog*. 
 Strabo. 
 
 Msxcc o dtdvota ovxog avxUa 
 CtTXOTXEtgdcO ™- im P o {tavxsiov. 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 I'd tog vlbg ov cpsldofj.ai^ a , 
 aXX vnsg eycb § nag naga- 
 dld(0}itf a avxog. N. Test. 
 
 Mixgt ys ovxog (§8.) ovx 
 sl'da"* h riff (§24.) dia- 
 q>sgca o xvgavvtxbg /5/off o 
 tdtcaxixbg filog. Xen. 
 
 Ovxog yvxevco UiXoip, ods 
 'Axgevg (pvy,t A - sa . Eurip. 
 
 Ev[xivrig naxr\g anogog m- 
 oxevco F 'P ylyvo t uai ™ r - sa . 
 iElian. 
 
 Elg uvxixco M «#j xal 6 sxsgog 
 xaxcccpgovea. N. Test. 
 
 "Hv ovv oacpgoviw BV , e'x<o M Sf 
 avxog. Xen. 
 
 JldXiv oxoxdi&tACtt im P 6 flSlQa- 
 xtov, teal ETxoj sa , E^anaxdoa 
 ov Ev&vdrj/xog. Plato. 
 
 UagaxaXsa) ds ov, ddsXqpbg, 
 avs/a M 6 Xoyog 6 nagdxXt]- 
 otg. N. Test. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 89 
 
 XXXII. Transitive verbs govern the geni- 
 tive, when the action does not affect the whole 
 of any thing, but a part only. Grammar, Rule 
 XIX. 
 
 782. Pour in then a liba- 
 tion, and bring hither of the 
 entrails. 
 
 783. When he prostrates 
 his first man, he drinks of 
 his blood. 
 
 784. Then I ate not beans, 
 for I philosophized ; but now 
 I would eat. 
 
 785. They say that the 
 priestess at Delphi, after she 
 drinks of the sacred foun- 
 tain, immediately becomes 
 divinely inspired. 
 
 *EyyJoi s 8r\ onovdrj, xal 6 
 onkayyvov cpsQio B devgl. 
 Aristoph. 
 
 3 JLnuv 6 ngwiog ctvrjg xctTCt- 
 6u).).(o av,sa , 6 alfia ifinboj. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Tote per uvx ia&l(o tmp 6 v.va- 
 pog, cpdoaocpeo) im P yag ' vvv 
 de cpuyw °- sa av. Lucian. 
 
 <I>r Jh ul iv /ItXcpol o ngofictvng a , 
 enetduv nlrco su ' sa 6 legog 
 vafxu, evdsog evdvg yiyvo- 
 
 fxai 
 
 ,NF . Lucian. 
 
 XXXIII. Any verb may govern the dative in 
 Greek, which has the sign to or for after it in 
 English. Grammar, Rule XX. 
 
 786. Not a galley was lost Ov Toi^gr,g unoXXvw u - 3a 6 no- 
 to the state. hg. Demosth. 
 
 787. The Volcce are near *0 Ovo)).xr,g yuxovtvo) 6 ' Po- 
 to the Rhone. duvog. Strabo. 
 
 788. The mariners tilled € vavirjg yiwgyio) im P 6 Kbq- 
 the ground for the Corcyrce- xvoctlog. Xen. 
 
 ans. 
 
 8* 
 
90 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 789. These slaves are 
 present, labor not thou for 
 me. 
 
 790. Each of us is not 
 born for himself alone. 
 
 791. Paul standing on the 
 stairs beckoned with his hand 
 to the people. 
 
 Aovlr{ itagMfii ods, (if) ov iyw 
 Eurip. 
 
 TtOVSOJ. 
 
 JwaoTog eyta ov% avzov fiovog 
 ylyvopai m -p. Plato. 
 
 *0 UavXog Xorrifju *■•**■* inl 
 6 ava6cc&p6g S xuTaosl(of a 
 6 x^Q ( § 24.) o Xaog. 
 N. Test. 
 
 a, Ei(i\ t ylyvofiaiy and ojik'^w, in the sense of l^w, 
 to have, govern the dative. 
 
 792. And where, said Cy- Kal nov, (pypl™ o Kvgog, 
 rus, hast thou this wealth 1 dpi 3d P ers - 9 ov d ovrog 6 
 
 ovala n / Xen. 
 
 793. I by no means have 3 £yw di 7ig6g ovtog* ovdapwg 
 leisure for these things. dpi o^oXtj. Plato. 
 
 794. He promised, if they c rmoxvsopcti im P, si dux6al- 
 would pass over, that the sol- vco A -°- sa , pio&ocpoga a 
 
 diers should have pay. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 NF.// 
 
 GlQaTlWTTjg. 
 
 795. After a trophy was 'EtieI ds rgonaiov ts iottj/m *& 
 raised, and Teleutias had xal 6 vUr\ ovxog 6 TsXsvTlag 
 gained this victory, depart- ylyvopai F -P l , aneipi PA - sa 
 ing then he cut down the 8] xotttw ™p 6 dsvdgov. 
 trees. Xen. 
 
 796. For a war we have Ilgog noXspog 3 - noXvg <pvoig 
 by nature many advantages. (§ 24.) nXsovtxxripa iym 
 
 vttcxqxw (§ 26.). Demosth. 
 
 797. We all should perish nag av vno Xipbg * anoX- 
 through hunger ; for we have Xvco M -°- sa • vjidgxw yag vvp 
 now not one of the necessa- iy<a ovdslg 6 imzjdeiov. 
 ries. Xen. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 91 
 
 798. Leave me, cares, Me&lr h ui sa e'yw, cpgovzlg, ^- 
 
 let me have nothing to do 
 
 <5ac ne iyu d v.cti ov 
 
 with you. 
 
 a ^iM.3d P ers. # Anacr. 
 
 b. Many verbs compounded with 6fiov, or with 
 prepositions, often govern the dative. 
 
 799. If you shall not El ,u?} nifxna), inlora^ai iyw a 
 send, know that we shall 6 t uoXoyia inr ^ (§ 13.) o 
 enter into a league with flegoyg. Herodot. 
 
 the Persian. 
 
 800. For neither do they Ovis yug ailrjlwy o[xo<pgovi<o, 
 agree with each other, nor oi't' It* av&LoTrmi **••#" ov. 
 will they longer resist you. Herodot. 
 
 801. The body wasted c O oo\ua ov paQulvat M - im P, aD? 
 not, but resisted beyond avxiyw im P ttuqu do£« a 6 
 expectation the torment. TaXainiagia. Thucyd. 
 
 802. And at break of day Kal apa og&gog (§ 8., c.) 
 he falls upon the Ambraciots htmlTttxa 6 'AfmgaitiaTrjg 
 yet in their beds. Xxi tv 6 ivviq. Thucyd. , 
 
 803. They dwell in small Kara ds fiixgog nohofxa a 
 cities; and the majority or/.ii» ' v.ul 6 nXuav* ngoo- 
 
 joincd Brasidas. yo)guo^ a 6 Bguoidug. Thu- 
 
 cyd. 
 
 c. Verbs govern the dative, which signify to order, 
 to exhort, to obey, to disobey, to reproach, to threaten, 
 to be angry, to assist, to profit, to hurt, to contend, 
 to serve, to approach, to meet, to follow, to pray, 
 to converse, to use, to trust, to associate, to befit, 
 to be like, with several others of difFerent significations. 
 
 804. lie arch rid tin. mul- KtXtv'u)f a 6 oxlog uvani- 
 titudes to sit down upon the titoj l " F - sa inl 6 yij*. N. 
 ground. Test. 
 
92 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 805. He did as the angel 
 of the Lord commanded Mm. 
 
 806. I often exhort thee 
 concerning the same things. 
 
 807. He feared, lest some 
 one of the Ionians might 
 admonish the Greeks. 
 
 808. He perished, and 
 all, whoever obeyed him, 
 were dispersed. 
 
 809. He commands the 
 winds, and the water, and 
 they obey him. 
 
 810. They knew that to 
 obey Cyrus honorably was 
 more profitable than their 
 gain per month. 
 
 811. They command them 
 not to steal, not to rob, not 
 to enter into a house by 
 force, not to strike whom 
 (it is) not just (to strike), 
 not to commit adultery, not 
 to disobey a magistrate. 
 
 812. He commanded those 
 who spoke before the people 
 not to censure the peace. 
 
 813. They dared to re- 
 proach me, saying that I 
 undertake absurd and ex- 
 ceedingly foolish things. 
 
 814. Those who wish to 
 
 IIoii(>/ a wg ii()o<na(JG(of a avxog 
 
 6 ayyeXog Kvgiog. N. Test. 
 HoXXdxig av diaxeXevofiai txsqI 
 
 6 avxog s . Isocr. 
 dsldco f a , fir) Tig 6 "l<ovsg vno- 
 
 tl&rjizi"-™-™ 6 "EXXtjv. 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 AtxoXXvco M ' sa , not nag, oaog 
 nu&b) u ' im P avxog, diaoxog- 
 ■ nl'Cbi P A N. Test. 
 
 c O avsfiog inixdaaoi teal 6 vdcog, 
 Hal vnaxova avxog. N. 
 Test. 
 
 riyvwoxw f a xegdaXiog (§ 15.) 
 U(il INF Kvgog xaXojg nzi- 
 &uqx£o3 INF , rj 6 y.axa [ir)v a 
 xsgdog. Xen. 
 
 Enixdxxw avxog (xr) xXenxco, 
 (xi) a(j7ia£<a, fir) fiia (§ 24.) 
 slg olxia TiagirjfiL, fir) nodo) 
 og (§ 20., b.) fir) dlxaiog 
 (§ 15.) (slfil 7tal(o), fir) 
 [XOIXEVOJ, fir) ansi&sa uqx^v. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 KeXsvoi f a 6 Xeya PA,a iv 6 drj- 
 fiog 6 eIqi]V7] fir) imxifidto 
 (§ 13.). Demosth. 
 
 ToXfidtof* ininXr\xxia^ a iya>, 
 Xiy<a a>g axonog xal Xlav 
 dvorjxog tm%£iQso) ngayfia 
 (§ 33., &.). Isocr. 
 
 &i}(u iya) & ooqpog (§ 14.) 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 93 
 
 reproach you will say that 
 1 am wise, if even I am 
 not. 
 
 815. If we should en- 
 deavour to cause thee to 
 weep, greatly wouldst thou 
 complain of us. 
 
 816. You neither accuse 
 him, nor think yourselves 
 to be injured. 
 
 817. They threatened the 
 gate-keepers, because they 
 admitted them. 
 
 818. To me indeed, O 
 men, you seem not justly to 
 be angry icith this man. 
 
 819. They were irritated 
 at the Eleans, because they 
 
 made an alliance with the 
 Athenians. 
 
 820. If he discovers that 
 thou pursuedst, he will re- 
 primand not only thee, but 
 also me, because I suffered 
 thee. 
 
 821. She having come 
 worshipped him, saying ; 
 Lord, help me. 
 
 822. You know you shall 
 fight in conjunction with 
 those who are willing to 
 assist their allies. 
 
 Ufa INF (§ 13.), u xal pi] 
 Ufu, 6 (jovkoficti * A ' pr ai) 
 6veidl£(o. Plato. 
 El ye xXalco neigaco M - IIf - im P ov 
 noiiw, ocpodga uv eyot pep- 
 (popou ™- im P. Xen. 
 
 Ovt iyXaXeu) avTog, ov& 
 - 7\yio[iai adixew (§ 13., &.). 
 Demosth. 
 
 c O nvXwgbg aneiXeca mp , oti ov 
 nagtrini fa . Herodot. 
 
 Eyd h&vtoi, to avrjQ, ov dixcd* 
 (oq ye doxeco 6 avJjQ ovxoq 
 XaXenalvco. Xen. 
 
 3 0Qyl£a"- im P 6 'HXuoq, oti, 
 noiioi M ^ a t-vfifiaxlct ngog 
 3 A&r)vaiog a . Xen. 
 
 n Hv alod-avo(iai ta - sa on dioi- 
 xco imp , ov oif fiovov, aXXa 
 xal iyw Xoidog&o) M -^, oti 
 ai) ici(o im P. Xen. 
 
 > 'Egxo i ucu A ' FA ''" 1 ngoaxvvioi im P 
 avxbg, Xiya ' Kvgiog v , 
 (iori&iw iym. N. Test. 
 
 "lOTjllt, OTI |U6T« #£/lw PA SP O 
 
 ovfu/uaxog ugriyw {iuxo[xai 5 ^. 
 Xen. 
 
94 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 823. Help therefore the 
 law of the Greeks, trans- 
 gressed by these men. 
 
 824. He there aided the 
 friendly cities, if any one 
 needed any thing, and made 
 war upon the Thyrians. 
 
 825. To the people, these 
 things were useful ; but to 
 those who spoke, they were 
 not profitable. 
 
 826. For if I yet pleased 
 men, I should not be a ser- 
 vant of Christ. 
 
 827. With former men I 
 shall not be willing to con- 
 tend. 
 
 828. Observedst thou 
 never also one man under- 
 taking through fool-hardi- 
 ness to fight a mightier 
 than himself? 
 
 829. The Corinthians on 
 account of certain private 
 differences made icar upon 
 the Athenians. 
 
 830. Theoclymenus. Wilt 
 thou that I myself assisting 
 send out the fleet 1 Helen. 
 By no means ; be not a ser- 
 vant to thy servants. 
 
 U{xvrtof a -P ovv b (546) o 
 EXXyv vopog vnb bds° 
 TKxgaSalva) f, - FA / a . Thucyd. 
 
 East o fjev cplXiog noXig sin- 
 novate* im P, u rig t< ? (732) 
 deo^m °-P r , Ovgisvg ds no- 
 Xe{itw im P. Xen. 
 
 c O fisv dijfiog, ovrog ovp- 
 (f£QC0 im P (§26.)- o ds 
 Xiyw * A -P r , ov XvonsXio) im P 
 (§26.). Demosth. 
 
 El yao %xl av&Qwnog ags- 
 ox(ti im P, Xgiorbg doi'Xog 
 ovx up tlfxi M - IN -"»i>. N. 
 Test. 
 
 Avtjq ds TtQOTSQOg eglfa ovx 
 i&sXco. Horn. 
 
 Ovtmo alo&dvo(icu sa xal sig 
 ccvrjQ a di 3 aqigoovvT] S im- 
 Xuqito xqsIitwv saviov 
 (§ 28.) [Mxxoficu ; Xen, 
 
 Kogiv&iog 7iols[jii(t}f a Xdiog xtc 
 diayoga % svsxoc 6 'a&tj- 
 vouog. Thucyd. 
 
 O so xXvfisv og. BovXoficci. 
 £vvfgyt(o avTog exntfi- 
 ncu 3V ' fa aioXog ; 'EXsvy. 
 Hxiotcc . fiTj dovXsva) obg 
 dovXog. Eurip. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 
 
 95 
 
 831. They shall come 
 forth, and shall serve me in 
 this place. 
 
 832. Say, from what 
 country do you draw near 
 to the Grecian houses ? 
 
 833. But when he now 
 approached the palace, Arta- 
 banus met him in the plain. 
 
 834. The horsemen meet 
 with ambassadors travelling 
 somewhither. 
 
 835. They take five hun- 
 dred beasts of burden, and 
 men who followed the beasts 
 of burden. 
 
 836. If thou wilt follow 
 me with the heavy-armed 
 men, I will bring thee into 
 the citadel. 
 
 837. Who would pray to 
 such a goddess ? who on 
 account of a woman de- 
 stroyed the benefactors of 
 Greece. 
 
 838. Ulysses rejoiced at 
 the omen, and prayed to 
 Minerva. 
 
 839. On account of this 
 I converse with thee more 
 willingly than with any 
 other person. 
 
 E^iq^o^ai, xal karona) eyw 
 iv o ronog oviog. N. Test. 
 
 "lino) lM -f a -P, iit ndlog nunou. 
 'EXXrp'ixbg dulfia niXafe ; 
 Eurip. 
 
 c Jlg 5 ijdrj 6 fiuol/.tiovP nXr\- 
 cnu'Qoi vnp , 6 "AqjuGuvog 
 vnuvio[uu im P aiTog iv 6 
 ntQcov. Herodian. 
 
 c O Ijmti'g ivTvyxtxvu) 7tqsu6sv- 
 Tr t g nogsvoficu noL Xen. 
 
 slu(j.6dv(d vno'Cvyiov re nsvia- 
 y.ooioi, xal uvfrgunog bg 
 txofiai™? 6 &vyog. He- 
 rodot. 
 
 Eav uxolov&eo) BV S a iyw ovv 
 6 bnXiir t g, uoriyco ov eg o 
 uy.oonolig. Xen. 
 
 TotovTog &tbg rig av nqoatv- 
 Xoyiui °- pr ; og yvvt\ S ovvsxa 
 6 svsoyirrjg 'EXXug anoX- 
 Xvu fa . Eurip. 
 
 Xaloh) 1 '"' 7 da b oong (§24.) 
 
 'Odvousvg, u(juo^at im P d 
 
 3 Airi]vrj. Horn. 
 "Evexoc oviog s oil r t dt(og Sictle- 
 
 yofxuL (jluXXov i] liXXog rig. 
 
 Plato. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 840. But if a spirit or 
 angel spoke to him, let us 
 not fight against God. 
 
 841. They use the leaves, 
 not the branches, nor the 
 fruit. 
 
 842. Those whom the 
 king trusts, hate and make 
 war upon Philip. 
 
 843. He distrusted us 
 and the Lacedemonians, but 
 trusted Philip. 
 
 844. This Democedes, 
 having thus come from 
 Crotona, associated with 
 Polycrates. 
 
 845. But speak thou the 
 things which become sound 
 doctrine. 
 
 846. He said that a bar- 
 barian marriage befitted not 
 a Roman. 
 
 847. He that wavereth 
 is like a wave of the sea, 
 driven with the wind, and 
 tossed. 
 
 848. Those in the ship 
 having come, worshipped 
 him. 
 
 849. The citizens he ex- 
 horted to be well disposed 
 towards the Romans, and to 
 remember the favor. 
 
 El ds nvsvfia XaXso)^ a ambg, 
 i] ayysXog, pt] Ssofia^ico sv . 
 N. Test. 
 
 Xgdo^ioii ds 6 cpvXXov, ov 6 
 xXwv, ovds o xagnog. 
 Theophr. 
 
 a Og fiaaiXsvq matsixa, ovxog 
 fiiasb), xal txoXs^isoj *J>IXlti- 
 nog. Demosth. 
 
 Eyot [isv, xal Aaxsdaiy,6viog 
 artiaxsoi im P, (PlXwTiog ds 
 TiLOTsim im P. iEschin. 
 
 ds Ar}iioy.rfir\g ovxog, (ads ix 
 Kgoxtav acpixviofiou F - Pi -P, 
 HoXvxgdxrjg 6^iLXs(o^ a . He- 
 rodot. 
 
 2v ds XaXia og (§ 20., b.) 
 Ttgsnoj (§ 26.) o vyial- 
 vco FX ' pr didaoxuXla. N. 
 Test. 
 
 3>dox(o im P ov% agixo^oi IWF -J» r 
 Pwfiawg ydpog* fidg6agog, 
 Herodian. 
 
 c O diaxglv(o u - v ^P r sXxat m * 
 y.Xvdcov &dXaooa avB(ii- 
 
 N. Test. 
 c O (§ 21., c.) ds sv 6 nXolov 
 
 sQXO i uou A - rA ' sa nQOOxvviojf" 
 
 avxog. N. Test. 
 c O noXnixbg* nagccxccXiaf* 
 
 svvoito o c P(0[ialog, xal fivrj- 
 
 fxovsvca o siisgyaola (§ 31.). 
 
 Polyb. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND THE GENITIVE. 97 
 
 XXXIV. Verbs of giving way, with fxeTs%c>, 
 (i£Ta8iSco{ii, xoLvcoveco, (pdovia, and afxcpiaSrfTico, 
 govern the dative of a person, with the genitive 
 of a thing. Grammar, Rule XXII. 
 
 850. Rush on, horse-train- 
 ing Trojans, nor give way 
 from the battle to the Ar- 
 gives. 
 
 851. The river has yielded 
 to us the way into the city. 
 
 852. They rise up to me 
 now also from the seats, and 
 yield the xoays. 
 
 853. But now impart to 
 me of the fillets, that I may 
 crown his head. 
 
 854. We have shared icith 
 you also temples the most 
 venerable, and sacrifices, and 
 feasts the most splendid. 
 
 855. They share with their 
 husbands the dangers in the 
 wars. 
 
 856. Who would not envy 
 thee such a lover ? 
 
 857. They dared to con- 
 tend with the Carthaginians 
 about the sea. 
 
 "Ogvvfii M , Innodafj-og Tgug, 
 urjd' sl'xa) X^g^V 'Agyslog. 
 Horn. 
 
 nora^ibg iyw 7tagax(agi(o p 
 6 slg 6 noXig odog. Xen. 
 
 TnavLoTT}ui M ds iyco ijdrj xal 
 xrdxog, xal odog Qlaxriui M . 
 Xen. 
 
 Nvv ds iyb) usradidufiL sa ' a 
 6 Touvla, Xva dvadsco sv f a 
 6 oviog (493) xscpaXrj. 
 Plato. 
 
 Mm^w P 8s ov xal Ugbv 
 o oefxvog, xal -frvola, xal 
 eoozi] 6 xaXog. Xen. 
 
 Koivcovso) 6 avrjQ 6 iv 6 noXs- 
 fiog xivdvvog. Diod. Sic. 
 
 Tig ovx av cp&ovsoi °^ a ov 
 TOLovTog igaoj^g ; Lucian. 
 
 ToX[ido)f a dfi(pio6r}Tia) Kagxrj- 
 doviog 6 OdXaTia. Polyb. 
 
 9 
 
98 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 Verbs of reminding, 
 
 filling, empty- 
 ing, depriving, delivering, prohibiting, and re- 
 straining, govern the accusative and the genitive. 
 Grammar. Rule XXIIL 
 
 858. Whence therefore 
 wilt thou that I begin to re- 
 mind thee of agriculture 1 
 
 859. He filled Rome with 
 statues and images, in the 
 Capitol and in other tem- 
 ples. 
 
 860. He loaded all the 
 ships with both the slaves 
 and the treasures. 
 
 861. Without temperance 
 and justice, they have filled 
 the city with ports, and 
 docks, and walls, and tri- 
 butes, and such-like trifies. 
 
 862. Why, O foolish wo- 
 man, emptiest thou thy 
 hands of these things ? 
 
 863. By his rashness he 
 not only deprived himself of 
 so great a dominion, but also 
 brought those who accompa- 
 nied into extreme calami- 
 ties. 
 
 864. And wilt thou de- 
 fraud me of this second 
 corpse ? 
 
 IJO&SV OVV {3ovX()[lOU (XQ- 
 
 /o) M - su -/ ffl (ji/ o yewQ/la 
 V7io[ii{ivr}GX(0 ; Xen. 
 c O c Pcofir) 7iXrjg6cof a avdpiag 
 xal uxmv, iv 6 KannwXiov 
 xal ev aXXog Uqov. Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 ' nXolov nag y^^il'C t (i)^ a 6 xi 
 avdgdiiodov xal o /grj^a. 
 Xen. 
 
 "Avev o(x)(fQoavvi] s xal dixaio- 
 avvrj s , Xtfi-rjv, xal vmgiov, 
 xal rst^og, xal q>ogog, xal 
 ToiovTog cpXvagla, i(i7iXrj-&to 
 6 TcoXig'. Plato. 
 Tlg ao (233), a! paiaiog, ods 
 aog xsvou) x^Q i Eurip. 
 
 Aia 6 avxogZ ngonhsia*, ov 
 fiovov avrov anoaTEgso) f a 
 rr]Xixovzog dvvaartla, aXXa. 
 xal o avvaxoXov&eco FA " pr tig 
 6 Eoxaxog ovjxcpOQa xa&l- 
 
 Kal vo<j(f>l£(o eyw ode dsvTspog 
 vsxgog ; Eurip. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND THE GENITIVE. 99 
 
 865. O stranger, pity me, 
 loose me from bonds. 
 
 866. Help me, save an 
 unhappy man from ruin. 
 
 867. He delivered the city 
 from so unjust and grievous 
 a command. 
 
 863. He anchored at the 
 Piraeeus with a hundred and 
 fifty ships, and kept the ves- 
 sels from the entrance. 
 
 869. They debarred the 
 Lacedcemonians both from 
 the equestrian and from the 
 gymnic game. 
 
 870. Cleomenes having 
 returned from iEgina, .de- 
 signed to depose Demaratus 
 from the royal dignity. 
 
 ,f* 
 
 Xvo)f a f/co deouog. 
 toph. 
 
 Aris- 
 
 XgalauajV iyoo (§ 33., c), 
 fjvoj u -f a dvadj.iuo()og urrjg 
 Xvurj. Apoll. Rh. 
 
 e O Si noXtg otncag avofjLog xal 
 dsirog nooaxay^a eXzv&e- 
 q6(o f a . Isocr. 
 
 c Ooui^o) M ^ a nobg 6 Utiguievc, a 
 vavg (235) nsvtrjxovTCt xal 
 Ixaxbv, xal o nXolov £?'o- 
 yw im P o uanXooj. Xen. 
 
 Kh)Xvbj imp Aaxtdaiiioviog xal 
 6 \mtixog xal 6 yvf.ivtxbg 
 uyoov. Xen. 
 
 KXsofisvrjg de vooxiw^ a an 
 Al'yivu, ftovXevco imp 6 Ar\- 
 (jidouiog navo)f a 6 3u<jiXtla. 
 Herodot. 
 
 To these add verb3 of separating, repelling, begetting, and es- 
 teeming worthy. 
 
 871. With his spear he "j;y X og (§24.) <5' aUt Tgatg 
 continually repelled the Tro- d{Ji>voj im P vavg, oong 9 
 
 jan* from the ships, whoever 
 brought inextinguishable fire. 
 
 (§ 20., e.) (jpe'ow °P r dxcina- 
 70c 7ito. Horn. 
 
 872. We pray always for nqoosv/ofiou ndvroxs mpl 
 you, that God may count you 
 worthy of the calling. 
 
 ira au a^iuta 
 
 ivja 
 
 xX^uig 6 Oiog. N. Test. 
 
100 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 a. Some verbs frequently take the accusative of a 
 thing, with the genitive of a person or thing from which 
 it proceeds. 
 
 873. What then wishest 
 thou secondly to learn from 
 me ? 
 
 874. I should wish to. 
 gratify thee, if thou shouldst 
 request of me possible things. 
 
 875. I learn the whole 
 thing from a servant, who 
 delivered the child. 
 
 876. These things they 
 gladly heard from him, on 
 account of their then sub- 
 sisting enmity towards the 
 Thebans. 
 
 Tig ne dt]Ttt povXo{j.ai dsmsgov 
 fiav&dva) sa iyca / Eurip. 
 
 BoiiXo^iai ° av xagl&pai, av d , 
 
 si * eyco dvvaxog deopai ° . 
 
 Plato. 
 Uvv&dvofiou 6 nag Xoyog -&e- 
 
 Q(*7t(tiv, og iyxsiQl£o) f a 6 
 
 figeyog. Herodot. 
 Ovxog d aaptvag axovco tmp 
 
 avTog, dice 6 xo& vnsifii PA 
 
 otTtixdsux a ngog 6 Or}6ou- 
 
 og a . Demosth. 
 
 XXXVI. Any transitive verb may govern the 
 accusative and the dative (when, together with 
 the object of the action, we express the person 
 or thing with relation to which it is exerted). 
 Grammar, Rule XXIV. 
 
 877. Come hither, show 
 thyself to the spectators. 
 
 878. I will drag thee "to 
 the people, that thou mayest 
 give to me satisfaction. 
 
 879. If thou speakest the 
 truth, I promise to thee ten 
 talents. 
 
 Xagioj dsvgo, dsixvvco^ a aav- 
 rov o &eari]g. Aristoph. 
 
 "EXxw av ngbg 6 dfjfiog*, Xva 
 dldaipi aVmSa iya> dUrj. Aris- 
 toph. 
 
 3 £av d* aXrj&svo) av f a , vnia- 
 %vso{icci> av dixa xaXavxov. 
 Xen. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND THE DATIVE. 101 
 
 830. Having arisen, they 
 sacrifice to Bacchus a ram 
 a year old. 
 
 881. To what shaUl liken 
 the men of this generation 1 
 
 882. Tisias often despite- 
 fully throws at me the exile 
 of my father. 
 
 883. You committed to 
 him country, and children, 
 and wives, and yourselves. 
 
 884. The superfiuous tents 
 they delivered to Cyrus, that 
 the Persians might have 
 them. 
 
 885. So that even now re- 
 mains the armature, which 
 Cyrus then prepared for the 
 horsemen. 
 
 836. He leaves to the vil- 
 lage prefect his relatives, 
 except his son just coining 
 to manhood. 
 
 887. O son of Apollodo- 
 rus, how thankful to thee I 
 am that thou incitedst me to 
 come hither ! 
 
 888. Not only therefore 
 felicity, but likewise success, 
 as it seems, does science 
 impart to men in every pos- 
 session and action. 
 
 3 AvlaT7][lL PA>5a , &V(0 o Alow- 
 
 oog xgibg iriavaiog. Lon- 
 
 gus. 
 Tig ofioioco 6 av&gamog o yz- 
 
 vm ovrog ; N. Test. 
 Tiolug noXXuxig ovsidl^co eydt 
 
 6 cpvyrj 6 naxriQ. Isocr. 
 
 :> EmTgen(of a avrbg nctTglg, xul 
 nalg, xaX yvvi], xul ov uv- 
 jog. Lysias. 
 
 c O ds negioabg oxtjvtj Kvgog 
 nagadldoiui sa , tag 6 Jlig- 
 ai]g d yiyvo/uu -** (§ 33., 
 a., Ex. 795.). Xen. 
 
 "Hare xul vvv diajuivw 6 otxXl- 
 atg, og tots Kvgog b Inntvg 
 KttTaaxsv<x£otf a . Xen. 
 
 c O <5' olxirTjg xuruXunoi o xm- 
 (jdg%7]g, nXr\v b vlbg (277) 
 Sort jj6daxw PA . Xen. 
 
 y Jl nalg v 'AnoXXodwgog, wg 
 Xugig* ov t%(o on ngo- 
 igin(t}f a lyco cu<5e uyixvio- 
 pm™"*. Plato. 
 
 Ov {tovov ugu evtv^Iu, uXXot 
 xul evnguylu, wg ti'xa) U P, 
 b £moii]ur] nagixta b uv- 
 ■frgwnog iv nug xirjaig tc 
 xul ngu$ig. Plato. 
 
 U 1 
 
102 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 XXXVII. Verbs of doing, speaking, asking, 
 taking, teaching, clothing, and concealing, gov- 
 ern two accusatives, the one of a person and 
 the other of a thing. Grammar, Rule XXV. 
 
 889. What then wilt thou Tig ne di} ly<a dgdm 
 
 do to me ? wilt thou slay my 
 son ? 
 
 890. But wherefore de- 
 signs he to do us these things 1 
 
 891. None ever did the 
 Persians more injuries. 
 
 noug 
 iyoj ( § 18., b.) xaxaxtd'* 
 vca & ,- Eurip. 
 
 *Atccq duxtl ye ovtog im6ov~ 
 Xsvca noi&oj iyat ; Aristoph. 
 
 Ovdctfibg P 7rw Uigarjg xaxov 
 nXelcav EQyd£opaif a . He* 
 rodot. 
 
 892. Lamachus. What Adfiaxog. Tlg nB d* snjof* 
 saidst thou of us? Wilt iyd s ovx sfya ; A m a to- 
 thou not tell 1 DicEopolis. n o X i g. Ovx el'da M -P . not* 
 I know not yet. Aristoph. 
 
 893. Say not of thy hus- Mr) Xiyco 6 oag dvr)o, epilog) 
 band such things, dear Dione. xoiovzog, Amvr\. Theocr> 
 
 894. If Socrates asJcs thee 3 Eav rig igwrdo) 3U ov ^wxgd- 
 any thing, wilt thou answer 1 rrjg, dnoxglvofiai ; r] nag 
 or how wilt thou do ? nouia ; Plato. 
 
 895. Who is the young Tig elfxl 6 veavig ; w? 'EXXrjvi- 
 Woman ? How Grecian-like nug dveoopai im P iyat 6 iv 
 
 'fXiov novog ! xal 6 a&Xiog 
 Aya^sfivav dog olxislgw im P ! 
 dv£Q(OT<x(a im P re iyat yvvr)) 
 naig xL Eurip. 
 
 she ashed us about the toils 
 at Troy ! and the wretched 
 Agamemnon how she pitied ! 
 and she inquired of me about 
 his wife, and children. 
 
 896. Desiring always to s Em&Vjjiiiti del Xafiitgog rig 
 perform something splendid, ggydfyfxai, aheto 6 3 Ayr\al- 
 he asks of Agesilaus heavy- Xaog ojrXlrrjg. Xen. 
 armed men. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 
 
 103 
 
 897. They loitt no longer 
 demand of thee their pay, 
 but will depart out of the 
 country. 
 
 898. He exacted of Lep- 
 tines four and thirty 
 drachms, and of Tkeoxenus 
 seventy drachms, 
 
 899. I took the island 
 1 neither from them nor from 
 
 you, but from the pirate 
 Sostratus. 
 
 900. That we may be 
 more expert in warlike af- 
 fairs, declare to us whence 
 he began to teach thee the 
 art of commanding. 
 
 901. They teach their sons 
 three things only, to ride, 
 and to use the bow, and to 
 speak the truth. 
 
 90*2. They took off from 
 him the cloak, and put upon 
 him his garments. 
 
 903. Diogiton concealed 
 from his daughter the death 
 of her husband. 
 
 2v ds ovxixi dnaixio) b /u/- 
 a&bg, alH dna)ldao(a M ex 
 b yfj. Xen. 
 
 £ y j7tgaTTto f a Atnxlvr\q xhxa- 
 geg xal xqidxovxa dgaxjAr}, 
 xal Osol-srog dgaxftr) e6do- 
 [irjxovxa. Demosth. 
 
 'O vrjaog ovt 3 ixsivog, ovxe ov 
 a<fctiQ£(o*' sa , aXXd b Xyoxrjg 
 Zwoxoaxog (§ 25.). De- 
 mosth. # 
 
 "lva imoxrjuwv b 7iole[2iy.bg 
 (638) slpl 8U , Xiya /«■» 
 
 iyo), noxrev agxb) M ^ a 
 ov SiSdoxta b oxqaxr\yia. 
 Xen. 
 
 UcciSevco o ncuq xgElg fiovog, 
 InnEWJ, xal xo^evco, xal 
 aXtj&l^ofiai. Herodot. 
 
 Exdva/ a avxbg b ^a/itSs, xal 
 ivdv(df a avxbg b l^dxiov 
 aixogS. N. Test. 
 
 4ioydx(ov o ■&vydx7]Q xqv- 
 nxo) tm P b &dvaiog b dvx\q. 
 Lysias. 
 
 a. Several other verbs are also found with two 
 accusatives. 
 
 904. But why do we blame *Axdp tig (233) ovxog b Aaxav 
 the Lacedccmonians for these aixidojiai. Aristoph. 
 things ? 
 
104 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 905. I wish to remind you 
 of the words which he said ; 
 for I know that you will re- 
 member. 
 
 906. From these things 
 therefore I then prevented 
 thee, as thou sayest. 
 
 BovXo^lwl ds ov 6 Xoyog, oq 
 
 Xs/(0 tm P, V7lO{llflV7j(JJt(0 f a ' 
 
 si'dto M *P yag on fiifiv^- 
 ox<o v -ff. Demosth. 
 
 Ovrog ago, oil tots $Lomo)Xv<af a , 
 ag ov cprjfil. Plato. 
 
 b. Verbs of doing and speaking often take the adverb 
 ev or xaxwg instead of the accusative of the thing. 
 
 907. And now he benefits 
 \he Messenians and the Ar- 
 gives. 
 
 908. They more willingly 
 speak ill of me, than they 
 praise themselves. 
 
 Kcu vvv o Mtoariviog xcu o 
 'Agyslog sv noiita. De- 
 mosth. 
 
 °Eym ijdiov aaxoitg Xsyta, q ov 
 avTog eTiaivito. Lysias. 
 
 c. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with 
 the accusative neuter of an adjective in the sense of an 
 adverb. 
 
 909. He injured me great' 
 ly, and hurt the state not 
 a little. 
 
 910. Not only will you not 
 hurt, but even most greatly 
 will you benefit the state, and 
 yourselves. 
 
 3 Eya fiev {iEyccg ne ' p £77^*00* ^ a , 
 6 ds nolig ov [iixgog ne,p 
 §lamo3 fa . Lysias. 
 
 Ov fiovov ov fiXctTtTO), aXXa y.cti 
 6 [isycig ne - p (oopiXsw 6 TtoXig, 
 xal ov avTog. Demosth. 
 
 d. A preposition must often be supplied before the 
 accusative of the thing. 
 
 911. He challenged not Ovx (slg) ox/Tog nqoxaXm 
 
 u u.imp 
 
 those who associated 
 him to these things. 
 
 with 
 
 OVVSlfll, 
 
 Xen. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 
 
 105 
 
 912. The army he divided c O OTgdrevpa xatavificj^ 1 (elg) 
 into twelve parts. do'idexa psgog. Xen, 
 
 913. 1 advise to divide OvTog de o ovpfiogla exaoTog 
 each of these classes into diuigs(o sa xelevm (tig) nevie 
 
 Jive parts of twelve men pigog xara dudexa dvqg*. 
 «ach. Demosth. 
 
 6. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with 
 the accusative of an adjective or substantive which ex- 
 presses a quality or property attributed to the person by 
 the verb. These verbs are those which signify to call 
 or name, to make, to choose, and when in the passive 
 take the same case after as before them. 
 
 914. They call him, whom 
 we serve, Polyphemus, 
 
 915. JEschylus in (the 
 tragedy) Prometheus Loosed 
 makes the Phasis the bound- 
 ary of Europe and Asia. 
 
 916. They decreed to 
 assist with all their forces, 
 and they chose IpJucrates 
 commander. 
 
 917. They call insolence 
 education; anarchy, liberty ; 
 luxury, magnificence ; impu- 
 dence, manliness. 
 
 918. But poverty has cor- 
 ruption ; it teaches a man 
 through want to be bad. 
 
 KwUco 5* aviog, og (831) 
 Xazgevw, IloXvcprjpog. Eu- 
 rip. 
 
 Aloxvlog iv IJgofirj&tvg 
 kva P - VA -P r o <Pa<ng ogog 
 6 EvQOjnr} xal 6 'Aalet 
 noieo). Arrian. 
 
 Vqqp/^o) M, ^ a por)&d(o navdijfiel, 
 xal Iyutfjarris OTQUTrjyog 
 algia u - sa . Xen. 
 
 "TOgig uev, naldevaig xaXi(o * 
 avaoxla di, eXev&egla ' dow- 
 xla de, peyaXongeneia ' 
 dv aid eta, de, dvdgia. Plato. 
 
 AX$ tya) vooog ntviu ' diddoxat 
 y\ dvrjg 6 XQtfa (§ 24.) 
 xaxog. Eurip. 
 
106 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 919. Many having been 
 injured by orators, teach 
 their sons to be orators. But 
 no one having been injured 
 by a wolf, becomes a wolf 
 himself, and bites in return. 
 
 JloXvg ddixiw p - PA -/ a £710 gr^- 
 toiqZ , 6 vlbg gi'jiwg didd- 
 ox(o ' ovdslg di adixiw PPA / fl 
 VTib Xvxog s , avrbg Xvxog 
 ylyvopai, xa\ dvTiddxva). 
 Ariston. 
 
 XXXVIII. When a verb in the active voice 
 governs two cases, in the passive it retains the 
 latter case. Grammar, Rule XXVIL 
 
 920. When he heard,, he 
 bore it grievously, consider- 
 ing of what honors and of 
 what hopes he had been de- 
 prived. 
 
 921. All things are con- 
 spicuous in the soul, after it 
 is divested of the body. 
 
 922. They persuade the 
 Athenians to send to them 
 ships, for by the Syracusans 
 they were kept both from the 
 land and from the sea. 
 
 923. All the other things, 
 which have been thought 
 worthy of this appellation, 
 
 924. And again they ask- 
 ed, for whom the horses 
 were bred. 
 
 925. He shall be likened 
 to a foolish man, who built 
 his house upon the sand. 
 
 *£nsl dxovo)f a , xaXsnwg <)p«- 
 ga^ a , iv&vfxiofiai, olog 
 •tifirj S xou olog iXmg S ano- 
 OTsgscQ. Xen. 
 
 "jEvdqXog nag slpl (§ 26.) iv 
 6 yvxt], 4nu8dv yvfivoco sv ^ a 
 6 oafxa g . Plato. 
 
 IZsl'&w 6 3 A&rjvalog nifincof* 
 ov vavg, vnb ydg 2vga- 
 xovaiog s o T£ yij d'gyeo im P 
 xul 6 S-dXaooa. Thucyd. 
 
 aXXog nag, oaog a£i6a> 
 (§ 26.) ovxog 6 ngoogrjoig. 
 Plato. 
 
 Kal ndXw igwxdw %mp , jig* 
 
 mnog rgeqxa 
 
 Xen. 
 
 O/iotow avtjQ fiojgbg, oaxig 
 olxodofiia^ a 6 olxia avtov 
 N. Test. 
 
 j \ « w n r 
 ent afifiog . 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 107 
 
 926. And whatever things 
 he himself was ashed by 
 others; he quickly answered. 
 
 927. They demand of the 
 Arcadians the cities of which 
 they were deprived by the 
 Lacedsemonians. 
 
 928. O child, O son of 
 my wretched son, we are 
 deprived of thy life unex- 
 pectedly. 
 
 929. He was instructed in 
 music by Lamprus, and in 
 rhetoric by Antiphon. 
 
 930. The majority of the 
 commanders were not per- 
 suaded of the things which 
 were announced. 
 
 Kul oaog avrbq vn aU.og S 
 igardo} opr , xa-/v anoxgl- 
 vofiac im P. Xen. 
 
 'Anuria (§ 37., Ex. 897.) 
 o nohg 6 Agxdg, og a 
 vnb Aaxsdaiuoviog s acpair- 
 giw r - fa . Xen. 
 
 3 SI zixvov,, <u ncug T noug 
 (loysgog, ovXdco aog ifjvxrj a 
 ddoxcag. Eurip. 
 
 Movotxt] a (uev vnb Aaungog g 
 ncadevd) f a ., qijtoqmt) a 8e 
 vn* 'AvTicpmv ». Plato. 
 
 'O nXelwvV 6 aTgarrjybg ov 
 nn&<o im P 6 gayyiUu »*A 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 a. Some verbs in the passive retain the former case, 
 and the latter is made their nominative. 
 
 931. He had had com- c O 6 dnooxBvrj inngina T * 1 
 mitted to him the guard of yvXaxrj*. Polyb. 
 
 the baggage. 
 
 932. They are thought AUaiog 8s vou%<o, xal dia 
 most just, and on account of ovTog* ntoxtvto 6 xgloig*. 
 this they are intrusted wtlh Strabo. 
 
 the trials. 
 
 933. Read* to me under *By& d uvayiyvmaxta IM * a -» inl 
 what archon he was voted tig uqxoiv s x Ft Q 0T0V ^ 10 T ^ a 
 the office. 6 ugxq- iEschin. 
 
108 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 934. They delivered up a Eyx^Q^ m fa swtov, xccl dva- 
 
 themselves, and having been yio p - PA -/ a ngbg (iuoiUvg % 
 
 brought to the king, they dnoxi^iva *■& o xscpaXy*. 
 
 had their heads cut off. Xen. 
 
 The accusative with the passive may often be referred to narit 
 understood. 
 
 935. He was struck on 
 the head with an axe in the 
 Prytaneum. 
 
 936. They drew up also 
 the wretched goat broken as 
 to both his horns. 
 
 IlXyooio sa o 7t£<pt*Xri niXsxvg d 
 iv 6 Ilgviavslov. Herodot. 
 
 *Avi[id(o is '^ a di not o d&Xiog 
 xgdyog ovv&gavoj r -* A -P dp- 
 (pco o xegagV. Longus. 
 
 b. Verbs passive, or of a passive signification, are 
 followed by a genitive governed by vnb, dnb, in, nagd, 
 or ngog. 
 
 937. He was honored by 
 you, and he possessed much 
 property. 
 
 938. We are injured, O 
 women ; for we are kept 
 from the sepulchre by this 
 man. 
 
 939. These things were 
 said thus by the pilot to 
 Xerxes. 
 
 940. No memorable ex- 
 ploit was performed by them. 
 
 941. For these persons 
 living scientifically are not 
 acknowledged by thee to be 
 happy. 
 
 *Tno av Ti(jid(»} im P, xal noXvg 
 ovala XTaofiou r ' pl . De- 
 mosth. 
 
 9 Adix£(o, a yvvrj ' sl'gya ydg 
 rdcpogs (§38., Ex.922.) 
 ngog dvrjQ ode. Eurip. 
 
 Omog ovico g£(xJ a (§ 26.) 
 ix 6 xv6egvyTTjg ngog £ig- 
 %rjg a . Herodot. 
 
 Hgdooiaf a dn avtog ovddg 
 egyov d&oXoyog. Thucyd. 
 
 Ovrog ydg irilotrjfiovag £aw 
 ov% ofwXoyia) nagd ov sv- 
 dal[i(ov slfii. Plato. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 109 
 
 942. In the debarcation I 
 was slain by Hector. 
 
 943. I learned the for- 
 tunes of Agamemnon, and 
 the death by which he per- 
 ished by Ids wife. 
 
 944. Whoever of you 
 knows by what man he per- 
 ished, him I command to 
 relate all things to me. 
 
 945. From Naxus they 
 were banished by the people ; 
 and having been banished 
 they came to Miletus. 
 
 Jb'v o U7z66aaig a7io&vi]ax(j} A,sa 
 vnb 6 u Extwq. Lucian. 
 
 Ayaueuvcov tv%i] enlaxauai mp , 
 xal &avaxog, oiog d ngog 
 dauay oXXvco *- sa . Eurip. 
 
 "Oaxig noxe av xaxeidu M -P avrig 
 ex rig dLoXXvw M,sa , ovxog a 
 xeXeva nag or t uaiv(a (§ 36.) 
 eyco. Soph. 
 
 jEx Na$og cpevyw *- sa vnb 6 
 drjuog ' cpevyca A - PA - 5a ^fi 
 acpixv£o i uaL sa eg MlXr]xog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 c. Passive verbs are often followed by a dative, 
 sometimes with, but frequently without, a preposition. 
 
 946. Thus by Tydides 
 were the close phalanxes of 
 the Trojans disordered. 
 
 947. This thing nowhere 
 in the book has been said by 
 me. 
 
 948. Hear not therefore, 
 nor endure the things which 
 had been done either by the 
 Lacedcemonians or by the 
 Phoccans. 
 
 949. They were instructed 
 by us in gymnastic and in 
 music somewhere in the for- 
 mer discourse. 
 
 10 
 
 "Hg vnb TvSeidrjg nvxivbg xXo- 
 vtco im P cpdXayS Towg. Horn. 
 
 Ovxog ovdccfiov 6 (3i6Xlov S 
 Xeyto iyoj. Lucian. 
 
 Mr\ xolvvv og (§ 20., b.) 
 ngdooo) ( § 26.) rj Aaxe8ai~ 
 fioviog, r) (pwxevg, dxova) P, 
 urjS' uvixouou. Demosth. 
 
 rvfivaanxT] d fiev nov xal 
 Hovoixri d iv ye 6 ngoa&ev 
 (§21., a., Ex.544.) nai- 
 3ev(o im P eyoj. Plato. 
 
110 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 Thus also impersonate. 
 
 950. They were powerful 
 in riches, as also it has been 
 shown by the ancient poets. 
 
 951. They are ambitious 
 to show to all men that they 
 have not labored in vain. 
 
 XqtJ[xci d dvvcnbg dpi, w£ x'*2 
 o naXmbg noirjTTjg drjXow. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 0Llorifiso(iai imdslxwfn, w 
 ngog oniag & , otl ovx aXXoag 
 ai)xbg d -v norm**- 9 . Plato. 
 
 XXXIX. The particular part or circum- 
 stance referred to after a general affirmation 
 is put in the accusative. Grammar, Rule 
 XLIL 
 
 952. They were about 
 equal to the Greeks in num- 
 ber. 
 
 953. He was both in ap- 
 pearance most terrific, and 
 most large in person. 
 
 954. He was also other- 
 wise both hospitable and 
 magnificent after the Thes- 
 salian fashion. 
 
 955. Thou art like in 
 body, and voice, and feet, to 
 Ulysses. 
 
 956. The fruit of the lote 
 tree is in sweetness like to 
 the fruit of the palm-tree. 
 
 957. There is not a man 
 who is happy in all things. 
 
 El[il tm P naQoy,OLog 6 *EXXr\v 
 ( § 29.) 6 dgi&pog. Xen. 
 
 Elfxl $s xal 6 oipig cpo6sgbg, 
 xcu fxsyag 6 oafiix. Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 Elfil ds xal aXXwg q>iXo£svog 
 ts xal (A8yaXo7iQ87Ttjg o Oej- 
 xaXixog rgonog. Xen. 
 
 2\) difiag, cptavri ts, novg 
 ts 'Odvoosvg ( § 33 , c, 
 Ex. 847.) sVxoo**. Horn. 
 
 c O ds o Xavog xagnbg slfxl yXv- 
 xvtTjg 6 cpolvi% o xaQizbg 
 ( § 29.) ngooslxsXog. He- 
 rodot. 
 
 Ovx slfil oozig nag avrjQ svdou- 
 (xovsco. Aristoph. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 053. He hit Prothoenor on 
 the right shoulder, 
 
 959. Near the eity was a 
 stone pyramid, of one hun- 
 dred feet in breadth, and of 
 two hundred feet in height. 
 
 960. They expected to 
 come at sun setting to vil- 
 lages of the Babylonian 
 country ; and in this thing 
 they were not mistaken. 
 
 961. They were admira- 
 ble in beauty and in size : 
 their appearance differed in 
 nothing from amber. 
 
 962. I am by nation an 
 Assyrian ; I have also a 
 strong castle, and I rule over 
 much territory. 
 
 963. They use gold and 
 brass for all things. 
 
 Bu/.ho sa ds JIqo&otIvcoq ds*iog 
 aiuog. Horn. 
 
 Huou 6 nolig 3 - sl/ui nvQayAg 
 US-ivog, o fikv svgog elg 
 nli&QOv ( § 19.), 6 ds vipog 
 dvo vtid-Qov (§ 19.). Xen. 
 
 v4oyuo<xiu imp rjitb) lXF ff u\ua 
 ijhog (291) dvio) PA tig 
 y.uiut] o Ba6v).b)viog ^eo^a* 
 zul oviog ov ipsvdco *f a . 
 Xen. 
 
 JStfii &txi\udaiog o xdllog xal 
 6 psys&oq' 6 ds oipig 
 1-foy.rgovS ovdsig ne dictcps- 
 Qui im P. Xen. 
 
 £yo) sljxl 6 fisv ytvog Aoav- 
 Qiog ' t%(0 ds xal xsl/og 
 io%vp6g, xal x°^Q a ( § 31.) 
 stkxqxu) nolvg. Xen. 
 
 Xpvoog ds xal /aXxog o nag 
 zouo/xai (841). Herodot 
 
 XL. An impersonal verb governs the dative. 
 Grammar, Rule XXVIIL 
 
 904. And let us consider 
 whether it is proper for us, 
 
 (Jf ! Ot. 
 
 905. But, if it seem good 
 to thee, I will bear these 
 words to the old man. 
 
 Kal oxoTiio) 9 ° si s'yu) nqsnsi, 
 if oil* Plato. 
 
 3 A)l\ si doxil 1 * ov, ods dnay r 
 ytl.lo) (§ 36.) Xoyog ysgwv. 
 J In rip. 
 
112 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 966. With my hand it is 
 not lawful for me to take 
 hold of thy chin. 
 
 967. It is profitable to 
 Philip, and to the Phoceans, 
 and to you in like manner 
 all, to be freed from the 
 apathy, and from the heavi- 
 ness of the Thebans. 
 
 968. For me therefore it 
 is sufficient even hereafter 
 to receive ; but give to these 
 generals and captains, who 
 followed with me. 
 
 969. And through passion 
 it was decreed by them to 
 slay not only those who are 
 present, but likewise all the 
 Mitylenseans who are of age, 
 and to enslave the children 
 and women. 
 
 970. For private persons 
 it is possible to retrench their 
 expenses for the things per 
 day, as they please ; but for 
 kings it is not possible. 
 
 971. When they saw 
 Xenophon, they run to him, 
 and say, Now it is in thy 
 power, O Xenophon, to be- 
 come a man. 
 
 Xelo (§ 24.) d' ovx titon iya) 
 6 aog Xa^iGdvoa M - INF - sa y S - 
 vstdg (738). Eurip. 
 
 2v^(psQH ds <PlXi.7V7iog, xal 
 fttoxsvg, xal ai) ofxolcog 
 anag, 6 avaXyi]ala % (§38.), 
 xal 6 (jaqvTrigZ dnaXXda- 
 
 Or}6alog. Demosth. 
 
 !fc'/w psv xolvvv doxel xal 
 av&ig X(X{i6du'b) ,NF - sa • oixog 
 ds o axqaxr\yog dcogsofiat 3 , 
 og ovv sya) dxoXov&sw im P, 
 xal Xo%ayog. Xen. 
 
 Kal vtc oyyr) » doxsl k -f a 
 avxbg ov 6 ndqsL^it PA povov 
 anoxxshoa f a , aXXd xal 
 o anag MLxvXrjvaiog oaog 
 rjOdo), nalg ds xal yvvr) 
 avSQa7iobL£(x>f a . Thucyd. 
 
 [ihv idiwxrig s&oxi 6 dandvTj 
 avpxe\uva) slg 6 nep (§ 21., c.) 
 xa& Ti^isQa a , on?] ftovXo- 
 fiai ' 6 ds xvqavvog ovx 
 svds%sxai. Xen, 
 
 c Slg sl'dco sa 6 jzsvocpwv, nqoani- 
 Ttxoj avxbg ( § 33., b.), xal 
 Xsyca, Nvv ov z&axiv, o) az- 
 vocpeov, dvrjQ d ( § 14., 
 Ex. 441.) ylyvojiai 1VT ' sa . 
 Xen. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 a. Au and xgh agree with an infinitive preceded by 
 the accusative. 
 
 972. It behoves the tyrant 'Tne$ougicQ ovxog nag del 6 xv- 
 to cut off all these persons, gavrog, u pitta agx® INF ^/ 
 if he means to govern. (§ 12., a.). Plato. 
 
 973. Thou shouldst net 2v 5' ov <p&oviu ygij ' [ivglog 
 envy ; thou hast innumerable slfti (§ 26.) attog <jv (§ 33., 
 
 t)ther things, in which thou 
 wilt delight. 
 
 974. After all had assem- 
 bled whom it behoved (to 
 assemble), and silence had 
 taken place, Cyaxares spoke 
 thus. 
 
 Other impersonate likewise, which more commonly govern the 
 dative, sometimes agree with an infinitive preceded by the accu- 
 sative. 
 
 975. That it becomes us 'Slg iyca ngsnet (SovXevco M adi- 
 being injured to deliberate, xsca p - PA -i"", prjdelg dida- 
 
 a., Ex. 792.), iy og d xig- 
 7i(o u -ff. Eurip. 
 'fig ds nag avvigyopai A,,a og 
 du im P {ovvigyouav »»*•«»), 
 xal oicotit] ylyvojxai sa , 
 Kva^dgrjg I'no) sa <ode. Xen. 
 
 axb) ,M ? r . Thucyd. 
 Jlsgl Al'yvnxog a ovx I'^eoxt 
 paodeiig ^wot? Ugaxucrj * 
 ugyco. Plato. 
 
 let no one teach. 
 
 976. About Egypt it is 
 not allowable for a king to 
 rule without the sacerdotal 
 science. 
 
 977. Having made war 2igaxsvot PA ^ a tf inl 6 ftfihegog 
 upon our ancestors, he suf- ngoyovog a , ndoxco 8a og 
 fered the things which it was ngooi]xu im P avxbg (na- 
 justfor him (to suffer.) oyw INF -* a ). Isocr. 
 
 b. Au and pilu, with their compounds, also pixeoxt, 
 nQoar'jxei, diucfiou, and HXslnet, govern the dative of 
 person, with the genitive of a thing. 
 
 978. There is need of some Kopipbg 8e xlg aoxrjoig del no- 
 more elegant exercise for the hfiixbg d&Xrjxrig. Plato. 
 
 warlike wrestlers. 
 
 10* 
 
114 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 979. I consider in what 
 manner I may discourse 
 concerning them ; for I care 
 for these, more than for the 
 others. 
 
 980. If therefore you shall 
 restore these things to those 
 who serve in the army, there 
 is further need of no supply 
 for you. If not, there is 
 further need. Rather there 
 is need of all the supply. 
 
 981. It repented them of 
 all the things that had been 
 said, and they acknowledged 
 that they mistook no thing 
 ever so much. 
 
 982. Perhaps also I shall 
 put on purple raiment, that 
 they may know, that / no 
 longer share in those trifles. 
 
 983. To a man overcome 
 by the pleasures of the body 
 there belongs no virtue. 
 
 JZxoni(o u , Tig rgonog (§ 39., 
 Ex. 954.) dicdsyofiai p - 9U ^ a 
 nsgl aviog S • fieXsc yag 
 iyco d ovtoq S [iaXXov, ij 
 6 aXXog s. Isocr. 
 
 El [iev oiiv ovxog o oxga- 
 t£W0 m - pa anodldcofiL (§ 36.), 
 ovdetg ov ngoudel nogog ' si 
 ds fir), ngoodsl * paXXov ds 
 anaq svdel 6 nogog. De- 
 mosth. 
 
 Mst(X[ieXei im P ds avxbg anocg 
 6 igso) *•**"?, ofioXoysa im P 
 ds firjde}g tigjtiots xooovxov 
 ngayfiu S diafiagxavco INF - sa „ 
 Isocr. 
 
 Taxa 8s xal nogcpvglg [isxctfi- 
 cpia^ofiat, (og sl'drjfu °, on, 
 [xrjxsTi iyco d 6 XijgogZ sy.el- 
 vog (isxsoTi. Lucian. 
 
 Avr)g ijxxoov o dia 6 acofxa % 
 rjdovr) (§ 28.) ovdelg agsxr) 2 
 Ttgoorjy.SL. Xen. 
 
 c. Sometimes del and ygr) take the accusative of a 
 person with the genitive of a thing. 
 
 984. Go rejoicing ; for I Xalgw eTfii s • ov yocg abg iydo 
 
 dsl &soniofia. Eurip. 
 
 have no need of thy oracles. 
 985. Thou hast need of a 
 long and wjse speech, with 
 which thou shalt persuade 
 me that thou killedst not thy 
 friends. 
 
 Maxgbg ys dsl ov, teal ooybg 
 Xoyog, ooxiq ( § 24.) iyat 
 7isl&(0 fir) cplXog xaxaxxsl- 
 r ui*r.sa (£ 13., ft.). Eu- 
 
 rip. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OP PARTICIPLES. 
 
 115 
 
 XLI. Participles govern the case of their 
 verbs. , Grammar, Rule XXXI. 
 
 986. The Acarnanians, 
 having plundered the dead, 
 and having erected trophies, 
 returned to Argos. 
 
 987. Recounting therefore 
 all the dangers, I should be 
 exceedingly prolix. 
 
 988. Having heard the 
 trumpet, they immediately 
 rushed upward along the 
 open road. 
 
 989. The heroes, who, 
 assisting Menelaus, destroy- 
 ed Ilium. 
 
 990. Having filled a gal- 
 ley of fifty oars with men, 
 he entered into it. 
 
 991. These things, said 
 I, it is proper to do, and at 
 the same time having taken 
 Ctesippus,! entered into the 
 palaestra. 
 
 992. The Athenians, hav- 
 ing pursued, and having 
 captured twelve ships, and 
 having taken the men out of 
 them, sailed away to Mo- 
 lycrium ; and having erected 
 a trophy at Rhium, and 
 
 Axaovdv ds, oxvXsvh)f a 6 vs~ 
 xgoqV, xal xqoixouov Xott\- 
 liJ a , anoxwQEOjf - eg "Agyog. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 "Anag pev ovv e^agi&jj.s(o 6 xlv- 
 dvvog, Xlav dv fiaxgoXoyeco . 
 Isocr. 
 
 Axovco f a 6 odXmy$z, n>xrv§ 
 i'rjfii M,tmp dva xard 6 cpave- 
 gog odog 3 -. Xen 
 
 "Hquiqi "IXiov og dianig&(of a , 
 aQrjya MeviXaog d . Theocr. 
 
 lJevTTjy6)T£Qog nXrjgoo) f a d- 
 vi)Q%, so6uhoj sa ig aviog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Ovtoc, cp^/ul sa d iyw, %o)] 
 noiso), xal una XapSavb) sa 
 6 Kxr t GL7iT[oq, ngooeifii M,p 
 tig u naXaloxga. Plato. 
 
 *0 Ss A&rjVa7og, xax ad ia>y.(of a , 
 xal ravg dwdexu Xap6dvoi sa t 
 o xe uvtjq *£ avxbg uvai- 
 (jii0 u " a , eg MoXvxgeiov 
 unonXio) imp ' xal xgonulov 
 'ioTT](uif a enl 6 t Plov J , xal 
 juvg dvaxi&r\fxi 8a o Uooei- 
 
116 
 
 GREEK EXERCISESv 
 
 having consecrated a ship to 
 Neptune, they returned to 
 Naupactus. 
 
 dwv d , ava^(OQE(a^ a eg NaV- 
 ncty.tog. Thucyd. 
 
 a. The same case is put after participles derived 
 from verbs which take a nominative after them, as that 
 of the participles themselves. 
 
 993. From Cyrus, being 
 a subject, no one deserted to 
 the king. 
 
 994. To him it belonged, 
 being pr est or, to punish those 
 who had been taken. 
 
 995. He said that Dema- 
 ratus reigned not lawfully 
 over the Spartans, not being 
 the son of Ariston. 
 
 996. We came to a cer- 
 tain place called The Fair 
 Havens. 
 
 997. And the land, for- 
 merly called Acte, from him- 
 self he named Cecropia. 
 
 Uccga Kvqoq °, dovkog et^it, 
 ovdelg aTtsifii M# ^ ngog j3aui~ 
 Xevg a . Xen. 
 
 3 £xslvog d ngoar'jxsi, imp , elfil 
 OTQaTrjyog, y.oXct£<a-f a 6 ctU~ 
 axoi A - FA 'P. Plut. 
 
 0r}fxl sa Ar^iaqaxog a ov% 
 inj'ovfisvojg (taaiXsvo) INF 
 2naqTiaxr\g % , ovx slfxl naig 
 ^AqIutwv. Herodot. 
 
 "%opi A,5a ug Tonog rig x«- 
 Xsw P - PA -^ Kcdog fopfa 
 N. Test, 
 
 Kal 6 yij, ngoiegov Xiy(o F ' VA 'P r 
 Av,xr\, acp eaviov Kexgonla 
 ovofidC(o fa . Apollod. 
 
 XLII. The participle is used instead of the 
 infinitive after verbs of knowing, perceiving, 
 showing, remembering, persevering, desisting, 
 and such as signify an emotion of the mind. 
 Grammar, Rule XXXIL 
 
 998. Know that thou art 
 troublesome, and soon thou 
 shalt be thrust out by force. 
 
 OxXrtfiQq i'arjfu elfil PA ' n , xai 
 Ta/a u&ia p ^ /5/a (§ 24.). 
 Eurip. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 117 
 
 999. Knowest thou not 
 that I was outraged, and my 
 temples. 
 
 1000. When they discov- 
 ered that they should not be 
 able to prevent, they sent 
 two heralds. 
 
 1001. You perceive not 
 that you are deceived, but if 
 you hear me, I will very 
 soon prove to you. 
 
 1002. When I perceived 
 him to be delighted, I gave 
 another cup. 
 
 1003. I found that I rose 
 up with difficulty, and that 
 I stretched out my legs with 
 difficulty. 
 
 1004. This trench he 
 makes for a fortification, 
 when he learns that Cyrus 
 is approaching. 
 
 1005. Considering I found 
 that by no means otherwise 
 could I do this thing. 
 
 1006. Either show thy- 
 self not to have done these 
 things, or suffer punishment. 
 
 1007. He declared that 
 Demaratus neither was born 
 of Ariston, nor reigned law- 
 fully over Sparta. 
 
 Ovx el'Sm "-P v6qi& p - PA / a 
 
 eyco a-f , y.ul vabq a ifiog. 
 
 Eurip. 
 'Enti yiyvbioxoi sa ov dvva- 
 
 [xai PA -//- n xtoXvw, 7iepmi)f a 
 
 dvo xr t QV$. Xen. 
 
 Ovx aladdvofiai i$ana- 
 T«a) p ' PA - n , ullL eav nxovo) sa ^ a 
 iyo) S , £y($ ov avxiy.a fidXa 
 imSsiitvv€9» Xen. 
 "l-ldco*' Pi -'f a <5' uvrog a we inai- 
 ad-uvoy.au 3a syw, uXXog <5/- 
 dwfii fa xvXit Eurip. 
 
 KcxTa i uav&dvoi sa uvlarr] i UL FA ' sa ' n 
 /uoyig, xui 6 oxeXog fioyig 
 ixjsuvco PA / a -". Xen. 
 
 Ovrog ds 6 Tcccpgog nonco avxl 
 tgvfia, enfidrj nvv&uvoyuu 
 KvQogl TiQOoelavroi PA -.P ra . 
 Xen. 
 
 2"xonsoi M tvoLoxoi imp ovdaywg 
 uv uXXb)g ovrog dianoctT- 
 tw M.PA./a. n> Isocr. 
 
 "jl dtiy.vvo) f a ov noieo) FAp 
 ovrog ouvrov a , ij dLxn 
 vni%M. Demosth. 
 
 Anocfa'ii'O) lmp 6 zlrifxiioajog a 
 ovxb f$ Aqiaxwv ylyvo- 
 jjai MPA P a ) ovis Ixvovfii- 
 votg fiaodivo) rx -P r - a - 2ndq- 
 
 n/'. Herodot. 
 
118 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1008. I remember that I 
 received this wealth from 
 Antisthenes. 
 
 1009. If he had endured 
 to be reigned over by Cleo- 
 menes, and had stayed in 
 Sparta, he would have reign- 
 ed over Lacedaemon. 
 
 1010. We wilt stay with 
 thee, and we will endure to 
 see thee, and we will bear to 
 be benefited by thee. 
 
 1011. And now I enjoin 
 upon you these things, not 
 to suffer the government to 
 devolve again to the Medes. 
 
 1012. Very willingly will 
 I relate to thee the things 
 which I continue to do, that 
 thou also mayest correct me, 
 if I seem to thee to do any 
 thing not rightly. 
 
 1013. I will serve Phoe- 
 bus, and I will not cease to 
 respect those who feed me. 
 
 1014. With difficulty you 
 were persuaded to acquit 
 him, but you made him cease 
 to be general. 
 
 1015. He delighted there- 
 fore rather to call me fellow- 
 soldier than son. 
 
 1016. If I had not by lot 
 
 Mitivrjoxa) v ' p ovxog diads/o- 
 [icu FA -f a ' n o nXovxog nv.q 
 3 AvTia&ivt]g 3 . Lucian. 
 
 El ds av£%o[iou sa §aau- 
 Xevco *-"-J»--n vjib KXsope- 
 vr\g3 , y.cu xctTay,£v(o vnp (v 
 2naqxr\j ftaodtvo) %mp av 
 AaxEdalfMov 3 . Herodot. 
 
 MSVCU 7KX06C <JV d , Y.v\ 
 
 6ga(xi FA - pr ' n ov av£%o[iou, xul 
 
 XMOXEQEG) V7l6 OV S SV£Q/t- 
 
 Tsoi *-**;Jw-n. Xen. 
 
 Kal dy av d ods imoy.rjTixto, 
 [xi] n£Qteldh) IyF - sa 6 rjysfio- 
 via a av&ig ig Mrjdog Trsoizg- 
 Xo^iai A - rA - 5a . Herodot. 
 
 Uavv Tjdsojg av dirjyiofiai og 
 iyw Tiouw PA diaxtliia, Xva 
 y.txt [18t<xqqv&iii£(o 9V 'f a eyw, 
 iav Tig av doxsco sv (irj xaXag 
 TToiioj. Xen. 
 
 <Pol6og d dovksvea, not ov \r\yia 
 o fiooxo) PA SsQansvoj PA,n . 
 Eurip. 
 
 Mohg fxsv txeI&oj *-f a oKplrj/ji, 
 OTQUxrjysa) PA,a d avxbg a 
 Txavw fa . Demosth. 
 
 XaiQCO imp ovv nal'kov ovotqu- 
 riwxrjg iyw, rj vlog xa~ 
 X£(o PA - n . Herodian. 
 
 El fiTj kay%av(o sa ods 6 td&g, 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 119 
 
 obtained this place, I should 
 be ashamed to be here. 
 
 1017. He answered that 
 it shall not repent them to 
 obey. 
 
 alayvvco «•'*•""? av iv&dds 
 
 aut y 
 AnonQlvo(ittv 
 
 Xen. 
 
 fa 
 
 &a M - PA - d -P avrog d ov /ma- 
 fiiXsL^. Xen. 
 
 a. After a verb governing a reflective pronoun, the 
 participle may agree in case either with the subject of 
 the verb, or with the reflective pronoun. 
 
 1018. He teas conscious to 
 himself that he was the cause 
 of the present disturbance. 
 
 1019. He is conscious to 
 himself that he desired liber- 
 ty, but that he became as 
 never before a slave. 
 
 JZvyyiyvatoxw tm P eavxov d o 
 TidgsifiL PA TaQtt/r) s al'xiog 
 (§ 41., a.) ylyvonca™-*^-* 
 Dionys. Hal. 
 
 c JEuvtov avvtldco^'P iXEV&sglaZ 
 {isv ini&vfiib) PA / a - n , dovlog 
 d dig ovdsTiojTiOTS yiyvo- 
 liai* xsaM . Xen. 
 
 XLIII. When a participle is used with lav- 
 Odvcoy xvy%dvco, or cpddvco, it is rendered by its 
 own verb, and the verb annexed by an adverb. 
 Grammar, Rule XXXIL, Obs. 2. 
 
 1020. Cyratades unper- 
 ceivedly ran away, and came 
 safe to Decelea. 
 
 1021. We unconsciously 
 do the same things as those 
 skilful men. 
 
 1022. Having risen up, 
 he watched lost unobserved 
 by him his father might go 
 out. 
 
 c O KvyurwSag Xav&dvw sa dno- 
 didQoioxaj PA - 5a , x«t dnoow- 
 £w p ^ a eg Awiluu. Xen. 
 
 Aav&dvbi 6 avxbg ixtlvog 
 6 dsivog dvi)Q d (§ 29., b.) 
 noiih) p \ Plato. 
 
 Avl(JTT]/Ul A ' rA - sa , (f>v\(XTTb) tm P 
 
 (ii) lav&uvb) * v ' sa avTog a 
 a nuii)Q t^fc^o | uat ,PA -'' a . 
 Xen. 
 
120 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1023. Unconsciously to 
 himself he consumed his 
 powers on irrational things. 
 
 1024. Wherever he sup- 
 ped and slept, in the camp 
 he kindled not a fire by 
 night, but made a light 
 before the army, that no 
 one might unperceivedly ap- 
 proach. 
 
 1025. By chance I sat at 
 the right hand of him near 
 the bed upon a certain low 
 seat. 
 
 1026. With the goods 
 which we have in the mind, 
 with these we acquire also 
 the advantages which we 
 happen to need. 
 
 1027. And of the Greeks 
 those who happened not to 
 be in their ranks ran into 
 their ranks, and Ariaeus (for 
 he happened to be travelling 
 in a chariot, because he 
 had been wounded) having 
 alighted put on his coat of 
 mail. 
 
 1028. Watch if any one, 
 before the slaughter is com- 
 pleted, comes into the house 
 first. 
 
 1029. They strove, that 
 
 Aav&dva sa aviov a xcaava- 
 Xlay.it} PA ^ a 6 dvvapig slg 
 o aXoyog. Plato. 
 
 "Onov ds dsiTivonoiib) °' pr xal 
 y.cc&£vdoj°'P r , iv [isv 6 OTga- 
 
 TOTiedoV 71VQ VVXTWQ OV 
 icd(0 lmp , 71(30 ds 6 OTQUTSVfUX 
 
 (pug Tioisoj lTnp , Xva [Ujdslg 
 Xav&dvw tu,sa ngoosijM rK - sa . 
 Xen. 
 
 Tvyxava sa xd&^fiai PA iv ds&d 
 avTog nagd 6 nXtvtj a inl 
 %v.yLaiC,r\Xog 8 rig. Plato. 
 
 c O dya&ov* og d (§ 20., tf.) 
 s%0) iv a ipv%r], oviog d xtcco- 
 [mu xou 6 ucpsXsia, og% dso- 
 ycu PA Tvy/dvo). Isocr. 
 
 Kou o T£ "EXXrjv og fir) Tvy%d- 
 v(o sa iv o rd^ig U(xl PA , slg 
 o id!-ig &e(d vm P } xai Agialog 
 {rvyxdva %m P ydg icp afia- 
 
 |a S TTOQSVOpCtL PA , 8 LOT * 
 
 TLTQtoOY.bi pl ) XaTa6alv(0 PA, * a 
 
 fragaxlfr *' im P. Xen. 
 
 4>vXdoo(o 8 d 3 r t v rig, ngtv 
 
 TsXsvTaoj sv 'f a cpovog, I'gxo- 
 
 ficti APA - sa ig olxog p cp&d- 
 
 vm 9V - sa . Eurip. 
 
 e J.}tiXXdoficu im P, oncog <p&dva)°f a 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 121 
 
 they might seasonably assist 
 the Pellenians. 
 
 1030. Lysander leading 
 the army arrived at Haliar- 
 tus before Pausanias. 
 
 1031. They no sooner ob- 
 tained the preeminence, than 
 they immediately formed de- 
 signs against the Thebans, 
 and sent out Clearchus and 
 an army against the king. 
 
 o IleV.rjvevq* {3oi]&so) p * ff . 
 Xen. 
 
 c O de yivoardooq uyoi 6 oigd- 
 TEVfia (f&dvo) sa 6 nctvoa- 
 rlaq a ev 6 Aliuoxoq yiyro- 
 uai PA - sa . Xen. 
 
 Ov q>&(tt>b) sa o agX?) xuts- 
 X(a PA -* a , xal Or t 6iuoq d fiiv 
 evfrvq im6ovXi:Vtof a , iitl Ss 
 6 fiaoiXevqix KXtugxoq xal 
 OTQctTid ixnsfiTio) f a . Isocr. 
 
 a. Kvqo) is used in the same manner as rvyxavu by 
 the poets. 
 
 1032. He who happens to Blow ds iyco*, oonq ex&gbq 
 be hostile will say of me upl PA xvotw, ode ' ET- 
 these things : Behold him <5co M - IM - Sa - 8 b aloxgwq J«'w PA , 
 who lives basely, who durst oq ov tXt^il sa dvyoxw 1NF - sa . 
 not die. Eurip. 
 
 XLIV. Participles often form a periphrasis 
 with Etui, yiyvouou, vitdgxa, s%(0, rjxa, to ex- 
 press the verb either in the tense of which they 
 are participles, or in that of the verb annexed. 
 Gi-ammar, Rule XXXIL, Obs. 3. 
 
 1033. And the stars of Kul b duiyo b ovourbq Hfu f/ 
 heaven shall futl. ixnlnro) PA -P r . N. Test. 
 
 1034. Going about in the Kara b uyonu* nB^lufu Tk,a , 
 forum, he durst spread im- uo-t6i]q xal durbq Xoyoq 
 
 11 
 
122 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 pious and false reports con- 
 cerning me ; that I have 
 done this thing. 
 
 1035. I had first told 
 them for what things they 
 had assembled, the oration 
 had been read, and it had 
 been praised, and applauded. 
 
 1036. I beseech thee by 
 thy child and by the gods, 
 do not betray us. 
 
 1037. For he was not an 
 enemy, nor did he this thing 
 through insolence. 
 
 1038. From one toil I 
 freed thee. For crossing 
 these Scamandrian streams, 
 I bathed the . corpse, and 
 washed the wounds. 
 
 1039. Who pray is the 
 woman whom thou bringest ? 
 
 imp 
 
 TiEQi iyoi S )Jyto 
 
 pr 
 
 )l[iat 
 
 cog eyco o n^ay^a £/ ( iu 
 dgciio VA -P ovvog. Demosth. 
 
 slfil tmp , avayiyvcoay.co pl d ' 
 6 Xoyog, sTiaivsto *•**■•? <5' 
 sl[il im P, xal &oQv6ico*' 1 '^P. 
 Isocr. 
 
 2v Tigbg 6 abg xixvov s , xal 
 ■&sog ixviofiai, ^itj ngodldco- 
 (xi PA - sa iycb yiyvopcu sv ' sa . 
 
 Soph. 
 
 Ov yeiq ex&gog ys vnaQ/co im P 
 d[xl* A , ovd scp' vfigig d 
 ovrog noUcof*. Demosth. 
 
 JEig [io%d-og s ov dnaXXdo- 
 oto PA --^ a E%co pr . SxaiidvoQiog 
 ydo bds dianegdco Qorj, 
 kovo)f a vsxQog, Y.cu dnovi- 
 mca^ 1 TQavjAa. Eurip. 
 
 Tig 6 yvvrj dijTcc slid og ^'xw^ 
 ay to PA f Soph. 
 
 a. Frequently also instead of a simple verb in 
 the sense of to go away, oV%opai with the participle is 
 used. 
 
 1040. And having mount- Kal dva6alva PA ' sa inl 6 tn- 
 
 ed upon their horses, they nog*, oXxoimi im P dneXav- 
 
 rode away into their own vco FA elg o sccvtov otqcxto- 
 
 camp. ntdov. Xen. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 123 
 
 h. The participle of the future is used to express 
 the purpose of an action. 
 
 1041. He sends the cap- 
 tains to bring oyer the heavy- 
 armed men. 
 
 1042. When Cotys was *End ds Koxvg piXleP* inapt, 
 
 about to depart, he came to 
 Agesilaus to take leave. 
 
 c O ).o/ayog TisuTib) diu6i6d- 
 ±o) p± Sf 6 onXlrr,;. Xen. 
 
 1043. Struck with aston- 
 ishment, we drove the flocks 
 to the summits, lest some 
 one of the Argives might 
 come to plunder, and to lay 
 waste thy folds. 
 
 toxouui A - sa ttoo; o Ayr r 
 oticcog 3, aanu^ouai PA -^. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ouu6og (§24.) d° haAqo- 
 aw p - PA - sa , tfj/u im P ttoluvt] eg 
 uy.oa, fit] rig Agyuog fio- 
 Af'w 9U - sa Inflate* ™-H, wi 
 abg Tiog&soj PA ^ oxa&^iog. 
 Eurip. 
 
 c. The participle is often joined with the adverb 
 fUia$i), in whatever case the construction requires, in the 
 sense of the Latin gerund in dum. 
 
 1044. I thought while °Ev&v t u£opai p/a de pna^u 
 writing how fortunately all 
 things have happened to 
 thee. 
 
 you.(fOi , ojg svivxag unag 
 ov ovu6alv(oP ( § 26.). 
 Isocr. 
 
 1045. Who is such a 
 physician, who recommends 
 nothing to one who is sick 
 while he is ill? 
 
 Tig elul joiovxog lujQog oong 
 6 rooib) Fx [istuJ-v «(/#€- 
 vita PA,d fir,ds}g avfi6ovXivw 
 (§36.) iEschin. 
 
 XL V. A substantive and participle are put ab- 
 solute in the genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXIII. 
 
 1046. They "preached Kr^voota^ navxuxov, b Kv- 
 everywhere, the Lord coop- Qiog ovrenyio}. N. Test. 
 crating. 
 
124 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1047. Neptune having JJoosiduv smcpaivoi p - PA - sa , b 
 appeared, the Satyr fled. Haivqog cpsvyco sa . Apol.od. 
 
 1048. Cimon having died, Klpuv ds uTto&vrjaxa PA,sa xal 
 and a famine having arisen, lipbg yiyvopai PA,sa , a-jicxw- 
 they withdrew from Citium. qko fa anb Klnov. Thucyd. 
 
 1049. But when thou doest 2v ds tiolsco PA sksrjfxoGmi] 3 , 
 alms, let not thy left hand ^ yiyvcoaxw lM - t - sa 6 cioi- 
 know what thy right hand artya av (§18., 6.) jlg n0 
 doeth. noiico 6 ds^ia av. N. Test. 
 
 1050. The plain becomes c O nsdiov nsXayog yiyvo^ai, 
 a sea, the river flowing in, ivdldwfu p,sv 6 itora^bg, l^w 
 and having nowhere an out- ds ovda t u7] i^rjXvaig. He- 
 let, rodot. 
 
 1051. The temple of Juno c O vscag 6 "Hqa iv "Aqyog xaxa- 
 at Argos was burnt down, xalca F S a , Xgvolg 6 Isgsict 
 Chry sis the priestess having (§25.) Xv^vog jig rl&rj- 
 placed a lighted candle by p FA,sa amu P - PA - p nqbg 
 the garlands, and thereupon 6 Grippa a , xal smxaxa- 
 f alien asleep. dag&s(a^- sa . Thucyd. 
 
 • 1052. At length spring "h5t] ds jo ao/co mpa > xat ° P* v 
 
 setting in, and the snow being xmv Xva> PPA , o 6s yij yv- 
 
 dissolved, the earth being laid fivoco P - PA , xal o nou vnuv- 
 
 bare, and the grass shooting d-su A,PA , o vo^svg ayta imp 
 
 out, the shepherds drove 6 ay sir] slg vo^. Longus. 
 their flocks to pasture. 
 
 a. The genitive of the substantive or a pronoun is 
 often understood. 
 
 1053. They consulted the *Ev /lsXcpol b &sbg insgo^iai imp ' 
 
 god at Delphi ; and he order- xsXsvm vjl ds, ix7iifx7i(a^ a 
 
 ing, they sent out the inhab- b olxrjiwQ. Thucyd. 
 itants. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 125 
 
 1054. Socrates command- r O Zwxouirig xeXEvoi fa 6 ngwrog 
 ed to read the first hypothesis vno&saig 6 nqoiiog Xoyog 
 of the first discourse, and it 
 [the hypothesis] having been 
 read, How, said he, sayest 
 thou this thing ? 
 
 uvayiyvwaxta ,:>r - JU , xui ara- 
 yiyvwuxa) p - PA -/ fl , JJtog, cpr\- 
 n\ im P, ovrogUyw; Plato. 
 
 b. Sometimes the rest of the sentence may be con- 
 sidered as supplying the place of the substantive. 
 
 1055. Although it is haz- Kulntq imxivduvog nag* fyw d 
 
 Ufil PA tig Muxsdovloc nifinco 
 emoTO/.i), o/uojg yqa(p<i)f a 
 Ttgog ov a aloeo) M-sa negl 
 zliodoiog s . Isocr. 
 Srmuivta "*/«-g-P 8s o Uotv- 
 ayvg, bit 7ioXs\uiog elul iv 
 o x ix) Q a > ix6orj&i(o ngog 
 6 ogiov a ovv 6 ( § 21., c.) 
 negl aviog a . Xen. 
 
 ardous with us to send a let- 
 ter into Macedonia, never- 
 theless I resolved to write to 
 thee concerning Diodotus. 
 
 1056. Word having been 
 brought to Astyages, that 
 enemies are in the country, 
 he goes out for the purpose 
 of succouring to the frontiers 
 with those about him. 
 
 c. Nominatives and accusatives absolute are also 
 used, and sometimes datives. 
 
 1057. The calamity was Aiyw imp 6 avficpogd, xal 6 ot~ 
 told, and the wailing passed ^>yh ix 6 Ilagauvg did 
 
 6 fiuxgog TH/og s eg ocoxv 
 
 dujxb) imp , 6 tTeoog a 6 !'i«- 
 gog d nugayyiXXoi VK ' n . Xen. 
 
 from the Piraeeus through 
 the long walls into the city, 
 one person conveying the 
 neios to another. 
 
 1058. They being kept Ei'gy(o r ' PA avj6g d o &aXao~ 
 from the sea, and being r<tv- octB, x «t xuxu yrj* nog- 
 
 Oged by land, certain per- &im*' 9A t iyx*H?%*>* *h 
 sons endeavoured to deliver 7roo,- 'A&ipctiof* uyo) 3a 
 the city to the Athenians. 6 noXi:. Thucyd. 
 
 11* 
 
126 
 
 »REEK EXERCISES. 
 
 d. The absolute case of participles from impersonal 
 verbs is always the nominative. 
 
 1059. When it is in his "Msoxl PA,ae ds ga&vfisoo, (iov- 
 
 power to live at ease, he 
 chooses to labor. 
 
 1060. They said that he 
 having received bribes, took 
 not Argos, when it was in 
 his power easily to take it. 
 
 1061. He does evil things, 
 knowing that they are evil, 
 when it is not necessary to 
 do them. 
 
 Xo{lCt 
 
 I 71OVS0J. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 0tjfxl M - sa avxbg a dwgodo 
 
 X80) FA 'f a , OV% aiQEOt INF-S 
 6 "AQ/Og, 7l(XQ80Tl FA ' nQ 
 
 nsxcog avxbg algsoj l 
 Herodot. 
 
 sv- 
 
 NF.sa 
 
 Ugaxxco xaxog, ytyvooaxta oil 
 xaxbg sipl (§ 26.), ov 
 dsl PA - ao avxbg ngaxxa. 
 Plato. 
 
 1062. It having seemed Aoxsl PA -/ ffl - ne ds iya> d ht nog- 
 good to us to go forward still gooxagoo ngosgxofiai A - INF - sa , 
 further, we were seized. £vXXa[i6dvoj P A Lucian. 
 
 e. The particles <ag, ooonsg, &tc. are often put with 
 absolute cases, for the most part in order to express a 
 reason. 
 
 1063. He sent word to AyysXX(o fa Evgvpsdcav d nag- 
 Eurymedon to be present, si^ii, cog 6 ^co^'ov tuvdv- 
 
 as the place was in danger. 
 
 1064. They deserted the 
 city, as also the goddess had 
 abandoned the citadel. 
 
 v£vco* A -P r . Thucyd. 
 
 ExXsina sa 6 noXig, cog xal 
 6 &sog anoluTKo M « PA -i' o 
 dxgonoXig. Herodot. 
 
 1065. As their companions "Axe &sdo[iou FA - o exatgog, 
 were spectators, much emu- noXvg cpiXovuxla ylyvo- 
 
 lation arose. 
 
 1066. He pleaded not in 
 his own defence, for he was 
 unable, as his thigh teas pu- 
 trefying. 
 
 [taL im P. Xen. 
 
 Ovx dnoXoysoficu imp , slfil ydg 
 advvaxog, waxs g^tko m - pa, F" 
 6 i^rjgog. Herodot. 
 
THE INFINITIVE DENOTING PURPOSE. 
 
 127 
 
 10C7. The she-goats, as 
 if a wolf were approach- 
 ing, fled for refuge into the 
 wood. 
 
 1063. They think to gain 
 applause if they speak evil 
 of him, as if all men knew 
 not. 
 
 1069. They restrain their 
 sons from bad men, as the 
 intercourse of the good is 
 the practice of virtue, but 
 that of the bad, the destruc- 
 tion. 
 
 1070. We lie down, as 
 if it were allowable to have 
 repose. 
 
 1071. I have said these 
 words, not as if it were 
 necessary for us now to do 
 these things. 
 
 C at£, GJG71SQ XVXOQ TtQOOU- 
 (.11 PA " sa , (u 6 VAT] XCCTUCpSV- 
 
 yco sa . Longus. 
 
 Oi'ofAou Evdoxipeio IWF «#" jjy 
 ntgl avzbg" filuocpijfiew 9T5 ^ a , 
 owns q ov nag a-p tl'doi MPA -P. 
 Isocr. 
 
 °0 vlsvg ugyw anb b novr^bg 
 Itr&Qtonog, a>g 6 per b xgr)~ 
 UTog b [A ilia a cioxrjOLg a 
 (§ 41., a.) e^ui Pi b aQSTtj, 
 o a,f 8e 6 7iovr t qbg, xaTctkv- 
 oig* (§41., a.). Xen. 
 
 KUTUXEIIJOU, (x)OTT£Q t$S(JTl PA - n - ne 
 
 T)av%la j^oj. Xen. 
 
 Oi'Tog f'of'w P b Xoyog, oi'x o>$ 
 du PA - n - no ipa a i'fdrj oviog 
 tiqutto). Isocr. 
 
 XLVI. The infinitive is often used to de- 
 note the purpose of an action. Grammar, 
 Rule XXIX., Obs. 1. 
 
 1072. He was sent to sa- ffipnu p ^ a xtvw^ a b Zevg xara 
 crifiee to Jupiter agreeably fiavtela* rig. Xen. 
 
 to a certain oracular re- 
 sponse. 
 
 1073. There comcth a "jy^oiuu yvrt, t'x b ^uuupnet 
 woman of Samaria to draw arjltui fa vSion. N. Test, 
 water. 
 
128 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1074. I deliver to you 
 this boy to take care of. 
 
 1075. And he sent them 
 to preach the kingdom of 
 God, and to heal those who 
 were sick. 
 
 1076. He gives a decree 
 to the clerk to read, longer 
 than the Iliad, and vainer 
 than the orations which he 
 is accustomed to deliver. 
 
 HaQCtdldcafii, av 6 ncclg oviool 
 snt[isUo[iai p ^ a . Demosth. 
 
 Kal a7ioaTsXl(o^ a avzbg xr\gva- 
 oca o fiaodela 6 Osbg, xat 
 laoficu 6 aa&svm PA, ? r . 
 N. Test. 
 
 /Hd(ti[iL avayiyvcoaxo) sa yr\- 
 cpiO[xa o yga[i[iaTSvg, [laxgbg 
 [isv 6 'lltag (§ 28.), xsvbg ds 
 6 Xoyog (§28.), off e#eo M * 
 Xsyca. iEschin. 
 
 a. The infinitive is governed by adjectives express- 
 ing fitness, ability, or quality. 
 
 1077. Your natures are 
 hard to govern. 
 
 1078. The agricultural 
 art is most easy to learn. 
 
 1079. The enemies were 
 not able to expel us. 
 
 1080. Thou thinkest to 
 prove to the Athenians that 
 thou art worthy to be hon- 
 ored. 
 
 1081. They were ready 
 to go to arms, and they 
 threatened Theramenes and 
 those with him. 
 
 1082. They turn false 
 informers, if they are able 
 to speak, and give false tes- 
 timony, and take bribes. 
 
 XaXsnbg (si/xl) 6 Vfiirsgog q>v- 
 
 aig uQXb) fa . Thucyd. 
 c O ysoigyixbg rix vr \ Q(*5iog slfil 
 
 [lav&dva sa . Xen. 
 c O noXi[iiog ovx slfil ixavbg 
 
 sy<a O-sXavvco. Xen. 
 c Hy£o[icu ivdsixvvat M - INF -/ ffl 
 
 3 A&r)Vouog, otl a^iog si [it 
 
 Tipdm*' 1 "'. Plato. 
 
 "Etoifiog slfil eg 6 onXov i'rjfiL, 
 xal 6 Origa[iiv7jg d xal 
 o d [1st 3 avzbg s a7iaXi(>) tmp . 
 Thucyd. 
 
 2?vxo<pccvTE(o, iav dvvarbg 
 slfil so Xsyta, xal ipsvdo- 
 (iccqtvqeco, xal dojgodoxia* 
 Plato. 
 
THE INFINITIVE PUT FOR OTHER MODES. 
 
 129 
 
 10S3. To me indeed they 
 seem to be unable to be 
 taught to attend more to 
 any other thing, than to 
 this. 
 
 1084. They advised him, 
 saying, that there was not 
 a place more convenient to 
 encamp in than that. 
 
 "£yojye to* dox&co u8vvatog riy.1 
 diduox(ti f f a u).log ug fiullov 
 imiAtkeofiai (719), rj ov- 
 Tog s (352). Xen. 
 
 2v^l6ovIevo} imp avxbg d , Xtyco, 
 b)g ovx tipl xojpog (til- 
 rrjdeiog ivojqaxo7ii8tvo^ai 
 ixuvog (§28.). Herodot. 
 
 6. The infinitive is often put for other modes with 
 wg, wars, nqlv, nuQog, insl, insidrj, ct/gi, [isxqi, and ears, 
 going before it. 
 
 1085. They prefer to pay 
 money, 50 as not to serve as 
 horsemen. 
 
 1086. The army was sent, 
 as it seems to me, for the 
 subjugation of the Libyans. 
 
 1087. He proceeded to 
 such a pitch of outrage, that 
 the father of the damsel jlcd 
 to the camp. 
 
 1088. They take care 
 that the citizens shall not 
 be such, as to desire any 
 evil or shameful thing. 
 
 1089. They made much 
 noise calling one another, 
 so thai even the enemies 
 heard. 
 
 E&iXa TeXeu aoyvoiov, (ag (it) 
 Inntva). Xen. 
 
 ^Anonifinat tm P 8s 6 otquuoc, 
 cog iya) doxia, inl AiSvg 
 xaTaoTQocprj d . Herodot. 
 
 JBlg jooovTog ne ngoxwoico f a 
 v6pig (§ 23.), wg 6 nairjQ a 
 6 x6qt) (p£vyoi 1VF ' sa (§ 13.) 
 rig 6 OTQazontdor. Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 Eni^ieXo^iai onag (j.tj roiovrog 
 rifil ff 6 7ioXliT]g, wots 
 nov7]Qog rig i'pyov rj uioxQog 
 icfir^t M (726) . Xen. 
 
 Kpuvyrj noXvg noito) im P xaXsoj 
 aXXrjXtov, o)urf y.ul o noXi- 
 fiiog a uxovio l "'-P r (§ 13.). 
 Xen. 
 
130 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1090. But an earthquake 
 having happened, before any 
 thing was settled, the assem- 
 bly was adjourned. 
 
 1091. Before he sent the 
 army, he despatched to 
 Barce a herald. 
 
 1092. But behind he trod 
 in his steps with his feet, 
 before the dust was spread 
 around. 
 
 1093. They praised until 
 I even blushed, lest haply 
 I might be very much short 
 of the merit of the praises. 
 
 1094. If the hare should 
 run by the nets, it is neces- 
 sary to pursue him, until he 
 is taken spent with fatigue. 
 
 ^eio^ibg g (§ 45.) ds ylyvo- 
 f,u/.L FA,sa , tcqIv rig enixv- 
 gow v - l **-f a , o txxXr t ala ava- 
 6<xllu*-f a . Thucyd. 
 
 JTIglv ds 7/ anoinsXlw INF ^" a 
 
 6 Bdgxrj xr]gv$. Herodot. 
 Avrdg omo&ev Y/viov a rv- 
 nroj imp novg d , ndgog xo- 
 vig a anyi X v(ti v -™*-f a (§ 13.). 
 Horn. 
 
 ^Enaivsta imp u%gi nov xcu igv- 
 -frgtdca INF iyw a , [it] aga 
 TidfinoXv 6 a^la g 6 %naivog 
 dnolunbi M -°^ r . Lucian. 
 
 El 6 Xayag nagaTgf%(o °' sa 
 6 ugxvg, XQ'h /*?*«#£« avrbg, 
 ears aXlax(o A ' 1NF ' sa anayo- 
 qbvoj A,PA 
 Arrian. 
 
 c. The infinitive is put after olog and b'oog for wois, 
 and ecp co or icp cots for inl tovtm aoxs. 
 
 1095. He was such a Toioviog tlftl, olog pr] fiovlo- 
 man as not to wish to put to [icu nolvg dnoxrlvvvfii 6 
 death many of the citizens. nollrrjg. Xen. 
 
 1096. If thou hast met El rig evivyxdvw p 2rmxbg d 
 with any such Stoic, as nei- roiovrog, olog d (xijrs Xvnsca, 
 ther to be grieved, nor to be write vcp r,8ovh s xcxraondco. 
 drawn by pleasure. 
 
 1097. He rested so long, 
 as both to sacrifice and to 
 address the people. 
 
 fir t rs icp rjdovr) 
 Lucian. 
 
 Tooovtov avanavoi' M - imp , ooov 
 xallugiw^ a rk xal 6 drjfxog p 
 
 Tigooenca 
 
 Herodian. 
 
THE INFINITIVE PUT AFTER ofoc, 0O0g f &-C. 
 
 131 
 
 1098. They reported to 
 Cyrus, that there were so 
 many good things within, as 
 during a generation of men 
 would not fail. 
 
 1099. He agreed to share 
 in the common alliance, on 
 condition that he should re- 
 ceive twenty talents. 
 
 1100. They said that they 
 would not give up the dead, 
 unless on condition that they 
 [the enemy] should depart. 
 
 AnuyysX/.ca %W P 6 Kvgog, on 
 
 joaovzog huI ° (§ 26.) 
 
 Xv5ov uyudbr, baog ne ' p in' 
 
 ■ av&Qunog ysvw* fir) v.v 
 
 (381) irtdelmo '«*. Xen. 
 
 SvrtMhifu u - sa fisrs^co "'-■ff 
 6 y.oirog ovuua/la =, f<p w 
 Xa l u6ur(x) lyF sVxoat to.~lv.vtoy. 
 Polyb. 
 
 L.71W sa OTl OVX (XV UTlOOlOCO- 
 
 fu°- aa 6 vey.Qog, tl urj icf co 
 re u7iHj.ii lyy - sa . Xen. 
 
 The abbreviated expressions oToj tifu and olo$ r up) are more 
 common, the former of which usually signifies to be wont, and the 
 latter, to be able. 
 
 1101. I meet with many, 
 who are not able to explore 
 me. 
 
 1102. The gnats on ac- 
 count of the winds are not 
 able to fly high. 
 
 1103. They made the 
 tongue such as both to ar- 
 ticulate the voice, and to 
 signify all things to each 
 other, which we wish. 
 
 Uo/.vg u fvxvyzuvG), og eyio ov/ 
 oiog T€ si fit (3ao~avl£b). 
 Plato. 
 
 c O y.o')va)ip vnb 6 iivsuog s ov% 
 olog re el fit vipov nsTOfiui. 
 Herodot. 
 
 O y't.bma noiso) f a oiog a-f 
 
 UQ&QOIO T£ O (pOiVTj, X«t 
 
 orjfiuivca nag u).).T)).a}v, og 
 fiovXoftat. Xen. 
 
 d. The infinitive is often used for the imperative, 
 particularly by the poets. 
 
 1104. Do thou make war 2v ds 4ym 6 Inl o !E3Uof« 
 
 upon Greece for me 
 
 uTQctTfvoj M . Herodot. 
 
132 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1105. Nor stay thou, lest 
 some one either hit or smite 
 thee. 
 
 1106. Be thou not eager 
 without me to fight the Tro- 
 jans. 
 
 1107. When thou gettest 
 him, endeavour that he no 
 more shall come among the 
 Greeks. 
 
 1108. O stranger, tell the 
 Lacedaemonians, that we lie 
 here obeying their com- 
 mands. 
 
 Mrjds ah dq&vpw, y.i) tig av 
 i] 8alX(o 3V ' sa , ij eXavrb) su ^ a . 
 Horn. 
 
 Mr) ov ys avev&sv tycoS 
 hXalofiai 7ioXt[xl£(o Tgotg d . 
 Horn. 
 
 Enuv ds avrog 7if.QiXa[i6u- 
 vca ' v - sa t noiiw, onrog jurjxht 
 eg "EXXrp d<j>ixvso[iai. He- 
 rodot. 
 
 \fl !-svog v , dyyiXXco Aaxtbai- 
 [i6viog d , OTL Tijds XslfttXL 
 
 sxstvog 
 
 Q1JIH 
 
 &g> M.FA.?r # Epigr. ap. He- 
 rodot. 
 
 XL VII. The infinitive with the neuter article 
 prefixed is used as a substantive in all the cases. 
 Gh'ammar, Rule XXX. 
 
 1109. Doing evil to men 
 differs in nothing from in- 
 juring. 
 
 1110. To honor is often 
 more glorious than to be 
 honored. 
 
 1111. Instead of saluting 
 each other, they kiss with 
 their mouths. 
 
 1112. Through a desire 
 of hearing your wisdom, I 
 will venture to extemporize. 
 
 O xaxwg Ttoiica uv^gcanog a 
 6S ^8ixi(o oidtlg™ (961) 
 diacpsQco. Plato. 
 
 e O g Ti^aio 6 Ti^dco noXXdxig 
 slfjusvdo$og ne . Plut. 
 
 Avxi o TTQOocxyogevG) aXXr]- 
 Xiav a , cpiXiw 6 oto^cc d . 
 Herodot. 
 
 1 Tito TiQO&vfilci % 6 axova)f a 
 6 vfihsgog aocpla S, ToXfidm 
 avTOOxedia£(o f a . 
 
THE INFINITIVE USED AS A SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 133 
 
 1113. They commanded 
 these things, that they might 
 not break the peace. 
 
 1114. I was necessitated 
 to pursue, since I saw us 
 suffering grievously in re- 
 maining. 
 
 1115. When will these 
 obey the magistrates, who 
 even glory in contemning the 
 magistrates 1 
 
 1116. I will not betray 
 thee, but I will defend with 
 what things I am able : and 
 I am able by good-will and 
 by encouraging. 
 
 1117. On assuming the 
 government, immediately he 
 began warlike enterprises. 
 
 1118. We sailed under 
 Cyprus, because the winds 
 were contrary. 
 
 1119. We spend the time 
 of acting in preparing our- 
 selves. 
 
 1 120. After accomplish- 
 ing all things, which he 
 wished, he killed them. 
 
 1121. But call thou not 
 contradicting reviling ; for 
 reviling is something differ- 
 ent. 
 
 12 
 
 Tlgoiniti sa 8s ovxoq, 6 g fit] Xva 
 I'nxu 6 aJiovdtj p . Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 'Avayxd'Qco *S a diiaxu, insl 
 ogdco im P iyta iv 6 fiiva 
 xaxug ndo%b)» Xen. 
 
 ZZots de ovxoq nelOo) u ^ 
 6 agxwv d , bg xal uydXXa M 
 inl 6 d xajacpgoviw 6 dg- 
 %bjv s • Xen. 
 
 2v ov 7tgodidoijj.i, aXX d^ivvta 
 bg d dvva/Attt, ' dvvafxac de 
 svvoia d re xal 6 d naga- 
 xsXnxo u . Plato. 
 
 "A[4<x 6 d 6 ag%r} nagaXu(x6d~ 
 
 VQ) Sa , ZV&lbig TloXEfXLXOC I'g- 
 
 yovS dgx(o M ^ a . Herodian. 
 
 c T7i07vXib)f a 6 Kv7iQog a , did 
 6*6 uvspog a slpl ivavilog. 
 N. Test. 
 
 o nodTTh) xqovog tig 6 
 7iagaoxsvd£(o M avaXioxta. 
 Demosth. 
 
 Mnd 6 xaT0Q&6u)f a nag, bg 
 flovXofictt xm P, dvatgio) sa av- 
 jog. Herodian. 
 
 AXXd ov o uvTiXi/tx) /j,tj xuXiw 
 Xoidogsh) u ' iTtgog yug ug 
 tlul 6 XoiSogiu) M . Plato. 
 
134 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 
 1122. He said that to 
 enrich was more princely 
 than to be rich. 
 
 s nXovTsa Xiy<o im P 6 nXov- 
 t/£w tifil INF ^aadiy.og ne . 
 Plut. 
 
 
 a. The infinitive is frequently governed by IVsxa 
 understood. 
 
 1123. And he went in 
 to tarry with them. 
 
 1124. Nevertheless he 
 continually sent out horse- 
 men, that scouts might not 
 injure the fields. 
 
 Keel sla&QXoiuu *" sa 6 s [leva f a 
 avv avxog. N. Test. 
 
 'imrsvg fAsvioi sx7ti(X7i(o im P asl, 
 6 s fX7] nQodgofxog a 6 ayqog 
 xcexovgysoj. Thucyd. 
 
 b. The infinitive takes before it the same case as the 
 preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same per- 
 son. Grammar, Rule IV., Exc. 
 
 This rule obtains also, when the infinitive is preceded 
 by the article to, or by the particle wots. Ibid., Obs. 3. 
 
 1125. He so cultivates the 
 earth, as to be injured in cul- 
 tivating. 
 
 1126. They were so train- 
 ed to fortitude, as alone to 
 conquer fighting. 
 
 1127. Formerly we strove 
 in order to rule others, but 
 now in order not to do our- 
 selves that which is com- 
 manded. 
 
 Ovrcag igyufyficu 6 yrj, acts 
 
 Xen. 
 
 Hgbg avdolct* ovtco Twudsvwf' 1 , 
 wots fiovog VlJtCtb) [MX%0- 
 
 fiai PA -? r . Isocr. 
 
 JlQOTEQOV (XSV V71SQ O % 6 aX- 
 
 Xog % ao%(o ayavlfyfiou %m P, 
 
 VVvl ds V71SQ 6 S fJ.T] 71018(0 
 (XVTOg 6 TtQOOTUTTCO p - PA -2> r - ne . 
 
 Isocr. 
 
SUBSTANTIVES COUPLED BY A CONJUNCTION. 135 
 
 I 
 
 XL VIII. Substantives singular connected by 
 a copulative conjunction have an adjective, verb, 
 or relative plural. Grammar, Rule VII. 
 
 1128. Xenias and JPasion, Ssviag y.ul Jlaalmv, ip- 
 
 having entered into a ship, 6uh(a Fi - sa slg nXoiov, a,no- 
 
 sailed away, ntiojf". Xen. 
 
 1 129. Eteocles and Po- Eisoy.Xr,g y.al nolvrsi'xrjg Tieyl 
 lynices engage in single com- 6 fiuodsla s povo^a^tco, y.ul 
 bat for the royalty, and kill xthVco aXh]l(av. Apollod. 
 each other. 
 
 1130. They all came not, °0 ds nag fisv ovx %o,uca Asa , 
 but Arimus and Artaozus 'jgiaiog ds y.al 'jlQzdo^og 
 and Mithridates, icho were y.al Mi&QidaTrjg, og dpi 
 most faithful to Cyrus. Kvgog d mozog. Xen. 
 
 a. If the substantives be of different persons, the 
 verb plural must agree with the first person rather than 
 the second, and with the second rather than the third. 
 
 1131. Thy father and I Q nuxr t Q oi) ° y.al iym odv- 
 sorrowing iccre seeking thee. vuu M - PA fyiiw im P av. N. 
 
 Test. 
 
 1132. I and you to ill beg *Eyoi y.al ov diopai uvzugS 
 of him not to destroy the pr) diueptislgw 6 ovrovala. 
 conversation. Plato. 
 
 b. If the substantives are of different genders, the 
 adjective or relative plural must agree with the mascu- 
 line rather than the feminine or neuter. 
 
 1133. He approaches ngeattfu o dunw/oquxptigi y.al 
 
 Dionysophanes and Clcaris- 6 KfoaQioTrj*, uadypm iv 
 ta, sitting in the garden. 6 Ttagadfiaog. Longus. 
 
136 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1134. Agrippck the king ^Ayglnnag 6 (taoiUvq xal Bsq- 
 and Bernice came to Csesa- vlxt] xaxavrdoi f a slg Kai- 
 
 rea, to salute Festus. 
 
 (§ 44., 6.) 
 N. Test. 
 
 PA.// 
 
 <X>fj<jTog. 
 
 c: If the substantives signify things without life, the 
 adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter 
 gender. 
 
 1135. They say that na- 
 ture and law are contrary. 
 
 1136. We have much 
 pitch and tar, which quickly 
 raise a great flame. 
 
 Evavxlog upl INF q>vaig a xal 
 vofxog a cprjfil. Aristot. 
 
 HoXvg nhxa xal oivnnuov 
 fya, og ta%v nagaxaXsv 
 (§ 26.) noXvg yXo!;. Xen. 
 
 d. The adjective or verb frequently agrees with one 
 of the substantives, mostly with the nearest, and is un- 
 derstood to the rest. 
 
 1137. Claps of thunder 
 and flashes of lightning and 
 a long night overtook them. 
 
 1138. Seven months and 
 a year having passed al- 
 ready, Darius was indignant. 
 
 1139. They say that it 
 behoves one to be just, that 
 to him being reputed to be 
 just may arise from the repu- 
 tation magistracies and mar- 
 riages, and whatever things 
 Glauco enumerated just now. 
 
 Bqovit] 8s xal aarqanri xal vvl 
 fiaxgog xaraXafi6dv(o tm P 
 aviog. Chariton. 
 
 jEjrra ds i^tjv xal iviavzbg & 8i- 
 iqXo^iai u ' VK 'P ydr}, 6 /laguog 
 aaxdXX(o im P. Herodot. 
 
 Asyta tag %gr] dlxaiog* dpi, 
 Xva doxsco A ' FA - d dlxaiog d 
 (§14., Ex.441.) slfil yi- 
 yvo\iai su duo 6 <5o|«, ag/r) 
 T£ xal yd^tog, xal oaog ue,p 
 ( § 26.) nsg rXavxwv disQ- 
 XO[iai K ' sa dgxi. Plato. 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 
 
 137 
 
 XLIX. The price of a thing is put in the 
 genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXV. 
 
 1140. They serve in war Miafrbgoxgaxsvo)* bnoxav x\g 
 for pay when any one has avxbg s diopai'* 3 . Xen. 
 need of them. 
 
 1141. They said that they nglafiai IITF <jp^t fm ^ o x*»Q a 
 purchased the whole country unag xgidy.ovxa xdlarxov. 
 for thirty talents. Xen. 
 
 1142. For this great bene- Ovxog 6 fisyag tmgyiala dvo 
 ft it exacts two drachms. dgaxpy ngaxxco m A Plato. 
 
 1143. They took a great Ada nolvg Xa i u6uy(o sa , og 
 
 mngdoxco F -f a xdlavxov niv- 
 ts xal sl'xooi. Thucyd. 
 
 El8id sa orvyegbg Egicpvlr], og 
 XQvabg epilog dvyg dt%o- 
 
 booty, which was sold for 
 five andmtioenty talents. 
 
 1144. I saw the hateful 
 Euriphyle, who received gokl 
 for her dear husband. 
 
 1145. I would not ex- 
 change my misery for thy 
 attendance. 
 
 1146. They say that 
 neither the soldiers, who 
 sold the command to him 
 for money, are trust- worthy 
 guards. 
 
 (IV.l 
 
 f a . Horn. 
 
 obg Xaxgua 6 i t ubg dvonga- 
 
 ulldc 
 
 o.fa 
 
 £ta ova 
 iEschyl. 
 
 (ptjul fi^ds o oxgaxiwxrjg^, og 
 b vcqxV ctvxbg zgrjf.ioc p urco- 
 dlda) t uL M - sa , ntoxbg U[il i: * r 
 (§ 13.) cpgovgog (§ 14.). 
 Herodian. 
 
 L. The crime and punishment are put in the 
 genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXVI. 
 
 1147. He says that Aris- 0qp] 'Agioxeldrjg* dktr- 
 tides was convicted of axoj A - ,I,F -« a dwgodoxla. 
 
 bribery. Plut. 
 
 12* 
 
138 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1148. Assuredly I will 
 indict thee for things con- 
 trary to law before Rhada- 
 manthus. 
 
 1149. Prosecute for theft 
 before an arbitrator, and 
 thou shalt not be in danger. 
 
 1150. The Ephori re- 
 called Sphodrias, and ac- 
 cused him capitally. 
 
 1151. If one compelled 
 by another should kill any 
 one, whom wilt thou accuse 
 of the murder 1 
 
 3 A{iiXsi ygdqxo "••#" ov nagdvo- 
 [tog enl o c Paddfiav&vg s * 
 Lucian. 
 
 Aixdtpi M nXoTttj ngbg diairrj- 
 T»jg a , xal ov yavdvvsvo). 
 Demosth. 
 
 c O 8 "Eyogog avdcxaXita f a xs 
 6 2cpodglag, xal V7idyb) imp 
 &dvaxog. Xen. 
 
 El rig dvayxd£(a p - PA -/ a vtt 
 aXXog s qoovsvco °^ a Tig, xlg 
 alxidoiiai 6 (povog ; Lu- 
 
 LI. The matter of which any thing is made, 
 and the part by which any thing is taken, are 
 put in the genitive. Grammar, Rule XXXVIL 
 
 1152. Let him plait a nXixw (ivgolvri oxicpavog. Pin- 
 wreath of myrtle. dar. 
 
 1153. They are dragged, "EXxw, ov 6 gig, dXXd 6 nwyav. 
 not by the nose, but by the Lucian. 
 
 beard. 
 
 1154. He gave to me the Eyw o SaxxvXiog -dida/u* 1 ai- 
 ring made of iron. ' drjgog noiim F,PA ^ . Lucian. 
 
 1155. If I raised my face, El fisv ngoocoTiov i$avloxr)iu°-P r 
 they held me by the hair. tyog, now xaxixo* im ? . 
 
 Eurip. 
 
 1156. But Jesus having e O ds'lrjoovg xgaiico **•& avxog 
 taken him by the hand, lifted 6 xslg, iyslgm imp avxog. 
 him up. N. Test. 
 
<CQ INSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 
 
 139 
 
 1157. They raised the 
 remaining stones with ma- 
 chines made of short tiin- 
 bers. 
 
 1158. The young chil- 
 dren they tie by the foot 
 with a cord, fearing lest 
 they may tumble down. 
 
 1159. I likened her not 
 to goddesses, but to works of 
 skilful artists, made of stone, 
 and brass, or ivory. 
 
 Aelgto imp o snlXoinog Xi&og 
 (xttfccvr) d %vXov ftgcixvg noi- 
 s<o ppa p. Herodot. 
 
 c O ds vijmog ncudlov di(o 
 6 novg otuxqtov^, (xt) xara- 
 xvU<o r -* u 'f a (§ 26.) dsifial- 
 vta. Herodot. 
 
 Ov &sa ys slxa^co^ a , %txyLxr\g 
 d * ayad~bg drjy.Lovgyr]{ia, 
 Xl&og, xal xaXxbg, % iXi<pag 
 noiita *- r *-P. Lucian. 
 
 LII. Measure or distance is put in the 
 accusative. Grammar, Rule XXXIX. 
 
 1160. He marched to 
 Ephesus, which is distant 
 from Sardis a journey of 
 three days. 
 
 1161. These banks were 
 distant three or four hundred 
 feet from the river. 
 
 1162. And having gone 
 forward about forty stadia, 
 they encamped near a cer- 
 tain eminence. 
 
 1163. The fountains of 
 the Euphrates and Tigris 
 are distant from each other 
 two thousand five hundred 
 stadia ; but they unite near 
 the city Seleucia. 
 
 3 A7iigxo(iai A,,sa ig "Eysaog, og 
 a7texio anb 2aq8ug xoslg 
 ^fiiga bdog. Xen. 
 
 'O ds ox^V ovwg xgstg ij xix- 
 xagsg nXs&gov anb o noxa- 
 fibg ansxta im P. Xen. 
 
 Kocl ngoiqxofiai A - PA - aa oxddiog 
 a>g xsaaaqdxovxa, avXlfr- 
 (iai f a nqbg Xocpog d tig. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 *0 nr\yr\ Evqtgdxrjg xocl Tiyqig 
 duxw uXXyXwv S oxddiog 
 dioxZXiot n svxaxoo 10 1 ' ovfx- 
 6uXXh) ds xaxd ZeXsvxeia 
 noXig a . Strabo. 
 
140 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 LIIL Time token, if indefinite and protracted, 
 is put in the genitive. Gi'ammar, Rule XLL 
 
 1164. For I have not 
 seen them for a long time. 
 
 1165. The following win- 
 ter the sickness again fell 
 upon the Athenians. 
 
 1166. The same day the 
 Athenians having passed 
 over into Eubcea, engage 
 also with the Chalcideans. 
 
 1167. In ten years they 
 will not come ; and when 
 they come, they will depart, 
 having accomplished not one 
 of the things which they ex- 
 pected. 
 
 Ilolvg yecg avibg ovx ogetw 
 Xgovog. Aristoph. 
 
 * O 5' imylyvoficet FA x u V L ® v 
 6 vooog xodsvxsgov imiil- 
 tttw sa 6 A&rjvalog d . Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 e cevxbg yftsgcc 6 A&tjvouog 
 dia6alvo) PA,sa ig 6 Ev6oui, 
 avfi6ceXl(o xeel 6 XceXxidsvg d . 
 Herodot. 
 
 Asxee fisv exog ovx V x0 ° ' oxav 
 8s egxoficet A - su - sa , drcaX- 
 Xceaaca p,s /, Ttgdaoca PA ^ a ov- 
 ddg™ off 8 (§ 20., d., Ex. 
 524.) iXnlfo im P. Plato. 
 
 If definite, in the dative. 
 
 1168. And the third 
 month after his return he 
 sailed to Andros. 
 
 1169. They put also the 
 JEginetae this same summer 
 out of iEgin-a. 
 
 1170. Wast thou present 
 with Socrates on that day on 
 which he drank the poison 
 in the prison 1 
 
 Keel fiSToc 6 xcexdnXoog a xglxog 
 fi7]V dvecyea r S a in "Avdgog a . 
 Xen. 
 
 3 AvloT7]fiif a ds xeel Alyiv^xrjg 
 o cevxbg &sgog ovxog e| 
 Al'yivce. Thucyd. 
 
 JIagaylyvofiat sa ^(oxgcexyg d 
 ixs7vog 6 i] fit gee og 6 epceg- 
 ficexov nivea sa iv 6 deafitox^- 
 giov ; Plato. 
 
FREPfcSl I'lOXS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 141 
 
 ine /to7^' '07?^, in the accusative. 
 
 1171. They remained 
 in • Macedonia three whole 
 months, until he came from 
 Thrace. 
 
 1172. The Greeks having 
 embarked sailed a day and 
 a night with a fair wind. 
 
 Kv.dijixm tmp sv Maxsdovla 
 xoelg okog fiqv, ecog lyxo- 
 {xou A - sa ex Oqkx^ De- 
 mosth. 
 
 c "Ekhjv avoc6ulv(o PA '** 
 Tx/.ew im P rifisQCC xal vv!; 
 ■avsvjia d xukog. Xen. 
 
 LIV. A preposition in composition often 
 governs the same case, as when it stands by 
 itself. Gramma?', Rule LL 
 
 1173. Hearest thou not 
 how many things they wit- 
 ness against thee ? 
 
 1174. Make for us gods 
 svho shall go before us. 
 
 1175. And having taken 
 the sword, she slew herself 
 before her husband. 
 
 1176. He entered with 
 Jesus into the palace of the 
 high priest. 
 
 1177. After we came into 
 this rocky land, he kindled 
 a fire. 
 
 1178. He says that 
 Chryses prayed against the 
 Greeks to the god. 
 
 1179. Fear not, that any 
 
 Ovx axovfo noaog ov% xarot- 
 (laQxvQtw ; N. Test. 
 
 JToiio)^ a - s 6/w d &sog og tiqo- 
 7ioqsvo[a(u iyoL N. Test. 
 
 Keel lafi6dv(o eA - ,sa o £lq>og, 
 eavxov Ti()oavouQm sa 6 avrig. 
 Plut. 
 
 JSvVBlCfEQXOflOU *-' sa o Itjoovg 
 elg 6 avXrj 6 aQXUQZvg. 
 N. Test. 
 
 Exst ntxqatog oSe eloegx ' 
 fiui A,5a z&Mi't avaxaua f a 
 nvo. Eurip. 
 
 Qn^il o Xqvar,g & xaxev^o- 
 
 l/<(iog s Tigog 
 
 6 &e6g\ Pluto. 
 
 Mrj xyiuj 
 
 '/„ »"•/<*. 
 
 ontag au rig aw 
 
142 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 one may tear thee with thy 
 children from this altar by 
 force. 
 
 1180. He laughs at Cra> 
 sus, and at the boasting of 
 the barbarian. 
 
 1181. The Milesians hav- 
 ing come to the Athenians, 
 exclaimed against the Sami- 
 ans. 
 
 1182. Fighting for their 
 masters, they easily put to 
 flight those who resisted. 
 
 1183. The rest of Greece 
 revolted from the Athenians 
 after the naval fight, except 
 the Samians. 
 
 1184. Alight from the 
 chariot, Trojan dames, and 
 lay hold of my hand, that 
 I may set foot out of this 
 vehicle. 
 
 1185. Send therefore toith 
 me some one of these trust- 
 worthy persons, who shall 
 declare whatsoever things 
 thou mayest order. 
 
 nalg fi(ti[*6g ods arro- 
 ond(o 9V S a pia d . Eurip. 
 
 KctrayeXdco 6 Kgdlaog s , xcci 
 6 [xsyocXavxia S o (3dg6agog. 
 Lucian. 
 
 '0 Mdqoiog nag A&r/vaiog* 
 
 SQXOfiOCl A - PA,sa , y,ttXU.6odbi tmp 
 
 6 ZuiiiogZ. Thucyd. 
 
 Tnegfid^oijai o deoTroirjg S, 
 
 '&laT7]fit 
 
 A.PA.p 
 
 gctoitog 
 
 tqsttq) M A Herodian. 
 c O aXXog c EXXdg n dcplajri^i^^ 1 
 A&rjvouog [isrd 6 vav^iayla a , 
 nXr\v 2a]iLQg s . Xen. 
 
 JEx6aZvo) sa anr\VT\, Tgwdg, 
 XtiQ s ^' £{*og Xa[i6dv(o M,sa , 
 'Xva I'lto ods o%og 8 c ioTi]fii * v f a 
 novg. Eurip. 
 
 2v}inefjt7i(fi f a ' 9 jolvvv iya> 6 
 <x$i6niOTog ovxog rig, og 
 sYga og av av (mariX- 
 Aw ■*/*. Xen. 
 
 LV. Verbals in tsov govern the dative of 
 a person with the case of their primitives. 
 Grammar. Rule XXXIV. 
 
 1186. The others must not 
 touch such a thing. 
 
 O aXXog ovx aittiov o toiov- 
 Tog s. Plato. 
 
VERBALS IN TfcOV. 
 
 143 
 
 1187. We must endure 
 much more dreadful calami- 
 ties than these. 
 
 1188. Afterwards more- 
 over the groom must lead out 
 the horse where he shall rub 
 him. 
 
 1189. Thou hast no pre- 
 tence that thou must not 
 afford to us laughter. 
 
 1190. They must not rule 
 others, but must pay tribute 
 to the Orchomenians. 
 
 1191. The laws say not 
 these things, nor the cus- 
 toms of the state, which you 
 must keep. 
 
 1192. Whoever of thy 
 servants may be sick, thou 
 must take care of all these, 
 that he may be cured. 
 
 UoXv ovtog (§ 28.) dsLVog 
 ovpcpOQa vjiofisvsTsov iyw. 
 Isocr. 
 
 "jSnEna yBfxrp) 6 Innov.ofiog 
 e&xteov 6 Xnnog onov yrj/a. 
 Xen. 
 
 Ovdslg ov d (§ 33., a.) nqo- 
 (paoig slfil, a>g ov ttuqexteov 
 ov d iyo) d ysXcog a . Xen. 
 
 Ov 6 aXXog s avrbg ccqxteov, 
 aXX OQXO[ibviog cpogog 
 olarsov. Isocr. 
 
 Ov ovxog Xiyca 6 vofxog, ovds 
 6 6 noXnda I'&og, og ne, P 
 qtvXay.tiov ov. Demosth. 
 
 a Og uv 7idfiv(o sv 6 olxirrjg, 
 omog g ov sTiifisXrjTiov nag, 
 oniag S-EQa7iEvoj* v . Xen. 
 
 a. Sometimes verbals in %iov govern the accusative 
 of a person. 
 
 1193. The legislator must '0 vofxo&hrjg nugaTiov 6 no- 
 
 endeavour to infuse pru- 
 dence into cities. 
 
 1194. One must dare to 
 say what is true, especially 
 when speaking of truth. 
 
 Xig d <pQ0vt]0ig i/jmoiia. 
 Plato. 
 ToXfxrixEov 6 uXt)&T)g n0 
 treat 1I,T - sa , aXXwg is xal 
 ntql aXri&Eia 6 Xiyo) rA,a . 
 Plato. 
 
144 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 LVI. Any verb may govern the accusative 
 of a noun having the same derivation, or a 
 similar signification. Grammar, Rule XXI., 
 Obs. 1. 
 
 1195. I have run a race 
 such as no one ever (ran). 
 
 1196. By reason of their 
 power, they commit the 
 greatest and most impious 
 offences. 
 
 1197. You have waged 
 many mars, both against de- 
 mocracies, and against oli- 
 garchies. 
 
 1198. Suffer me not to be 
 unjustly banished from the 
 country for which I have 
 incurred many dangers. 
 
 1199. At the river Mar- 
 syas they engaged with the 
 Persians, and fought a smart 
 battle. 
 
 1200. He sleeps a not 
 happy sleep, having killed 
 his children and wife. 
 
 1201. Thou livedst the 
 life of a hare, fearing and 
 trembling, and ever expect- 
 ing to be beaten. 
 
 1202. Now having labored 
 
 TQE%ia &g6(iog oiog ovdelg ma- 
 nors. Men and. 
 
 Aia 6 i^ovola a , fiiyag xal avo- 
 Giog afiocQTrijfioi upaQTUvo). 
 Plato. 
 
 JloXvg av 7toXsfis(o noXspog, 
 ttal ngbg dtjfj.oxgcnla 3 - , xa* 
 ngbg ohyagxlu a - Demosth. 
 
 Mr\ eya> negulda> sv - sa -P he 
 6 Ttaxglg adlx&g EY.nl- 
 tit(o ±- p *- sa - a (1011) vnig 
 og g iyoj noXvg xlvdvvog 
 xwdvvsvw. Lysias. 
 
 *Enl 6 Magovag noTCtfibg d 
 av^.6aXX(o sa re o ITeQarjg d , 
 xal fid/t] n<xxona.if a loxvgog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Evda d* vnvog ova Bvdalfxmv, 
 ncclg (povsvo) PA -/°, nut 8a- 
 fiup. Eurip. 
 
 Aayoag §log ^«w tmp , dsl- 
 doo M - PA -P not TQi(t(o, xctl asl 
 
 TlXrjGOb) *- 1T,F - s f 7CQOa8oX(X(0. 
 
 Demosth. 
 
 PA/a 
 
 Nvv oXvyog novsa 
 
 XQO- 
 
VERBS WITH AN ACCUSATIVE OF SIMILAR SIGNIFICATION. 145 
 
 a little while, we shall go 
 the remaining way without 
 fighting. 
 
 1203. They swore a strong 
 oath, neither to cultivate the 
 consecrated land themselves, 
 nor to allow another. 
 
 1204. And now, when 
 the Boeotians invited, imme- 
 diately we obeyed ; and we 
 thought that we should make 
 a double revolt. 
 
 1205. The glory of the 
 Lord shone round about 
 them ; and they feared with 
 a great fear. 
 
 1206. They found also 
 those feasting, crowned with 
 garlands of dry grass. 
 
 1207. Let the slave be 
 struck a hundred blows with 
 the whip. 
 
 1203. They consider not 
 that no bird sings when it is 
 hungry or is cold, or is 
 afflicted with any other mal- 
 ady. 
 
 1209. After the battle, 
 in which the Thebans over- 
 came the Lacedaemonians. 
 
 voq a , a^ua/sl c^Xombg (odog) 
 nogsvoficci. Xen. 
 
 "Ogxog ojxvva) f a loxvgog, ^utjts 
 avrog n (§ 13., a.) 6 Upog 
 yr\ eQyoc£o[icu™ T f a , /i^Tfi 
 aXXog d imteinet l "*-tf. 
 iEschin. 
 
 Nvv 8i, insidrj BouoTog ngo- 
 xaXeofiai f a , sv&vg vna- 
 y.ovojf a * xal vo^w imp 
 u<fiaxr\iii M - INF -// dmXoog 
 omoGTctoig. Thucyd. 
 
 z/o'ifa Kvgiog TiSQiXd/xnco f a 
 avrog a ' xal cpo6ea) p S a cpo- 
 6oq fiiyag. N. Test. 
 
 K(xiaXay.6dv(o tm P xal ixuvog 
 oxTjveo), oizqxxvoco P - PA J> o 
 fygog /iXog ori<pavog. Xen. 
 
 c O dovXog 7tXi]'/rj sxarov 6 fid^ 
 OTi$ d Tvnno. Plato. 
 
 Ov Xoyt£o{icu otl ovStlg ogvsov 
 udco oxav Tisivdco 8U rj qi- 
 yoo) su , tJ Tig uXXog Xvnr\ 
 Xv7ii(o sv . Plato. 
 
 Metu o fid^rj og vixd(a^ a Qr\- 
 Saioq Aaxsdaifxoviog. Isocr. 
 
 13 
 
146 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 a. Some intransitive verbs which express emotion, 
 and in which an action is implied, though not described, 
 govern the accusative. 
 
 1210. Art thou not angry 
 with Mars on account of 
 these atrocious deeds 1 
 
 1211. There were many 
 things happening, at which 
 one might be indignant. 
 
 Ov vsfieol&iiat "Agrjg d odf 
 xaQTsgog egyov ; Horn. 
 
 Elyl (§26.) noXvg ylyvofiai, 
 bg Tig av dvax^godvto °-f a . 
 Plato. 
 
 1212. With regard to such c O Toiomog owy.a iv noXefio? 
 a body in war .enemies are 6 ix&gog &aggt(o. Plato. 
 fearless. 
 
 1213. They were angry 'AyuvaxTso) im P not aXyito im P 
 
 and grieved at the Icing's 
 having been taken away. 
 
 1214. I rejoice at thy be- 
 ing successful, and sitting 
 by the towers of the enemies. 
 
 o fiaoiXsvg xa&aigioj P - F4 -P* 
 Herodian. 
 
 Xalgaa 8s av evrvxico, nott 
 TtgoarjUQu nvgyog d ex&gog. 
 Eurip. 
 
 b. Verbs of swearing govern the accusative of the 
 object sworn by. 
 
 1215. Swear not, neither 
 by heaven, nor by the earth. 
 
 1216. I swear to thee by 
 the dog, and by the plane- 
 tree, that these things are so. 
 
 1217. But if thou shalt not 
 do these things, by the Sun 
 I swear to thee, assuredly I 
 will satiate thee with blood. 
 
 Mr) ofAwaV, fi^ts o ovgavog, 
 fiyis o yij. N. Test. 
 
 Ofivvco av 6 Hixav, xal 6 nXd- 
 Tavog, ovtg) ovjog l^w INF . 
 Lucian. 
 
 El ds ovTog ov noiia, u HXiog 
 BTTo/ivvfii av, rj /lltjv av 
 alfia 2 xogsvviHo. Herodot. 
 
ADVERBS GOVERNING THE CASE OF THEIR PRIMITIVES. 147 
 
 LVII. Some derivative adverbs govern the 
 case of their primitives. Grammar, Rule XL V. 
 
 1218. They lived not like 
 robbers. 
 
 1219. They wrestled the 
 most excellently of the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 1220. You be,ar water- 
 drinking more patiently than 
 lions. 
 
 1221. Knowest thou how 
 much more unpleasantly a 
 tyrant lives than a king ? 
 
 1222. Decree therefore 
 the war worthily of Sparta. 
 
 1223. Those who lead 
 transgress more than tlwse 
 who follow. 
 
 1224. He is distinguished 
 the most of the disciples of 
 Protagoras. 
 
 1225. Thou hast spoken 
 rightly, and in a manner be- 
 coming both thyself and thy 
 country. 
 
 1226. You will find him 
 to have lived contrary to all 
 the laws. 
 
 1227. You seem to me 
 
 Oi>X ofiolwg (678) ^ X]](nTjg 
 
 §i(tiaxw fa . Isocr. 
 IIa).alo)f a xaXXioxa (563) 
 
 3 A&r]va7og. Plato. 
 
 c Tdqo7ioala qcxov { § 28.) o 
 Xecav (psgco. Xen. 
 
 JSlffw** ooog (§ 28., d.) 
 ai]8iois§ov ( § 28.) £(iw 
 tvqavvog {jaaiXsvg ; Plato. 
 
 Wfl<pi£a u * ovv a&ug (629) 
 6 Znagxri 6 nvXefiog. 
 Thucyd. 
 
 'O a/o) PA Ttocgavo^ifo fiaXXov 
 (§28.) 6 enoficu p \ Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 Evdoxifiia * fidXiaxa (§22.) 
 6 Hgcoxa/OQag fia&r}xi]g, 
 Plato. 
 
 'Og&wg e'gio), xal aavxov xs 
 xal o nctxqig 7XQ€7x6vxayg 
 (845). Plato. 
 
 EvqIokw avxbg ivavxiwg 
 (687) anag 6 vofxog 
 ^waxw^-P (§42.). iEs- 
 chin. 
 
 Jiyio uxuxwg uoxio) ovxog nag 
 
148 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 justly to endure all these 
 things, since you are hon- 
 ored above other men. 
 
 vtousvm, eneiTreg Tifiaco 
 diaopegorrcog (765) 6 alios 
 av&gwnog. Xen. 
 
 LVIII. Two or more negatives strengthen the 
 negation. Grammar, Rule XLIIL, Obs. 2. 
 
 1228. Than a moderate 
 distrust there is not any 
 thing more useful to mortals. 
 
 1229. But in a good man 
 no envy ever arises about 
 any thing. 
 
 1230. Nor let him ever 
 deliver his opinion, either 
 before the people, or in the 
 senate. 
 
 1231. Neither do nor 
 meditate any thing, either 
 impious or nefarious. 
 
 1232. No longer is it law- 
 ful for me either to look upon 
 or to converse with any 
 beautiful person. 
 
 1233. And neither did 
 any one attack from any 
 quarter, nor did any one of 
 the enemies come to the 
 bridge. 
 
 2(oq>Q0iv amaxla (§ 28.) ovx 
 si/xl ovdelg %gr t oifiog figo- 
 Tog d . • Eurip. 
 
 Aya&bg d 8s ovdelg negl 
 ovdelg % ovdsnoxs lyylyvo- 
 (xai cp&ovog. Plato. 
 
 Mrjds yvapr) snaf* fxijdenoxe, 
 fiyis iv o dijfiog, fujis iv 
 6 (iovlri. ^Eschin. 
 
 Mr\xs aos6rjg firjdslg, fxt]8e avo- 
 
 OLOg, [*1]Te 7T0l£(O s0 / a -"P, firjxS 
 
 PovXsvu sv -f a . Xen. 
 Ovxsxi I'lfiort iya ( § 40.) 
 
 ovts 7Tgoa6Xs7itof a , ovxs 
 diaXiyofiai v 'f a xnXbg (S39) 
 ovdslg. Plato. 
 
 Ktti O-VXS €7TlTcd-7]HL M ' sa ovdslg 
 
 ovdocfio&sr, ovrs ngog 6 yi- 
 qpvga a ovdelg egxofiav A ' sa 
 6 noXefiiog. Xen. 
 
 a. Except when they belong to two different verbs. 
 
 1234. We are not able not Ov dvvafiai, og sl'dco sa xal 
 to speak the things which oixovco fa , fir] Xcdsu. N. 
 we saw and heard. 
 
 CCXOVCO-^ 1 
 
 Test. 
 
USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 
 
 149 
 
 1-235. The Phocians sent 
 ambassadors to Lacedaemon, 
 and said, that if they did not 
 assist, they should not be 
 able to avoid submitting to 
 the Thebans. 
 
 c O fpwxtvg ngsG^EVb) imp fig 
 6 Aaxida^ucav, xal Xiyco imp , 
 eus si [it] ftorj&eto °-f a , ov 
 dvvaficu °ff fir) nel&w M,INF 
 6 On6aio? (808) Xen. 
 
 LIX. The article is often used for the rela- 
 tive and demonstrative pronouns. Grammar, 
 Rule IX. 
 
 For the relative pronoun. 
 
 1236. I will give to him 
 the breastplate which I took 
 from Asteropaeus. 
 
 1237. Drink the wine, 
 which the vines bore, which 
 the old man planted. 
 
 1238. He played in this 
 village, in which were also 
 these herds. 
 
 1239. But know, if thou 
 shall subdue these, there 
 is no other' nation that will 
 withstand thee. 
 
 dldwfii ov #«oaf o 'Agtzqo- 
 
 natog anavodw 1 ™? (§ 37., 
 
 Ex.899.). Horn. 
 nivta 9 oivog, 6 afinsXog cpi- 
 
 Qb)f a , o q)Vievo)f a 6 yiqatv. 
 
 Theogn. 
 
 Uocl£(o imp tv 6 xcofxr} ovxog, iv 
 6 elfil xal 6 fiovxoXia ovxog. 
 Herodot. 
 
 Eniaxafiac 8 k, u ovxog xaxa- 
 oxqicpoi M , tlfil ovdtlg uXXog 
 i&vog 6 ov vnofiiviti* He- 
 rodot. 
 
 For the demonstrative pronouns. 
 1240. With them all the c O& 6' dnag nXr)^** mbiov, 
 
 plain was filled, and it glit- 
 tered with brass. 
 
 1241. With them I was 
 numbered on that day, when 
 13* 
 
 xal XdpTxw Mtm P x^xos d ' 
 Horn. 
 
 Mtxu o d Xiy(o r f a ^/ttao d 6, 
 oxe tQXopat A,a 'Afia£oh> ' 
 
150 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 the Amazonians came ; but 
 not even they were so many 
 as the black-eyed Greeks. 
 
 aXX* ovd 3 o m Tooog elpl, 
 oaog IXlxwxji *A%aiQg. Hom. 
 
 a. The use of the article as a demonstrative pronoun 
 is chiefly confined to Ionic and Doric writers, though it 
 is found in this sense in Attic writers also, but for the 
 most part in the neuter and the oblique cases. 
 
 1242. But this thing I 
 think is not so : for consider 
 also thou what I say. 
 
 1243. These had a suspi- 
 cion, that he was leading 
 against the king, but never- 
 theless it was resolved to 
 follow. 
 
 1244. They arrive, and 
 enclose Mitylene in a circle 
 with a single wall. 
 
 c O ne 5' ol(iai ovx ovrwg s%(o ' 
 oxonsco yctg xal ai) og p-ne 
 Xsyco. Plato. 
 
 e O d (§ 33., a.) ds vnoipia 
 
 ElUl lmp , OTl Ct/(0P r TlQOg 
 
 (laoiXsvg a , opcog ds do- 
 7tB %L.im P $„ p aim . Xen. 
 
 '0 <5' acpixvzofiai, xal nsoixst- 
 #/£w MiTvXr,vr} sv xvxXog 
 anXoog rst/og d . Thucyd. 
 
 In the nominative the relative 8$ is used in this sense. 
 
 Kal og, axovca f a ovxog, 
 co#£&> M,mp aviog ex 6 rd$ig. 
 
 1245. Whereupon he, 
 having heard these things, 
 thrust him out of the rank. 
 
 1246. The light-armed 
 men they put to flight, but 
 they facing about defended 
 themselves. 
 
 1247. He indeed at first Kal og to [tsv Ttgmov oxvita tm P 
 was loth, and was not alto- ts, xal ov navv s&sXa im * 
 
 Xen. 
 z O ds ipiXog TQsnco %mp , xal og 
 
 VJCOGTQSqXO dflVVCO M - m i\ 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 gether willing to answer. 
 
 omoxolvofiaL f a . Plato. 
 
USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 
 
 151 
 
 b. The Attics moreover use the article as a demon- 
 strative pronoun before the relatives og, oW, otoi. 
 
 1248. When any one dies "Orav rig rsXsvraco sv ^ a 6 oaog 
 of those who are deemed av diaytgovrcag iv 6 fiiog 
 eminently virtuous in life. aycx&og xglvco p - su -/ a . Plato. 
 
 But particularly in a division, where <? fAv, S tl, are opposed to 
 each other, this that, the one the other, &c. 
 
 1249. He persuaded them, ntldu im P avibg, xal deduct fa 
 and gave to the one a. horse, 6 (Av Xnnog, 6 de yvvr t . 
 and to the other a woman. Xen. 
 
 1250. Through want some dC tvdeia* 6 fisv xXenrw, 6 de 
 steal, some break into houses, roi/wgvzib), 6 de avdgotno- 
 
 some reduce to slavery. 
 
 1251. And having over- 
 come in battle, some of the 
 Athenians they slew, and 
 some they took alive. 
 
 fa 
 
 dl'Cco M . Xen. 
 Kul [*u%T} d xQarto) J ", o [iev 
 diacp&eiQb) f a 6 'A&tjvcuog, 
 6 de, £db) PA Xaix6avto sa . 
 Thucyd. 
 
 1252. Some possess forti- e O [uv, iv i,dovr^ 6 de, iv Xvjit}, 
 tude in pleasures, others in 6 de, iv im-d-vftlu, 6 de, iv 
 pains, others in desires, q>66og, o avdola xrao^iat. rp . 
 others in fears. Plato. 
 
 1253. They scruple not to Ovx oxvico ano(palv(o M negl 
 pronounce concerning the 6 yr\ s, ondlog f re ayaxrbg 
 earth, both what kind is elfil, xal 6nolog { xaxog * 
 good, and what kind bad; dXXu. 6 f fiev yeyw, o f 8' 
 but they blame this, and inatvito. Xen. 
 
 praise that. 
 
 Sometimes the relative pronoun is used instead of the article. 
 
 1254. One they beat, "Og fib dig(of a , og de anoxrel- 
 another they killed, another va fa , og de Xt&o6oXe(o **. 
 they stoned. N. Test. 
 
152 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1255. Some of the men c ds 6 dvrig <x7ioXsl7T(o sa yswo*- 
 they left to till the ground, yica, og ds dnodldoi^i M,JW > 
 some they sold, some they og ds omoxTsivbif a . iElian. 
 slew. 
 
 LX. A substantive dual may have an adjec- 
 tive plural. Grammar, Rule II, Obs. 5. 
 
 1256. He took two strong aIqsoj M - sa d' aXni[iog dogv 
 spears armed with brass. dvco, xogvooco T ' VJL -P ^«A- 
 
 xoV d . Horn. 
 
 1257. He was full of so Tooovrog Ufil -ingaxn s nXstog, 
 much disorder, as to have wW %a> (1088) iv avxov 
 in himself two distempers voorjfjia^ dvo ivavriog du 
 opposite to each other. «M??'Aa)j> d,du . Plato. 
 
 1258. Have you two not Ov dsivbg dgoco) P Au , ^ria PA P 
 done most villanous things, in nag syw xcaga ix6<xXXa sa ; 
 seeking to expel me from Aristoph. 
 
 every place. 
 
 Also a substantive plural may have an adjective dual, when no 
 more than two persons or things are alluded to. 
 
 1259. Having a basket Kuvsov d* %w PA/du not xvxga 
 and pot and myrtle-branches, y,ul (ivgglvrj, nXavdta m -p, 
 we wander, seeking a place ^T£W PA - du xonog dngdyfiwv, 
 free from trouble, where onoi xa&idgvw p - PA -/ a -d" &«.. 
 seated we may abide. ylyvoficu°- sa -v av. Aristoph. 
 
 a. Sometimes an adjective does not agree in gender 
 and number with the substantive to which it is joined, 
 but with another of equivalent signification. Grammar, 
 Rule IL, Obs. 1. 
 
 1260. The senate was c O ds povXf}* yovxfa «>w ,,np , 
 
A DUAL PUT WITH A PLURAL. 
 
 153 
 
 quiet, not being ignorant, 
 that they were present hav- 
 ing daggers. 
 
 1261. The rabble nocked 
 to the ships, wondering, and 
 wishing to see Alcibiades. 
 
 1262. The army procured 
 food, as it could, from the 
 beasts of burden, killing the 
 oxen and asses. 
 
 ovy. ayvoeco 
 
 oxi ey/j 
 
 Qidiov ¥%(» naynuL. Xen. 
 
 a , davpa'Cco PA -P- n \ 
 ovkofiat PA -P- m 
 
 '0 oyXoq s a&QOi'C f ti p '^ a TiQoq 
 
 6 vavq 
 
 y.al el'dca 
 
 6 Ak/.i6iadriq. Xen. 
 c '0 de OTQUTev/ua 7ioo/£a) M - im P 
 
 atxov, ojimq dvva/ucu imp , in 
 
 6 VTZOQvytOV, XOTlTb) PA 'P- ra 
 
 6 fiovq xul bvoc. Xen. 
 
 LXI. A nominative dual is often put with 
 a verb plural. Grammar, Rule IIL, Exc. 3. 
 
 1263. Also other two sons Kal d 3 uXXoq dvo nulq riooei- 
 of Neptune came. dutov lxvio[iai sa . Apoll. Rh. 
 
 1264. With his hand he '0 (§ 59.) de xegfiddiov Xap- 
 took a stone, which not two 6dvio sa /.sly* 1 , oq ov dvo 
 men could carry. y 3 avrjQ qpe'ow °. Horn. 
 
 Also a nominative plural, meaning but two persons or things, 
 may be put with a verb in the dual. 
 
 1265. Two rapid rivers XelfiafjgoQ nora^bq eq [ii- 
 throio together their impetu- aydyy.Eta avp.6uXXo) oGqi^ioq 
 ous water into a ravine. vdeag. Horn. 
 
 1266. Two men skilful nuXaia^ioavvr^ i'djxwv dvrjg 
 in wrestling display their in 3 aXXykaiv 6 - 1 * ebq dvacpal- 
 strength upon each other. vto aXxrj. Oppian. 
 
 «. A collective noun may be joined with a verb 
 either of the singular or of the plural number. 
 
 1267. The multitude spread c O de oyXoq ■ a^wwi'w^ euv- 
 their garments in the way. %ov 6 ipatwv iv 6 bdoq. 
 
 N. Test. 
 
154 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 1268. A swarm of bees 
 having entered into the head, 
 
 filled it with honey-combs. 
 
 1269. The people of the 
 Syracusans were at much 
 strife among themselves. 
 
 1270. The multitude of 
 the soldiers rushed shouting 
 upon Astyochus, in order to 
 smite him : but he, fore- 
 seeing, flies for refuge to 
 a certain altar. 
 
 3 £o[i6g s fxihoaa eodvfii PA,sa 
 ig 6 xEcpcdr], xtjqIov S avrbg 
 i(j,nXi]&(a f a P. Herodot. 
 
 c O ds JZvgaxovoiog 6 dijfiog s 
 iv noXvg 7iQog aXXqXwv a 
 sQigslfilv. Thucyd. 
 
 c O 5s nXrj&og B 6 OTQaTmvrjg 
 
 oq^iao) 
 
 A./a.p 
 
 iyxgd^c 
 
 PA.sa.p.m 
 
 inl o AoTVo%og a , cotm 
 fiaXXto INF ' o (§ 59.) 6e, 
 7r^of/^w PA-5ffi , xaxacpsvya) inl 
 ptifiog* Tig. Thucyd. 
 
NOTES. 
 
 Example 1. You two rejoice, they two dance, are respectively the 
 English expressions of the second person dual of xki^ui, and the third 
 person dual of ^ooivu. 
 
 2. In the imperfect and aorists of the indicative, verbs beginning with 
 a consonant have the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 71. et seq.J, and 
 those beginning with a, t, o, ai, av, ei, the temporal ( Grammar, page 72. J. 
 
 3. The first future shortens the penultima of tpnivu by dropping /, and 
 changes the iu of olxiu into wru, and the ou of xctxou into wru (Grammar, 
 page 16.). 
 
 4. In the first aorist, (riytka and opokoyiu have n in the penultima of the 
 first person singular, these verbs making ntru in the first future (Grammar, 
 page 76. ) : also piva changes t into u (Grammar, page 77. J. 
 
 5. In the perfect, y^onpu, -xXout'^u, fyecu, and vtxdu, have the redupli- 
 cation (Grammar, page 72. J ,• cchix'iu has merely the temporal augment, 
 which is the same in all the augmented tenses (Grammar, page 72. J 
 and iugitrxu, a defective verb, which is used only in the present and imper- 
 fect, and borrows its perfect from the obsolete iv^iu (Grammar, page 
 129. J, remains unchanged at the beginning (Grammar, page 73. J. 
 
 6. The pluperfect of the defective verb yiyvutrxu is borrowed from the 
 obsolete yi'ou ( Grammar, page 127. J, the perfect of which, there being 
 no reduplication in verbs beginning with yv (Grammar, page 72. J, has 
 the syllabic augment only, which remains the same in the pluperfect 
 (Grammar, page 7 9. J. In the perfect of -riftiru, and consequently in 
 the pluperfect, t is changed into o (Grammar, page 78. J. 
 
 7. The second aorist drops the letter X in (ieixku, and the i in (pivyat 
 and Xi'iru, and in x*€u, an obsolete root, from which the defective verb 
 XapZAvu borrows its second aorist (Grammar, page 132.^, it changes the 
 tt into a (Grammar, page 79. J. 
 
156 . NOTES. 
 
 8. The second aorist, from which the second future is formed, changes 
 the si of trTtigu and xriUca, and the i of ttXixu, into a, and drops the i of 
 ttuSo) (Grammar, page 79. et seq.J. 
 
 9. The present passive of vriTkyfti is formed from the present active, 
 by changing pi into pxi, and shortening the penultima ( Grammar, 
 page 110. J. 
 
 11. The perfect of p'ittm has only the syllabic augment s, the redupli- 
 cation being neglected in verbs beginning with £ (Grammar, page 72. J. 
 In the perfect passive of r^iva i is changed into a, (Grammar, page 90. /, 
 and in the third person plural the circumlocution of the participle with ilp) 
 is used. 
 
 12. The perfect of verbs beginning with <r joined to a mme has no re- 
 duplication (Grammar, page 72 J, and therefore the pluperfect of anoint 
 has only the syllabic augment t (Grammar, page 79. J, and moreover 
 forms its third person plural from the third person singular, by inserting v 
 before to ( Grammar, page 88. et seq.J. 
 
 13. In xxkia the perfect, from which the paulo-post-future is derived, 
 is formed irregularly (Grammar, page 76. J. In the reduplication of 
 §uwru, instead of the rough mute $, the corresponding smooth r is used 
 (Grammar, page 72. J. 
 
 1 6. The second aorist active drops the second \ of trrlWu and uy- 
 y'iXXeo, and changes the i of trrikXa and the a of tririioa into a, and the 
 nr of fika,Tra> into £ ( Grammar, page 79. et seq.J. These changes 
 remain in the second aorist passive. 
 
 1 7. The second aorist active changes the rr of o-Qxttu into y, the £ of 
 tiou into a, and the «rr of xou-z-tw into £ (Grammar, page 79. et seq J, 
 which changes continue the same in the second future active, and the 
 second future passive, which is formed from it. 
 
 20. The second aorist active, from which the perfect middle is formed, 
 drops the / of Qxlvw, and the £ of Xf/Va/, and changes the i of oioxu into a 
 (or, as in Grammar, page 80., the i% in ox), and the <r<r of <xoxo-<ru into y, 
 making 'icpxvov, sXitov, 'ioxqxov (or 'io^xxov), and tnoxyov (Grammar, page 
 79. et seq.J. The perfect middle changes the a, of ttpxvov into n (Gram- 
 mar, page 95. J, the i of £A<?r«v into oi (Grammar, page 96. J, the a of 
 toetcxov into a (Grammar, page 95. J, and lengthens the short « of 
 Ivoxyov (Grammar, page 216. J. 
 
NOTES. 157 
 
 21. 'Axova in the perfect middle drops v, and prefixes its two first 
 letters to the temporal augment ; and in the pluperfect it receives a new 
 temporal augment ( Grammar, page 7 4. J. YIu<r%u is a defective verb, 
 and borrows its pluperfect middle from the obsolete vrUOu ( Grammar , 
 page 134. ). 
 
 24. 'Eugirxa is a defective verb, and borrows its second aorist from the 
 obsolete tuoiu ( Grammar, page 129. ). Yl^oo-ayu, a verb compounded of 
 the preposition *£>$, and the defective verb a.yu, which borrows its second 
 aorist from the obsolete kyayu (Grammar, page 125 .), takes its aug- 
 ment, which is the temporal, between the preposition and the verb ( Gram- 
 mar, page 74. ). Likewise avrnhfiufu, which is compounded of the prepo- 
 sition a^ro and the verb Vdupi, takes the syllabic augment in the middle 
 after «t«, which then loses o, because a preposition in composition before 
 a vowel loses its final vowel ( Grammar, page 15.). The t of rjiarw 
 becomes a. in the second aorist (Grammar, page 80. J. 
 
 25. TL'ittu borrows its second future middle from the obsolete -ricriu 
 (Grammar, page 135. J. 
 
 26. 'Ia-jvo? and 'l-rro; are substantives of the second declension, being 
 declined like \'iyo$ (Grammar, page 12. J. Kiuv, B-igat<rav, and xri^v%, 
 are of the third declension ; the first two, which are to be here given in 
 the dual number, form the genitive like Igaxav (Grammar, page 17. J, 
 and the other forms it like &y£ag (Grammar, page 20. ). The verb §ie», 
 being a dissyllable, admits no contraction in the third person plural of the 
 imperfect (Grammar, page 103. J ; but xop.iu, in the third person dual of 
 the imperfect, contracts a into u (Grammar, page 98. J. 
 
 27. The substantive uvtjo is declined in Grammar, page 26. The 
 compound verb xarakt'^ru takes the syllabic augment after the preposition 
 xa.Tx (Grammar, page 74. ), which then loses its final a (Grammar, 
 page 15.)-. 
 
 28. The substantive \v\<rrn$ (except in the vocative, where it makes « 
 or a) is declined like <ri\uv*$ (Grammar, page 10.), and vroXiftios like 
 Xoyo; (Grammar, page 12.). The translation, with the sign of the tense 
 affixed to iiyiafuti, shows that the third person singular of the second aorist 
 imperative of this verb is required. 
 
 29. The declension of the adjective ft,ct*eo; is given in Grammar, page 
 40., and that of the neuter substantive rt7%ot, which is to be here written 
 in its contracted form, page 22. 
 
 14 
 
158 NOTES. 
 
 30., 31., 33. The adjectives Wxoo?, xdkxsos, and ^va-tog, in their 
 simple form, are declined in the masculine like </oo; (Grammar, page 13.,/, 
 in the feminine like yuXin ( Grammar, page \\.), and in the neuter like 
 oerriov (Grammar, page 13. J ,• and in their contracted form, in which they 
 are to be here given, like those three words respectively after contraction. 
 The substantives rutpgog, ro7%o$, and ffri<pxvoi, of which the first is of the 
 feminine and the two others are of the masculine gender, are declined like 
 Xoyos ( Grammar, page 12. J, 
 
 32. The adjective vohuxni is declined like akn6m (Grammar, page 
 46. J. Concerning xuuv, see Grammar, page 26. 
 
 35. The declension of the adjective v$v$ is given in Grammar, page 41. 
 "T^ forms its genitive from the obsolete ffias '(Grammar, page 20. J. 
 
 36. The adjective %(>v<roxi£u$ is here declined like (fnXoyiXus ( Gram- 
 mar, page 46. J, but sometimes like ivyius. 
 
 37. XxXxotfoug is declined like Vivovs (Grammar, page 48. J. 
 
 88., 39., 40., 41. The comparative of ffaQgav is given in Grammar, 
 page 50. ; the comparative of fuxgog and the superlative of xXuvos, the 
 penultima of these words being long, are formed like those of tv$o%os ' and 
 the superlative of cLOXiot, the penultima of which is short, is formed like 
 that of troQo;. Comparatives in rtgos are declined like ftu-x^h (Grammar, 
 vage 40. J, and superlatives like xukot. 
 
 4:3. The adjective uxv; is declined like rdus (Grammar, page 41. J, and 
 the defective verb tg%of/u; borrows its second aorist from the obsolete 
 iXivSu (.Grammar, page 129. J. 
 
 44. M/Xaj is declined in Grammar, page 43. Nay?, in the common 
 declension of the word, is very irregular, making, in the singular, G. vs<wj, 
 D. vnt, A. vavv, and in the plural, N. vrug, G. nm, D. vccvo-i, A. vkus. 
 The verb ifopui is augmented by changing s into ti ( Grammar, page 73. J. 
 
 45. The adjective ivxvn^n is declined like the substantive xvvp);, gen. 
 -7}os, having but one termination, and being masculine and feminine only 
 (Grammar, page 49. J. The defective verb IkXvu borrows its second 
 aorist middle from the obsolete oXiu ( Grammar, page 133. J. 
 
 46. The adjective oguvog is declined like xaXes (Grammar, page 40. J, 
 and $u<r€ares like 'ivhofys ( Grammar, page 46. J. 
 
 47. UoXvs has only the singular of the nominative, accusative, and 
 vocative, masculine and neuter, and borrows all the rest from the obsolete 
 voW'os ( Grammar, page 49. J. 
 
NOTES. 159 
 
 49. The present participle middle of cu6a> is formed like the present 
 participle passive of tvttu ( Grammar, -page 85. J, and declined like x.akis 
 (Grammar, page 40. J. 
 
 51. The translation shows the perfect passive of ou^u to be required. 
 
 52. The present participle of <pivyu is declined like ixuv (Grammar, 
 page 43. / 
 
 53. Concerning f/Ayx;, see Grammar, page 49. 
 
 54. The signs affixed to y^a^ica show that the present participle is re- 
 quired, and the translation moreover that it must be in the passive voice. 
 
 55. Yla; is declined in Grmnmar, page 43. Shall mourn is the En- 
 glish expression of the first future middle of kotttu. 
 
 51. 'Ecyoc^c/xea is augmented in the first aorist middle by changing t 
 into u (Grammar, page IS. J. 
 
 5'S. 'Iv^os is declined like >Jyo; ( Grammar, page 12. J, and the second 
 aorist participle active of iie-ig%o/utai, a verb compounded of the preposition 
 tl;, and the defective verb so^o/Ltxi, which borrows its second aorist from the 
 obsolete iXtiSu ( Grammar, page 129.), like Xkuv ( Grammar, page 43. J. 
 
 60. The third person plural passive of -rotfiu contracts to into ou 
 (Grammar, page 98. J. 
 
 65. Kxdovtrni; is of the second declension. 
 
 68. In the perfect of igdu, the syllabic augment with the rough breath, 
 ing is prefixed to the temporal ( Grammar, page 12,). 
 
 69., 70. 'Micriw and rifia-co are to be contracted as directed in Gram- 
 mar, page 98. AuKilxiftovio; is of the second declension. 
 
 71. The defective verb yiyveoo-x-u borrows its first future middle from 
 the obsolete y\'ou (Grammar, page \21.J. 
 
 74., &c. The gender and number of adjectives, adjective-pronouns, and 
 participles, used without substantives, are to be determined from the trans- 
 lation, when not indicated by the characters elsewhere employed for that 
 purpose. Thus the sense of the corresponding English words shows that 
 rfe, in Example 74., must be written in the masculine plural ; euros and 
 iKitvof, in Example 78., in the neuter plural ; the second aorist participle 
 of tUtu, in Example 79., in the feminine singular ; the present participle 
 of cthtx'iot, in Example 81., in the masculine plural ; and Yixato;, in the 
 same Example, in the masculine. N is to be added to the third person 
 
160 NOTES. 
 
 plural of lyxuptaZ,*), because the following word begins with a vowel, 
 (Grammar, page 5.). 
 
 77. "E_^w is augmented in the imperfect by changing i into a (Gram- 
 mar, -page 73. ). 
 
 78. In the reduplication of the perfect of S-idce/xou, <r is used instead of 
 3- (Grammar, page 72. ). 
 
 79. TUtoj borrows its second aorist from the obsolete rtxa (Grammar, 
 page 136.). 
 
 81., 82. Zyfiiou, uSrAa, uQiXiu, and tri ^varied are contracted accord- 
 ing to the rules in Grammar, page 98. 
 
 83. "Ovxg is used only in the nominative, accusative, and vocative sin- 
 gular ( Grammar, page 34. ), and consequently is indeclinable (Grammar, 
 page S.J. 
 
 84. Allied has its second aorist middle from the obsolete %\u ( Gram- 
 mar, page 125. ), which is augmented by changing s in ti (Grammar, 
 page 73. J. lAieawm is of the second declension. 
 
 85., 87. "Kgdoftai and %&>gia> are contracted according to the rules in 
 Grammar, page 98. 
 
 88. The t following a in the third person singular perfect passive of 
 <ruX,w is dropped in the first aorist (Grammar, page 91. J. 
 
 89. The verb Waivia is compounded of W), which loses its final vowel 
 before the following vowel (Grammar, page 75. J, and alviat ' and there- 
 fore is augmented in the middle (Grammar, page 7 4. J, which is done by 
 changing at into y ( Grammar, page 72. J ' also 'he ti of the third person 
 singular perfect passive is changed into s in the first aorist (Grammar, 
 page 91. J. ^<xa%rn is of the first declension. 
 
 94. Tlgouyto is compounded of w^o and ayu, and is therefore aug- 
 mented in the middle (Grammar, page 74. ) ; but vifi and v^o, and some- 
 times ocfjcip), retain their final vowel before another vowel (Grammar, page 
 75.). 
 
 97., 98. Bv^oivnov and "A^x^os are of the second declension. 
 
 102. AiabtS^ao-xu is compounded of ha, and the defective verb ^ibgutrxai, 
 which borrows its second aorist from tfipi (Grammar, page 128.,/. 
 Aia.irtiofx.on usually takes the augment at the beginning and in -the middle 
 (Grammar, page 74.), but here it has only the temporal augment in the 
 middle, which is made by changing at into % (Grammar, page 72.^. 
 
NOTES. 161 
 
 103. 'EZ'Xiyxaf receives the temporal augment in the middle after i§ 
 (Grammar, page 74. ). _ 
 
 104. 'AtrefaXXa; has the syllabic augment in the middle after k-rl 
 (Grammar, page 74. J, which then loses o (Grammar, page 15. J. 
 
 105., 106. liKiXia, and Mayrm/a are of the first declension. Tirgutrx* 
 borrows its first aorist passive from rgoco ( Grammar, page 136. J. 
 
 108. 'Ecrays^a^a/ is compounded of It) and «y«, which lose their last 
 vowels before other vowels (Grammar, page 75. J, and tg%oju.a.i, and 
 receives its augment after ava (Grammar, page 7 4. J. N is to be added 
 here for the same reason as in Example 74. 'P^»j is declined like -n/j.* 
 ( Grammar, page 10. J. 
 
 111. In the imperfect of pirru £ is doubled after the syllabic augment 
 ( 'Grammar page 72. J. 
 
 112., 115. X«A*>j$<yy forms its genitive like £sA/S<iy (Grammar, page 
 17. J, and KogivDo; is of the second declension, both words being of the 
 feminine gender (Grammar, page 7. J. 
 
 116. The first aorist passive of tugitrxa is borrowed from ivgiaj ( Gram- 
 mar, page 129. J, and, like I-ttccmu in Example 89., changes the n in the 
 penultima of the perfect passive into i (Grammar, page 9\.J. "Agurof 
 is of the second declension. 
 
 118., 119. "l^u and uQixviopxi have no augment, i undergoing no 
 change in the tenses susceptible of augmentation (Grammar, page 73. ). 
 The plural 'Afavxi is declined like the plural of rtp-h ( 'Grammar, page \0.J. 
 Concerning the plural of y«Dj, see Note to Example 44. 
 
 121, XffMWU lias its first aorist from %'ou (Grammar, page 138. J, 
 before the syllabic augment of which uro loses o (Grammar, page 75. J. 
 The present participle of p'nu is to agree with totx^o; in the accusative 
 singular. 
 
 122. llo'itrtui is declined like irlxi/cu; (Grammar, page 24. J and 
 T>9-<ra<p»gy»; like rgivgvs (Grammar, page 22. J 
 
 1 25. Outo; , agreeably to what is said in the Note to Example 74., 
 must be in the neuter singular. Kar" is for koctx, the apostrophe de- 
 noting the omission of a (Grammar, page 5. J. 
 
 127. Ou becomes ouk before the syllabic augment of Koipxoj ( Gram- 
 mar, page 5. J. 
 
 14* 
 
162 NOTES. 
 
 133. '"Enreiva takes the syllabic augment in the middle after the pre- 
 position It) (Grammar, page 74. J, which then loses its final t ( Grammar^ 
 page 15. J. 'Atrhvhs is declined like a.\n6yis ( Grammar, page 46. J. 
 
 135. 0£«£ forms its genitive like S-<vgec% ( Grammar, page 20. J. 
 
 136. ' A.<pr,yiof*,Kt is compounded of the preposition «.<ro, which drops a 
 and changes <r into <p before a vowel having the rough breathing (Gram- 
 mar, page 75. J, and the verb fiy'to/tou, which beginning with « has no 
 augment ( Grammar, page 73, J. "Opygos is of the second declension. 
 
 140. Kktcck^Ivm in the perfect passive has the reduplication between 
 x,xtu, and xgivu (Grammar, page 74. J, and loses v (Grammar, page 78. J* 
 
 141. In uQiffwipi avro is changed as in Example 136., and "trr^fn 
 forms its perfect from trrdcu, future avhttw (Grammar, page 104.^, which 
 beginning with <r joined to a mute, the perfect has only the syllabic aug- 
 ment (Grammar, page 72. J, which has the rough breathing of the present 
 'l<r<r-4[/.i ( Grammar, page 113. J, and takes an t in the pluperfect (Ibid. J. 
 
 142., 143. *Ek\as is feminine and makes its genitive like Xa/utTrug 
 (Grammar, page 18. J, and xr^vos is declined like tu%os (Grammar, 
 .page 22. J. 
 
 144., 145. In the second aorist of IftGxkXw, ift becomes iv before the 
 syllabic augment (Grammar, page 75. J. The substantives 'A^a/a, 
 "Hxuat, KstpaXXvivtci, and ' Ap^et^vBcvix, are declined like <pi\ia (Grammar, 
 page 9. J, and Ad-oiinra, like fiovtrx. 
 
 146., 150. Tgi%M in eoiar^i^co and Lrji^a borrows its second aorist 
 from Ififtw ( Grammar, page 136.,/. ' Ax^oxo^vSog and 'AgysTos are of the 
 second declension, and the former of the feminine gender. 
 
 147. 'ILxxkivsj in the first aorist takes the syllabic augment after U 
 (Grammar, page 74. J, which then becomes \\. 
 
 1 53. Ila? is to be given in the neuter plural, according to what is said 
 in the Note to Example 74., &c. E7£« adds 6«. to the end of the second 
 person singular perfect middle, and drops la. from the middle of it. 
 
 154., 156., 157. Ka.fioux;as is of the second declension; 0ugiu and 
 KuWwn, of the first ; and 'A%iguv, of the third, forming its genitive like 
 fydxnv ( Grammar, page 17. J, and is moreover of the masculine gender 
 (Grammar, page 7. J. 
 
 159., 160. ~Bxiva> in iffSatvu has its second aorist from filSny.i (Gram- 
 mar, page 126.,). X/fl* and Kvgos are of the second declension. 
 
NOTES. 163 
 
 163. AapZivu takes its second aorist from XriZa (Grammar, page 
 1S2.J. MJjJa; is of the second declension. 
 
 166., 167. 2n>ufr*i is of the first declension, and Udr^eKkee of the 
 second. 
 
 169. 'Ecmwj is declined like fiorgvs ( Grammar, page 25. J, and Tag- 
 raeos like kiyog. 
 
 1 73. 'Ya.ppri'Ttxos is of the second declension, and Al6lo$ makes Altilt- 
 iras in the genitive. 
 
 181., 183., 184. MvofAi^uv forms its genitive like x%\thui (Grant' 
 mar, page 17. J, <&cUt\ like §u^a.\ (Grammar, page 20. J, and Tuiiilns is 
 of the first declension. 
 
 182. See note to Example 44., concerning the dative plural of vat??. 
 
 190. The second aorist middle of al^iu is borrowed from 'iku (Gram- 
 mar, page 125. J. The dative singular of vatJ? is given in Note to Ex- 
 ample 44. 
 
 193. Aitiu takes its perfect middle from %\u ( Grammar, page 128 . J . 
 
 195. "0>.uv6os is of the second declension. 
 
 196., 198., 199. The second aorist of t%u is borrowed from tr%iv 
 (Grammar, page ISO. J, that of iIo'ktku from iv^iu (Grammar, page 
 129.^, that of alpu from i\u (Grammar, page 125. J, and that of Ittftatt, 
 in the active voice, changes ecu into oi (Grammar, page 80. J, which ter- 
 mination in the passive it changes into r* (Grammar, page 92. J. 
 
 203. 'JLyeunt being in the feminine singular, the pronoun <rv understood, 
 with which the second aorist participle of tg%of*cci and "rrvpt, and the 
 singular first aorist imperative of \'iyu, must agree, is also in the feminine 
 singular. 
 
 204., 205., 207., 209. K^o7<ros is of the second declension ; and 'AYi*t, 
 'Aofttux, and Belexn, of the first. Concerning Hat, see Grammar, page 76. 
 
 210. In the perfect of xipvru i is changed into o (Grammar, page IS. J. 
 TliXoToiirxros is of the second declension. 
 
 214. Mt*' is for fttrx, a being cut off because the next word begins 
 with a vowel, and r changed into 6 because that vowel has the rough 
 breathing ( Grammar, page 5. J. 
 
 215. 2ri»3*» borrows its first aorist from «•«■!/« ( Grammar, page 136. J. 
 Xi/0/Vapn; is of the second declension. 
 
 216. The perfect participle of Urn/m is syncopated and contracted, as 
 in Grammar, page 119. 
 
164 NOTES. 
 
 219. The perfect middle of xairxt* is borrowed from ftitSa (Grammar, 
 ■page 134.y. MtiSias is of the first declension. 
 
 221. The plural ®ur7cia) is declined like the plural of 0/X/« (Grammar, 
 page 9. J. 
 
 231., 232. Tnrira,(pi^vni has its accusative according to the first declen- 
 sion ( Grammar, page 22. J ; ' Ayupipvuv, gen. -vovo's, forms its vocative 
 by shortening the long vowel of the nominative. (Grammar, page 21. J ; 
 and yow makes yovvccros in the genitive, by epenthesis, for yovxms, from 
 the obsolete yovag (Grammar, page 16. J. 
 
 234. 'E^ in Ifivr'iTgv/zi becomes h before the syllabic augment (Gram- 
 mar, page 75. J. 
 
 236. Kuri%a> is compounded of koctu, which loses its final vowel before 
 the following vowel, and 'lx,a>, which takes its second aorist from axS u 
 ( Grammar, page 130.^. 
 
 237. See Note to Example 216. 
 
 240. In the perfect of h^ixra-ca the two first letters of the present are 
 prefixed to the temporal augment ( Grammar, page 73. J. 
 
 241. 'Srgi/fiav and 'ExX/nrTovros are masculine. 
 
 242., 245., 246. "Agyo$ is declined like nl^os (Grammar, page 22. J, 
 HX/j like IXvts (Grammar, page 19. J, and Tvhiov like guXav (Grammar, 
 page 12. J. 
 
 247. The first aorist of udia is borrowed from 2>6w (Grammar, page 
 138.^, and has the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 73. J. 
 
 248. Txyyn; is here declined like Tgtfyvis (Grammar, page 22. J, else- 
 where commonly like rikuvn; (Grammar, page 10. J. 
 
 254. "Afsifti is compounded of «to, and the verb ilpi, conjugated in 
 Grammar, page 115. Kxiavbgos is of the second declension. 
 
 255. "Ea.*w changes i into u for its augment (Grammar, page 73. J. 
 The third person singular perfect passive of x.\iiu, from which the first 
 aorist is formed, ends sometimes in rttt, but here in trrai (Grammar, 
 page 90. J. 
 
 260. 'Evtp^eirtjs is declined like nkuvvs (Grammar, page 10. J, and 
 Tiy^s like o<pi$ ( Grammar, page 23. J. Both are masculine (Grammar, 
 page 7.). 
 
 262. The second aorist of xari^a is formed as in Example 236. 
 MccKttovia is declined like pxia (Grammar, page 9. J. 
 
NOTES. 165 
 
 263. HLxhuhw takes its augment at the beginning or in the middle 
 (Grammar, page 74.y, but here at the beginning. 
 
 268. T%itpa> in the first future, and consequently in the first aorist, 
 changes r into S- (Grammar, page 7? .). 
 
 277., 279., 285. Kovuv is declined like Ukdruv (Grammar, page 
 17. J, fohutta and wwt like QiXia (Grammar, page 9. J, and 2a>xg«Tflf 
 like r^r/i^tis ( Grammar, page 22. J. 
 
 288., 290. The proper names in these examples are of the second 
 declension. 
 
 295. In the accusative of Zivs the final vowel is to be dropped, because 
 of the vowel at the beginning of the next word, and the omission denoted 
 by an apostrophe (Grammar, page 5. J. 
 
 298. In irooxuoiui the o of t^o is contracted with the syllabic augment 
 into ov ( Grammar, page 75. J. KtxgoTiu is declined like <piXia ( Gram- 
 mar, page 9. J, and the plural 'A%x£vou like the plural of the same word. 
 
 300. The first aorist of u6iu» in 1tu>6'iu is borrowed as in Example 
 247., and the first future of yiyvo/axi in trvyyiyyofixt from yt/ta (Gram- 
 tnar, page 127. J. 
 
 301., 303. The imperfect of Z,xu contracts xi into v ( Grammar, page 
 103./ See Note to Example 127., concerning ov, and Note to Example 
 112., concerning XaXx>i5<wv. 
 
 305. *A-rori\iu has i instead of n in the penultima of the first future 
 and first aorist ( Grammar, page 76. J. 
 
 310. UguTxyloas is of the first declension, and vgoo-roov of the second. 
 
 HI 6. The iEolic form of the first aorist optative of xxrax'o-rru is here 
 used. See Grammar, page 71. 
 
 319. Tou; is declined like ^«j ( Grammar, page \9.J. In fiy'w £ is 
 doubled after the syllabic augment ( Grammar, page 72. J. 
 
 320. Soe Note to Example 44. 
 
 322. The first aorist of tit^uo-ku is borrowed from rtfu (Grammar, 
 page 13G.y, and that of <p\^u from the present inyxu (Grammar, pages 
 137., 17. J. 
 
 327., 331. The first aorist optative of rikioj and tiXivtkoi must be 
 given in the iEolic form. See Example 316. 
 
166 NOTES. 
 
 333. In tta.fpa.iu, compounded of hd. and pu.it), g is doubled, because this 
 letter begins the verb, and the preposition ends with a vowel ( Grammar, 
 page 75. J. 
 
 334. "A^jjro? belongs to the second declension. 
 
 344. 'Ev^Uxeo has its perfect from tvgiu ( Grammar, page 129. J, and 
 ua,v0Kvw from ftatJiw ( Grammar, page 132. J. 
 
 351. 'Ptjtros is declined like Xoyos. 
 
 354. YLafiXxco is compounded of xwra. and zkxa, the final vowel of the 
 preposition being dropped, and the smooth t being changed into the rough 
 S-, before the rough breathing of the vowel at the beginning of the verb. 
 The augment is as in Example 255. 
 
 358. B«/v&/ in a,*ro€a.iva) borrows its first future middle from /3a<w 
 ( Grammar, page 126. ). 
 
 360. Q}a i Q?u.%aZ t os is of the second declension. 
 
 374. In the contract verb Irccmco the Attic form of the optative is here 
 used, which is made by changing (nt into r,v ( Grammar, page 103. J. 
 
 378. Kh'iu here retains i in the first future and first aorist. 
 
 384. The first future middle of (tavd&vco is borrowed from y.a&iu (Gram- 
 mar, page 132. J. 
 
 389. The second aorist of (haivu in u-roSaiva is formed from (HGti/ii 
 (Grammar, page 126. J, and the first aorist passive of <pi^&, in xara^u 
 from h'iKca (Grammar, page 137. J. 
 
 398., 400. The second aorist of ytyvuo-xu comes from yvupi (Gram- 
 mar, page 127. J, and that of 'ix, 60 from <r%t«> ( Grammar, page 130. J. 
 
 403. The first aorist of Ixipigio is formed like that of <pi^u in Example 
 322. 
 
 414. The plural 2«^s/j, gen. 'Sufituv, Attic, or 2«^/j, gen. 2afiiuv, 
 Ionic, is declined like the contracted plural of oQt; (Grammar, page 23. J, 
 and YLgaiitros and ~2ce.f4.os like Xoycs. The perfect active of kxianu is 
 formed from a.x'ou (Grammar, page 126. J, and has a passive significa- 
 tion. 
 
 417. The proper names in this example are of the second declension, 
 with the exception of 'YtpiK^&rns, which is declined like T^in^ns ( Grammar ; 
 page 22. J. 
 
 418. The optative of the contract verb jroXifAiu is to be here given in 
 the Attic form. See above, Example 374. 
 
NOTES. 167 
 
 432. Kaxxa'&oxr,; is declined like <riXu*n$ ( Grammar, page 10. J. 
 
 433. The n in the penultima of the third person singular perfect passive 
 of aipiai is chai.ged into t in the first aorist (Grammar, page 9\.J. Aaxi- 
 }a.ip.u* forms its genitive like %i\3vv ( Grammar, page 17. ). 
 
 448. KiOctiouv is masculine, and declined like YlXarav (Grammar, 
 j>age 17.,/, and the plural 07>£*i like the plural of the first declension. 
 
 449., 453. The first aorist of 'hox.u is formed from Yoxu (Grammar, 
 page \2S.J. 
 
 451. In Xy^oiou, iy becomes U before the syllabic augment (Gram- 
 mar, page 75. J. 
 
 463. The second future middle of r^y^ca is formed from toif/.u (Gram- 
 mar, page 136. J. 
 
 475., 476. <£>cl<ri{ is masculine, and forms its genitive like \Xv)s 
 (Grammar, page \9.J, and AWi//iv>j is of the first declension. 
 
 480., 481. HXa.ra.ix, 3oicutix, and AlrmXtet, are of the first declension ; 
 lIi}.oTovyr,iros and llgotr%u)i, of the second ; and AioXi; and Hxtvouv, of 
 the third ; AloXt;, which is feminine, forming its genitive like iX'rii ( Gram- 
 mar, page \9), and IlXtveuv like TLxdruv ( Grammar, page 17. J. 
 
 485., 486., 487. Aafivivro; and 1u<pcov'itrx.os are of the second declen- 
 sion, ' kfjL^ut is declined like TlxdTcov, and Ztug Dorrows its genitive from 
 the obsolete AU (Grammar, page 20. J. 
 
 498., 499 'Hgctiov is declined like \vXot and Kct^Sua-tis like TiXeivnf. 
 
 503. The adjective Atvxuhioi has three terminations. See Note to 
 Example 44. 
 
 510., 512. Kiv«<p<wv forms its genitive as in Grammar, page 17., and 
 Kkiao%o; is of the second declension. 
 
 519., 521. K»<piuf is declined like fiutriXth; (Grammar, page 23. J, 
 and Ku*%ctor.; here forms its accusative according to the first declension, as 
 'li7<rct<pi£VT>;, in Example 231., and other proper names declined like 
 'roir^vi some-times da ( Grammar, page '22. J. The pluperfect of Xctu.ia.vu 
 is borrowed from ;.^» (Grammar, page 132. J, and has u instead of the 
 reduplication (Grammar, page 74. J, and moreover makes t<rx* in the 
 nird person plural ( Grammar, page. 71., Ubs. 4. J. 
 
 528. The optative of the contract verb o^xu is to be written in the 
 Attic form. See Note to Example 374. 
 
168 NOTES. 
 
 531. <$>ivyu and vronu makes s<r«v instead of utretv in the third person 
 plural of the pluperfect. See Note to Example 521. 
 
 547. The imperfect of h^dca has the syllabic augment "with the rough 
 breathing prefixed to the temporal (Grammar, page 73. J. ' AgnrroQuviK 
 is declined like rgwgtis- 
 
 548. The plural Mvkx) is declined like the plural of the first declension, 
 554. Techdras is of the first declension. 
 
 558. 2aA«/*<j forms its genitive like $ik<pi$ f Grammar, page 19. J. 
 
 560. See Note to Example 44. The first aorist of kyvvw is taken, 
 from ayu (Grammar, page 125. J, and has the syllabic augment instead of 
 the temporal, ( Grammar, page IS.). 
 
 562. *AS« is of the first declension. 
 
 578., 579. The superlative of -ffoXus is formed irregularly (Grammar, 
 page 52. J, and the comparative of lyxgxrbs by adding rsga? to the neuter 
 singular (Grammar, page 50. J. jj3!gg«$*is declined like nXavns. 
 
 588. Aogo forms its genitive from the obsolete Sega; (Grammar, page 
 
 16.;. 
 
 596., 597. 'Ii£uv is declined like likdreav ( Grammar, page 17. J, and 
 Aiytvs like ficcftktvs (Grammar, page 23. J. 
 
 599., 600., 601. luKtyu) Is declined like a.l$a>$ (Grammar, page 24.;, 
 Tagffo) like the plural of Xoyog, and "Okvrxt like the plural of the first 
 declension. 
 
 604., 606. Kvgxru^yis and lAa<r<ra.\turris are declined like nkavri$. 
 
 615. 'Axagvav makes avos in the genitive, like vratdv ( Grammar, page 
 
 17.;. 
 
 623. Tagagrn; and"Oga; are masculine ( Grammar, page I.J. 
 
 633. Iixuuv is masculine, and forms its genitive like TLxdruv (Gram- 
 mar, page 17. J. In the first future of \uxuv\Z,u r is dropped, and the 
 last syllable circumflexed (Grammar, page 76. J. 
 
 637. 'Avolyu is here augmented by changing oi into <w, and to this 
 prefixing t ( Grammar, page 73. J. 
 
 639. A/aXJ; makes its genitive like i\*)s (Grammar, page 19. J, and 
 Tg««j like XufcTas (Grammar, page 18.;, both words being feminine. 
 
 645., 647. Ev^agpe? and /V^i/gaV, the penultima of these words being 
 long, retain o in the comparative } but evitros and vrXovirios, their penultima 
 
NOTES. 169 
 
 being short, change o into &> (Grammar, page 50. J. N^it/j and 'O'&tMfftht 
 are declined like (Zae-iktl; (Grammar, page '23. J, and Ktx^a^ makes 
 K'tK£oxof in the genitive. 
 
 656. 'Icroxoarns is declined like <rgwgvs. 
 
 661. Instead of i<p*iv, »Ty is here used ( Grammar, page 124., bottom.). 
 
 664. <J>/Aoj in the comparative changes es and ai (Grammar, page 51. J. 
 
 666., 667. X/«f and Aax(J«^«» are feminine (Grammar, page I.J, 
 the former declined as in Example 159., and the latter as in Example 433. 
 
 671. ~2t60rn is of the first declension. 
 
 684., 6B5. Tiytarnf is declined like nXurws, and Kmeritpuv like Se»#- 
 ^<w» (Grammar, page 17. J. 
 
 689. 'EX/xa/v is masculine; <t>wx); is feminine, and declined like iX-r/y 
 (Grammar, page \9.J. 
 
 701. M/vwj is elsewhere declined like %eus (Grammar, page 19. J, but 
 here like nu; (Grammar, page 14. J, and moreover drops v in the accusa- 
 tive ( Grammar, page I4.y. 
 
 714. In uku the perfect middle changes u into «/ (Grammar, page 
 96. J, and prefixes the syllabic augment (Grammar, page 73. J. Itpikn 
 is of the first declension. 
 
 715. <&ikt>K£a.rTis is declined like t^iv^vs- 
 
 756. K«* makes its genitive like -^a^ (Grammar, page \S.J, and 
 IItA(9T«y»j«-af is of the feminine gender. 
 
 758., 759. Gtayl»r,s is declined like r^in^nt, Miya^x like the plural of 
 \uKoi, and 'Q^itrrvs like rikunns. 
 
 761. The genitive of xiias is syncopated and contracted, as in Gram- 
 mar, jKige 25. ; and BKmw is declined like nXarov. 
 
 766., 767. Txiyiro; is masculine ; r HX/j is feminine, and declined 
 here like o$i{ (Grammar, page 23. ). 
 
 787. Oi^Xxif belongs to the first declension. 
 
 795. TtXivriuf is declined like ra/uictt. 
 
 802., 803. 'A/tf{«*i»r)i; and B^air/Jaj are of the first declension. 
 
 824. Tow instead of met is here used for the genitive of rig (Gram' 
 mar, page 58. J. 
 
 844. K{ct*» is declined like TLkdrvr, and H«Xvx,^arti( like fpdgflfc. 
 15 
 
170 NOTES. 
 
 864. In the first future w afo like x„* >> ■ -r, 
 r and circumflexes the last s y l£ ^ " E ™* U ' 633 " dro P» 
 
 J£ ; *T+* "e, and declined lite^^^^ 
 
 888. Concerning the perfect midd]e ^ _ ^ 
 898 ' A ^^is of the first declension. 
 916. *I^«Vw is declined like T«*-i • t. 
 also Note to Example 521. T '"«*ff'« » Example 231. See 
 
 929. *ApnfSp is declined like £, w ^,. 
 
 958. n g ^» ug forms its genitive like WU***. /^ 
 
 q fin t, - , , . JN^r^r Grammar, page 18. J 
 
 960. B.ftA.' w „ is declined like ^*^. * * J ' 
 
 985. v O<rr, s here has SV« instead nf * . , 
 . page 58.;. * ^ ° f **» ln tfa e dative (Grammar, 
 
 991. See note to Example 661. 
 
 Zi 2 Zf:; is dedined Iike •**■* - d ■**- ». a*. 
 •A^iift r • K ^* w are deciined *« -*«*• 
 
 M. 74/ S '" mng a " d " the ■*"* ^mLL, 
 
 4T,nd^< naXW " " ^"^ like ^'^ n— *. lite 
 
 ^«^ia?, and AA.i« ? T V is masculine. 
 
 1038. ^^ ,, ded . ned ae f>j ^ ^^^ 
 
 In ' he P ' Ural *"** * ««ter ^ mm< „, w S6 , 
 
 whir!; „!ri f :r ir;' 1 - e ,ike ^ • a ° d *• «- •— ^ 
 
 E^pt'seT '^" !S te,, ' ned *"H(» -d tt^J M in 
 1063. Ei w S„, is decIined , ike ^ ^^^^ ^ i 
 1081. ©„ e «^| w is declined Hte t ^_ 
 1118. K„V e « fa feminine, and ofthe ^^ dec]ension _ 
 1133. A,„„^ w fa declined , ite r ^ BS( and ^ uk 
 
 ^ 4] 1160. »E^ fa feminine . Concera . ng ^ ^ ^ t() ^ 
 
NOTES. 171 
 
 1163. "Elfydrns is declined as in example 260. ; but Tiyps, which 
 there made to; in the genitive, here makes /Say. 
 
 1166., 1168., 1169. E£'/3a/«, h.\ytinm;, and A7y/v«, are of the first 
 declension ; "Av^ay, of the second ; and XaXKi^tv; is declined like 
 (Zxo-tkius. 
 
 1178. XjJo-jjj belongs to the first declension. 
 
 1199. blagruas is declined like rapix;. 
 
 1208. Yltivd.co in the third person singular present subjunctive con. 
 tracts an into r, (Grammar, page 103. J. See note to Example 301. 
 
 1256. A«£v here has louoo; in the genitive, by transposition for Vo^uo; • 
 and xa^uo-cu, in this instance, makes fy*a< in the perfect passive, instead of 
 the regular rpat. 
 
 1261. 'A\xiGid$ris is declined like nkeivvt' 
 

 H 
 

Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
LIBRARY OF 
 
 CONGRESS 
 
 003 038 323